Notice: Function WP_Interactivity_API::_process_directives was called incorrectly. Interactivity directives failed to process in "" due to a missing "DIV" end tag. Please see Debugging in WordPress for more information. (This message was added in version 6.6.0.) in /home/wimarys/Wim_Arys_photography/public_html/wp-includes/functions.php on line 6114
tips and tricks – Page 19 – Wim Arys

Category: tips and tricks

Category for advanced manuals with tips, tricks and a full menu run-through for mirrorless cameras from Sony, Fuji, Canon, Nikon, Samsung, Panasonic, Olympus, Ricoh/Pentax, Sigma.

  • Panasonic Lumix G90/G95 advanced guide

    Panasonic Lumix G90/G95 advanced guide

    Lumix G90/G95 Introduction

    Thanks for visiting my Panasonic Lumix G90/G95 advanced guidebook with tricks and tips. The following information commences from the Menu settings and passes through each and every aspect of this interesting camera. I realise this is quite a bit of information and facts, but you’ll get the hang of it shortly, guaranteed.

    Panasonic Lumix G9O setup blogging

    The camera’s Four-Thirds 20.3-megapixel sensor is built without a low-pass filter, which will allow it to produce detailed shots with correct tone, saturation, and illumination.

    Key Features

    • Four-Thirds 20.3-megapixel sensor
    • LUMIX G 12-60mm f/3.5-5.6 lens
    • Pre-installed V-Log L
    • 4K 24p/30p video recording
    • Full HD 60p/50p video recording
    • 25600 ISO
    • 4:2:2 HDMI output
    • 3.5mm mic jack
    • 5-axis image stabilization 2
    • DFD Focus Technology
    • Focus Stacking and Post Focus
    • 3” LCD flip-out screen
    • Splash- Dust-resistant

    Panasonic Lumix G95 screen

    I’ll be going through the complete Menu structure in this article, and giving you suggestions, techniques, and tricks as you go along.

    Diving into the MENU system

    When you switch on your Panasonic Lumix G90/G95 you’ll be asked to enter a date, time and timezone. This setting is necessary, as all images captured will have a timestamp, making it easy to find your favorite pictures in the future. After this is setup, press the MENU button. You’ll see a range of icons and pages. We’ll start at page 1 of the camera Icon (camera settings)

    MENU – Camera Icon – page 1 of 5 (also called the Rec menu)

    Panasonic G95-G90 menu camera icon page 1

    Aspect Ratio

    You can change the aspect ratio of your photos here. Changing the aspect ratio can be used as a way to boost your creativity, for instance landscapes often look great with a 16:9 ratio, or for sharing on Instagram, a 1:1 crop might suit you better.

    An M43 (Micro Four-thirds) camera has a native aspect ratio of (not surprisingly) 4:3. You should realise that changing the aspect ratio to anything else than this will actually crop the sensor, meaning that you’ll lose pixels. You should look at it as re-framing your image (like you can do in Lightroom or other photo editors) inside the camera. Jpeg’s will be stored with the chosen ratio, but RAW images (although previewed with the chosen ratio), will still have the full information of the 4:3 sensor retained.

    These are the aspect ratios available:

    • 4:3: native sensor ratio
    • 3:2: the ratio used in full frame cameras
    • 16:9: for a wider looking view
    • 1:1: Square aspect ratio, mostly used for social sharing
    Picture Size

    Picture Size sets the number of pixels for Jpeg (nor RAW). The higher the numbers of pixels, the more detail your pictures will have.

    • When the aspect ratio is set to 4:3, you use all the 20 MP of the sensor for a maximum image size of 5184 x 3888
    • When the aspect ratio is 16:9, you only use a wide crop of 14.5 MP of the sensor for a maximum image size of 5184 x 2920.
    • When the aspect ratio is 3:2 you use 17 MP of the sensor and have an 5184 x 3456 image size.
    • When the aspect ratio is 1:1, you use 14,5 MP of the sensor for an 3888 x 3888 image size.

    The Panasonic Lumix G90/G95 also has a digital teleconverter option, allowing you to zoom in by a factor of times 2 or times 4. This can be a handy feature if you don’t shoot RAW (see next item for more info).  Thanks to  in-body digital processing, the resulting Jpegs actually retain a larger image size than what you’d expect of de facto cropping the sensor by a factor 2 or 4. I would however only recommend using this feature if you’re a die hard jpeg shooter, since using RAW files and developing your images in Lightroom or another app will almost always get you better results.

    Quality

    Probably the most important setting is Quality. You can select either Jpeg, where the RAW data from the sensor is processed by an in-camera algorithm to produce a viewable image, or save your images in this RAW format. RAW retains all the data of the sensor, and is meant to be edited afterwards in a desktop application like Lightroom. Saving as RAW means that you have much more creative freedom afterwards to push shadows or pull highlights, sharpen and enhance your image in any way you please. A Jpeg retains only a fraction of this information, according to the algorithm inside the camera which might or might not suit your style and/or needs.

    Hence, my recommendation is always to shoot RAW or RAW Jpeg. This does mean larger files, but SD cards are inexpensive compared to your beautiful new Lumix. But some photographers prefer to shoot in Jpeg only because they are for instance not interested in post-processing images. In this case, I would set the Jpeg to the highest quality setting.

    If you only shoot in RAW, the image on the rear screen when reviewing the images are of a very low quality. When you import to the computer they are fine but it might be better to shoot both RAW and JPEG.

    AFS/AFF

    AFS is an abbreviation of Auto Focus Single and AFF is an abbreviation of Auto Focus Flexible. In AFS, the focus stays locked while the shutter button is pressed halfway and in AFF focus is continuously readjusted according to the movement of the subject. See AFF as a function between Single AF and Continuous AF.

    This can easily be changed by using the dial on the right of the ECF too:

    AFS/AFF

    The AFC function below AFS/AFF continuously changes focus according to the movement of your subject.

    Some more info on these modes for clarification:

    • AFS will find focus and stay focused at that distance until you take a photo or release the shutter button. This is handy if you want to focus and then recompose your shot for instance.
    • AFF will do the same unless it detects subject movement, at which time it will temporarily switch to AFC operation in order to re-focus.
    • AFC won’t start to seek focus until you half-press the shutter, and will continually evaluate subject movement and change focus as needed.
    • With AFS you can can lock focus on a particular point, then swing the camera to get the right framing; with AFC, it will not lock focus, but will keep re-focusing. That’s why Pinpoint focusing can’t be used with AFC.
    AF sensitivity (stills)

    You can adjust the AF sensitivity which affects how quickly/slowly autofocus will react. This will make autofocus a bit snappier at the cost of accuracy.

    Photo Style

    This applies only to Jpeg images, and the RAW preview. You can select a colour effect here.

    • Standard: standard Panasonic colour and contrast rendering.
    • Vivid: Brilliant effect with high saturation and contrast.
    • Natural: Soft effect with low contrast.
    • Monochrome: Monochrome  (black and white)effect with no color shades.
    • L.Monochrome: Black-and-white effect with rich gradation and crisp black accents.
    • Scenery: An effect appropriate for sceneries with vivid blue skies and greens.
    • Portrait: An effect appropriate for portraits with a healthy and beautiful skin tone.
    • Custom 1-4: Make your own presets for easy recall when needed.
    • Cinelike D: Gives priority to the dynamic range by using a gamma curve designed to create film-like images. Suited for editing.
    • Cinelike V: Gives priority to the contrast by using a gamma curve designed to create film-like images.

    As mentioned earlier, it’s possible to create your own Photo Style or customise the preset styles. This is basically a way of hacking into the Jpeg engine and adjusting it to your own style and preferences. There are 6 areas that you can alter.

    • Contrast: add or decrease the difference between the brightness and the darkness in the picture.
    • Sharpness: add a degree of sharpness or make your images softer.
    • Noise Reduction: add noise reduction for high ISO shooting.
    • Saturation: add more vividness to the colours. Or remove some.
    • Color Tone: add a blue, orange, red or green filter to your image.
    Filter Settings

    The filter Settings go a step further than merely a photo style. These include artistic effects like Low Key, Sepia, Cross Process and retro stylings. You can turn them ON or OFF here, select the effect you want to use and change the settings by using the touch screen. You can also set your camera up to shoot one with and one without an image effect simultaneously.

    If you’re wondering how you get to Creative Control mode, you need to set the mode dial to the paint palette.Creative Control mode

    And simply press up and down to select the image effects. You can also display the selection screen by touching the Recording Mode icon in recording screen.

    These are all the image effects available:

    • Expressive
    • High Key
    • Monochrome
    • Silky Monochrome
    • Cross Process
    • Bleach Bypass
    • Fantasy
    • Sunshine: you can select the position and size of the light source here.
    • Retro
    • Low Key
    • Dynamic Monochrome
    • Impressive Art
    • Toy Effect
    • Miniature Effect: you can select the portion of your image that is in focus here (and where the blur effect won’t happen)
    • Star Filter
    • Old Days
    • Sepia
    • Rough Monochrome
    • High Dynamic
    • Toy Pop
    • Soft Focus
    • One Point Color: you can select the color to leave in here by using a color picker.
    Color Space

    Select either sRGB or Adobe RGB here. Adobe RGB has a greater range of reproducible colors than sRGB, so it might be worth looking into this color space if you print to paper a lot. But remember that you’ll also need a monitor capable of reproducing the larger color range too. And this can often lead to problems when converting to sRGB or editing your images in external applications. Because of all this, I have it set to sRGB.

    Metering Mode

    You can change how the light is metered here, and hence how a correct exposure is calculated by the camera. If you feel that the camera takes over- or underexposed images according to your personal preferences, it might be worth changing the metering mode.

    Implementation of this is quite basic in this camera, you have a total of only 3 methods to choose from:

    • Multiple: This is the method in which the camera measures the most suitable exposure by judging the allocation of brightness on the whole screen automatically.
    • Center weighted: This is the method used to focus on the subject on the center of the screen and measure the whole screen evenly.
    • Spot: This is the method to measure the subject in the spot metering target.

    MENU – Camera Icon – page 2 of 5 (also called the Rec menu)

    Panasonic G95-G90 menu camera icon page 2

    Metering Mode

    You can change how the light is metered here, and hence how a correct exposure is calculated by the camera. If you feel that the camera takes over- or underexposed images according to your personal preferences, it might be worth changing the metering mode.

    Implementation of this is quite basic in this camera, you have a total of only 3 methods to choose from:

    • Multiple: This is the method in which the camera measures the most suitable exposure by judging the allocation of brightness on the whole screen automatically.
    • Center weighted: This is the method used to focus on the subject on the center of the screen and measure the whole screen evenly.
    • Spot: This is the method to measure the subject in the spot metering target.
    Highlight Shadow

    This allows you to lighten the shadows and darkens the highlights in your image (or video).  So this is a method of creating balance in your image if you feel like the highlights are too strong or the shadows too dark. You have 4 presets available, and you can also make 3 custom presets yourself:

    • Standard: no adjustments is set.
    • Raise the contrast: Bright areas are brightened, and dark areas are darkened.
    • Lower the contrast: Bright areas are darkened, and dark areas are brightened.
    • Brighten dark areas: Dark areas are brightened.
    • Custom: make your own preset.

    This is how to adjust the parameters for Custom presets:

    1. Rotate the front/rear dial to adjust the brightness of bright/dark portions.ImageA – Bright portion B – Dark portion
      • The rear dial is for adjusting dark areas, and the front dial is for adjusting bright areas.
      • To register a preferred setting, press ▲, and select the destination where the custom setting will be registered to [Custom1]/[Custom2]/[Custom3].
      • Adjustments can also be made by dragging the graph.
    2. Press [MENU/SET].
      • The screen display can be switched by pressing [DISP.] on the brightness adjustment screen.Image
      • Turning off this unit will return the setting adjusted with Image / Image / Image / Image back to the default setting.
      • When [Photo Style] is set to [Like709] or [V-Log L], setting is fixed to [ Image ] (Standard).
    i. Dynamic

    This setting will change contrast and exposure when there is a big difference from the darkest area to the brightest are in your image. What really happens is that the camera adjusts the exposure in order to capture more details in the highlights. You can choose between High, Standard, Low or Off.

    This naturally causes an under-exposure in the shadow areas. But inside the jpeg engine, the camera will compensate for this by boosting shadows. The downside here is that this will obviously lead to more noise in the boosted regions, but because this is done with data directly coming from the sensor, it can be quite useful if you are a jpeg shooter.

    There is also an impact on RAW images, because the exposure will be underexposed.

    i. Resolution

    Another jpeg only functionality, i-Resolution is a form of sharpening. High, Standard, Low and Off are selectable, and you should see these like the threshold for sharpening in an application like Lightroom. Many photographers discard these intelligent functions, and if you shoot RAW only, it’s not that important for you (except i Dynamic which can change your exposure plus or minus 1/3 stop). But if you shoot jpeg only, you should set it to Low at least, since most of the time RAW files would be sharpened in post processing too.

    Flash

    all flash settings.

    Red-Eye Removal

    If you use a flash when using Red-Eye Reduction, the camera will automatically detect red-eye and corrects the picture.

    ISO Auto upper limit

    Sets the upper and lower limits of the ISO sensitivity when you use Auto ISO or i ISO. Lower Limit should be set to 200 and upper limit to 3200, this is the range where you’ll get usable images without too much noise.

    Min. Shtr Speed

    A very important setting if you feel that the Panasonic Lumix G90/G95 is producing blurry images for your shooting style. Birds in flight, for instance, will need a faster shutter speed than many other types of photography.

    Since most of the time, you’ll need to raise ISO to gain faster shutter speeds, Panasonic (and many other camera producers) have made this option available.  You can set it to Auto, or choose a minimum shutter speed up to 1/32000. The latter is a bit high, but as I mentioned, if you shoot action sports or for certain types of nature photography, a minimum shutter speed of 1/1000 or 1/2000 should be set. At these speeds, you can begin to “freeze” action.

    Long Shtr NR

    The camera will automatically apply noise reduction to long exposures. This applies to both Jpeg and RAW files. A black frame is taken after your initial shot to measure the noise present. Since many environmental factors (like temperature and location) have an effect on the amount of noise that you’ll see, this is the best way to determine what is noise in your frame. This data is then subtracted from your image for a noise-free (more-or-less) result.

    MENU – Camera Icon – page 3 of 5 (also called the Rec menu)

    Panasonic G95-G90 menu camera icon page 3

    Long Shtr NR

    The camera will automatically apply noise reduction to long exposures. This applies to both Jpeg and RAW files. A black frame is taken after your initial shot to measure the noise present. Since many environmental factors (like temperature and location) have an effect on the amount of noise that you’ll see, this is the best way to determine what is noise in your frame. This data is then subtracted from your image for a noise-free (more-or-less) result.

    Shading Comp.

    All lenses have a lens profile that registers both distortion and shading in the corners at all apertures. These lens profiles can be applied in-camera to counter unwanted vignetting in your images. Especially important for jpeg shooters to turn this on. RAW shooters can apply these corrections later on (and with better results) in a desktop application like DXO optics Pro.

    Diffraction Compensation

    When you stop down your lens to a smaller aperture (normally from f/11 to f/22), a phenomenon called diffraction causes a loss in sharpness. It happens because light begins to disperse when passing through a small opening. When diffraction compensation is set to ON, the Panasonic Lumix G90/G95 will add sharpening to your image to try and counter this phenomenon. You should use it if you shoot jpeg.

    Stabilizer

    The Panasonic Lumix Lumix G90/G95 has a stabilised sensor. The sensor inside the camera is suspended on a magnetic field and can compensate for movement like the minute shakes of your hands or any other kind of movement. There are also many lenses available with an optical image stabilisation unit, that physically move glass elements around inside the lens to do the same. Both systems have their pros and cons, and it is generally accepted that a stabilised sensor works better for wide angle lenses (below 40mm) whilst optical lens stabilisation is more efficient for the tele range. It is also possible to use both systems at the same time (called Dual I.S.), where you’ll take advantage of the best of both worlds.

    It’s also possible to use the in-body sensor stabilisation with older, manual primes that don’t relay EXIF information (like most importantly focal length in this case).  You’ll need to manually set the focal length in the Focal length Set function to get an optimal performance.

    Ex. Tele Conv.

    You can digitally enlarge pictures without too much quality deterioration with this function. Only for jpeg use, you can extend the range of your lens by times 1.4 or 1.6 using this function.

    Digital Zoom

    Digital zoom takes this a step further, allowing you to zoom in up to 4 times for jpeg’s. I would not recommend either of these functions, as it is better to shoot RAW in this case and crop in processing for the best possible quality.

    Burst rate

    The drive mode dial has two options for burst shooting. Burst shooting means that you’ll shoot continuously when you press the shutter button. You can apply different Burst Mode settings to Burst Shot 1 and and Burst Shot 2 Setting in these menus.

    You’ll see SH (for super high burst rates), SH pre (which actually goes back a few seconds in time and saves these images too). These SH modes are only available with the electronic shutter. Version 2 is always faster that version 1.

    Then we have High, Medium and Low which work with the Mechanical shutter too. The actual burst rate will be higher if you shoot Jpeg only.

    4K Photo

    4K photo mode is designed to help you to capture fleeting moments by letting you shoot at an incredible 60fps for 4K mode. Continuous autofocus mode is automatically activated and it draws on 4K video technology to shoot 8 MP images at this fast frame rate. You’re basically recording video where you can extract the frames in-camera.

    Extracting 8Mp stills from the Lumix G90/G95’s 4K Photo Mode footage is pretty easy as follows:

    1. Press the play button to located the files. Clips recorded in 4K Photo Mode are marked with the 4K Photo icon to make the easy to identify.
      Once you’ve found the clip you want, either tap the 4K Photo Icon on-screen or the Up navigation key.
    2.  If you have a long clip with fleeting moments of action you may like to use the slide bar at the top to quickly scroll to an interesting bit of footage. Alternatively, there’s a playback option (button Fn1) that you can use to play and pause the movie.
    3. Once you’ve found the area you’re interested in, tap the Frame View Icon to see a scrollable stack of frames, just swipe right and left to locate the best shots.
    4. When you find an image you like, tap the Menu/Set button or 4K Icon to save the image. Images are saved as jpegs.

    it’s possible to save all the frames from 5 second sections of your 4K movie. To do this:

    1. Tap the Menu button and scroll down to Playback (the 6th tab), then scroll to the second page of options and select 4K PHOTO Bulk Saving.
    2. Then swipe on the screen until you find the clip that you want to extract stills from.
    3. Now use the same on-screen movie navigation controls as you used before to find the first frame of the 5 seconds that you want to pull the stills from and tap the 4K Photo icon to save it and the image from the next 5 seconds.
    Self Timer

    The self timer function is self explanatory.  If you actually want to use this function, you’ll need to set the drive mode to:

    In this menu, you can select what type of self timer you’d like to use: a 10 second delay and one shot, 10 seconds with 3 shots with 2 second intervals or a 2 second delay, all after pressing the shutter.

    MENU – Camera Icon – page 4 of 5 (also called the Rec menu)

    Panasonic G95-G90 menu camera icon page 4

    Self Timer

    The self timer function is self explanatory.  If you actually want to use this function, you’ll need to set the drive mode to:

    In this menu, you can select what type of self timer you’d like to use: a 10 second delay and one shot, 10 seconds with 3 shots with 2 second intervals or a 2 second delay, all after pressing the shutter.

    Time Lapse/Animation

    You can take a sequential number of images with relatively long delays in between to achieve a time-lapse movie. You’ll need to turn the drive mode dial to Time Lapse for this:

    You can choose between Time Lapse or Animation in this menu.

    Time Lapse:
    1. Switch to Time Lapse Shot if it is not selected.
    2. change start time and shooting interval according to your preferences.
    3. press te shutter half way to exit the menu.
    4. press the shutter to start your time-lapse.
    Stop motion Animation

    Same principle applies to animation:

    1. Switch to Stop Motion Animation
    2. Change auto shooting and shooting interval according to your preferences
    3. press te shutter half way to exit the menu.
    4. press the shutter to start your time-lapse.
    5. move the subject per frame
    6. press the folder menu to end the recording
    Live View composite

    The Live View Composite function captures a series of long exposure images at designated intervals and combines it into one single picture. You can choose to set the shutter speed from ½ sec to 60 sec and you can shoot continuously up to 3 hours with a fully-charged battery.

    Panorama Settings

    Select the direction of movement as well as filters for the panorama functionality.

    Silent Mode

    Disables operational sounds and output of light at once for completely silent stealth mode shooting with the Panasonic Lumix G90/G95.

    Shutter Type

    You can use either the mechanical or electronic shutter, or 50/50, or let the Panasonic Lumix G90/G95 decide what is most appropriate. The electronic shutter has a maximum speed of 1/32000 sec, the mechanical shutter can go up to 1/8000 second and if you use the Electronic first curtain shutter, you can only go up to 1/2000 second.

    • AUTO: Switches the shutter type automatically depending on the recording condition and shutter speed.
    • MSHTR: Takes pictures in Mechanical Shutter Mode.
    • EFC: Takes pictures in Electronic Front Curtain Mode.
    • ESHTR: Takes pictures in Electronic Shutter Mode.

    Remember that in artificial light or when using a flash, you best use the mechanical shutter only to avoid artefacts.

    Shutter Delay

    To reduce the influence of hand shake or shutter vibration, shutter is released after the specified time has passed. 1, 2, 4 or 8 second delay are selectable. Keep your hands steady and don’t use this delay, else you might miss that critical moment.

    Bracket

    The Bracket function allows you to take multiple pictures while automatically adjusting a setting like exposure or aperture by pressing the shutter button.

    Possible bracket types:

    • Exposure Bracket: Press the shutter button and the Lumix will sequentially take multiple images with different exposures. You can select the number of pictures to be taken and the exposure range (from 1/3 EV to 1 EV stops difference).
    • Aperture Bracket: Press the shutter button and the Lumix will sequentially take multiple images at different apertures. Either select all apertures or a number of shots (3-5) within a selected range.
    • Focus Bracket:Press the shutter button and the Panasonic Lumix G90/G95 will sequentially take multiple images with different focus positions. You can select the distance between focus positions, the number of exposures and the sequence from far to near or the other way around.
    • White Balance Bracket: Press the shutter button and the Lumix G90/G95 will take three pictures with different white balance settings automatically
    • White Balance Bracket (color temperature): Press the shutter button once to take three pictures with different White Balance Color Temperature values automatically. You can also set the correction range by touching the up/down slider on the screen.

    MENU – Camera Icon – page 5 of 5 (also called the Rec menu)

    Panasonic G95-G90 menu camera icon page 5

    HDR

    You can combine 3 image with different levels of exposure into a single picture a high dynamic range. This way, you can minimise the loss of gradations in bright areas and dark areas when, for example, the contrast between the background and the subject is large.

    Two setting are available:

    • Dynamic range: either select Auto where the camera will decide what range of exposure is suitable, or manually select plus/minus 1,2 or 3 EV.
    • Auto Align: Automatically aligns the resulting images to adjust for movement or not.
    Multi Exp.

    I multiple exposure is basically laying 2 (or more) images on top of each other. This is different to a HDR or  composite shot in the sense that these images should be totally different from each other. It’s a technique the comes from the darkroom photography area where 2 negatives where placed on top of each other to create a totally new image with the two images combined.

    How to do this:

    1. Press up/down to select start and then press Menu/Set.
    2. Decide on the composition and take the first picture. After this first image, press the shutter halfway down to take the next image.
    3. Shoot a  third or fourth exposure. all these images will add up to make a multiple exposure.
    4. Press the down arrow to exit or press the shutter button fully down.
    5. You multiple exposure is finished, and you can view it on the screen.

    MENU – Film Camera Icon – page 1 of 4 (also called Motion Picture Menu)

    G95 Motion Picture Menu page 1

    These are all movie related settings, and menu of them are the same as the stills related menu options. YOu can however (obviously) set them up differently for video.

    Rec Format

    You can either choose to record in AVCHD or MP4 format. The higher the Bit rate value is, the higher the picture quality becomes. Since the camera employs the VBR recording method, the bit rate is changed automatically depending on the subject to record. As a result, the recording time is shortened when a fast-moving subject is recorded. Different frame rates and bitrates are selectable per format in the Rec Quality setting.

    Rec Quality

    Options are:

    • 4K, 100M, 30p
    • 4K, 100M, 25P
    • 4K, 100M, 24P
    • FHD, 28M, 60p
    • FHD, 28M, 50p
    • FHD, 28M, 30p
    • FHD, 20M, 25p
    • HD, 10M, 30p
    • HD, 10M, 25p
    AFS/AFF

    AFS is an abbreviation of Auto Focus Single and AFF is an abbreviation of Auto Focus Flexible. In AFS, the focus stays locked while the shutter button is pressed halfway and in AFF focus is continuously readjusted according to the movement of the subject. See AFF as a function between Single AF and Continuous AF.

    This can easily be changed by using the dial on the right of the ECF too:

    AFS/AFF

    The AFC function below AFS/AFF continuously changes focus according to the movement of your subject.

    Some more info on these modes for clarification:

    • AFS will find focus and stay focused at that distance until you take a photo or release the shutter button. This is handy if you want to focus and then recompose your shot for instance.
    • AFF will do the same unless it detects subject movement, at which time it will temporarily switch to AFC operation in order to re-focus.
    • AFC won’t start to seek focus until you half-press the shutter, and will continually evaluate subject movement and change focus as needed.
    • With AFS you can can lock focus on a particular point, then swing the camera to get the right framing; with AFC, it will not lock focus, but will keep re-focusing. That’s why Pinpoint focusing can’t be used with AFC.
    Continuous AF

    Focusing changes depending on the Focus Mode setting and the Continuous AF setting in this menu.

    AFS/AFF/AFC:
    • On: The camera automatically keeps focusing on subjects during recording.
    • Off: The camera maintains the focus position at the start of recording.
    MF

    You can use manual focus.

    AF sensitivity (video)

    You can adjust the AF sensitivity which affects how quickly/slowly autofocus will react. This will make autofocus a bit snappier at the cost of accuracy.

    Photo Style

    You can select a photo style (like for photography, see above) for video too.

    Filter Settings

    You can add the image effects (filters) of Creative Control Mode, see the stills info on this above.

    MENU – Film Camera Icon – page 2 of 4 (also called Motion Picture Menu)

    G95 Motion Picture Menu page 2

    Luminance Level

    Luminance level can be selected from 16-255(narrow black range : consumer movie) / 0-255(full range : good for mixed shooting of photo/video) / 16-235 (narrow black/white range : lower-price professional AV equipment) according to the shooting purpose.

    Metering Mode

    You can change how the light is metered here, and hence how a correct exposure is calculated by the camera. If you feel that the camera takes over- or underexposed images according to your personal preferences, it might be worth changing the metering mode.

    Implementation of this is quite basic in this camera, you have a total of only 3 methods to choose from:

    • Multiple: This is the method in which the camera measures the most suitable exposure by judging the allocation of brightness on the whole screen automatically.
    • Center weighted: This is the method used to focus on the subject on the center of the screen and measure the whole screen evenly.
    • Spot: This is the method to measure the subject in the spot metering target.
    Highlight Shadow

    This allows you to lighten the shadows and darkens the highlights in your image (or video).  So this is a method of creating balance in your image if you feel like the highlights are too strong or the shadows too dark. You have 4 presets available, and you can also make 3 custom presets yourself:

    • Standard: no adjustments is set.
    • Raise the contrast: Bright areas are brightened, and dark areas are darkened.
    • Lower the contrast: Bright areas are darkened, and dark areas are brightened.
    • Brighten dark areas: Dark areas are brightened.
    • Custom: make your own preset.

    For more info, see the equivalent setting for photos above.

    i.Dynamic

    This setting will change contrast and exposure when there is a big difference from the darkest area to the brightest are in your image. What really happens is that the camera adjusts the exposure in order to capture more details in the highlights. You can choose between High, Standard, Low or Off.

    This naturally causes an under-exposure in the shadow areas. But inside the jpeg engine, the camera will compensate for this by boosting shadows. The downside here is that this will obviously lead to more noise in the boosted regions, but because this is done with data directly coming from the sensor, it can be quite useful.

    i.Resolution

    i-Resolution is a form of sharpening. High, Standard, Low and Off are selectable, and you should see these like the threshold for sharpening in an application like Lightroom. Many photographers discard these intelligent functions, and if you shoot RAW only, it’s not that important for you (except i Dynamic which can change your exposure plus or minus 1/3 stop).

    ISO Sensetivity

    Set the upper and lower limits of the ISO sensitivity when it is set to AUTO.

    Diffraction Compensation

    When you stop down your lens to a smaller aperture (normally from f/11 to f/22), a phenomenon called diffraction causes a loss in sharpness. It happens because light begins to disperse when passing through a small opening. When diffraction compensation is set to ON, the Panasonic Lumix G90/G95 will add sharpening to your image to try and counter this phenomenon.

    Stabilizer

    The Panasonic Lumix Lumix G90/G95 has a stabilised sensor. The sensor inside the camera is suspended on a magnetic field and can compensate for movement like the minute shakes of your hands or any other kind of movement. There are also many lenses available with an optical image stabilisation unit, that physically move glass elements around inside the lens to do the same. Both systems have their pros and cons, and it is generally accepted that a stabilised sensor works better for wide angle lenses (below 40mm) whilst optical lens stabilisation is more efficient for the tele range. It is also possible to use both systems at the same time (called Dual I.S.), where you’ll take advantage of the best of both worlds.

    MENU – Film Camera Icon – page 3 of  4 (also called Motion Picture Menu)

    G95 Motion Picture Menu page 3

    Flkr Decrease

    The shutter speed can be fixed to reduce the flicker or striping in your movies. 1/50,/1/60,1/100 or 1/120 second are available.

    Ex. Tele Conv.

    You can digitally enlarge movies without too much quality deterioration with this function. You can extend the range of your lens by times 1.4 or 1.6 using this function.

    Digital Zoom

    Digital zoom takes this a step further, allowing you to zoom in up to 4 times.

    Picture Mode in Rec.

    You can record still pictures while recording a movie on the Panasonic Lumix G90/G95. During movie recording, press the shutter button fully to record a still picture when turned On. Aspect will always be 16:9.

    There are 2 settings available:

    Video Priority
    • Pictures will be recorded with a picture size determined by the Rec Quality setting for motion pictures.
    • Only JPEG images are recorded when Quality is set to Raw (still pictures will be recorded in jpeg)
    • Up to 80 still pictures can be recorded during recording of the motion picture. (Up to 20 still pictures during 4K motion picture recording)
    Photo Priority
    • Pictures will be recorded with the set picture size and quality.
    • The screen will go dark while recording pictures. A still picture will be recorded in the motion picture during that period, and audio is not recorded.
    • Up to 20 still pictures can be recorded during recording of the motion picture. (Up to 10 still pictures during 4K motion picture recording)
    Sound Rec Level Disp.

    Select if you want to display the microphone level on the recording screen.

    Sound Rec Level Adj.

    Adjust the sound input level to 19 different levels (-12 dB to +6 dB).

    Sound Rec Level Limiter

    The Panasonic Lumix S1 adjusts the sound input level automatically, minimising sound distortion (clipping noise) when the volume is too high.

    Wind Noise Canceller

    This will reduce the wind noise coming into the built-in microphone while maintaining sound quality. You can choose either High, Standard or Off. This function works only with the built-in microphone.

    MENU – Film Camera Icon – page 4 of 4 (also called Motion Picture Menu)

    G95 Motion Picture Menu page 4

    Special Mic.

    Only available only when you use an external stereo shotgun microphone like the Panasonic DMW-MS2. You have a few options on how to use a microphone like this:

    • Stereo: Allows stereo recording of sound over a wide area.
    • Lens Auto: Allows recording within the range that is set automatically according to the angle of view of the lens.
    • Shotgun: Allows recording from one direction by shutting out background and surrounding noise.
    • S.Shotgun: Allows recording within the range even narrower than that of SHOTGUN.
    • Manual: Allows recording within the range you set manually.
    Sound Output

    You can record motion pictures while hearing the sounds that are being recorded by connecting a commercially available headphones to this unit.

    You can switch the sound output:

    • Realtime: Actual sound without time lag. It can be different to the audio recorded in the movie.
    • Rec Sound: Sound that is being recorded in motion pictures. The audio may be output slower than the actual audio. If you use the HDMI output during recording, the setting is fixed to this.

    MENU – Custom Tool (Custom Menu)

    G90 custom tool menu

    You’ll find all customisable settings of the Panasonic Lumix G90/G95 in this Menu.

    Exposure Menu page 1 of 7 (Exposure and Shutter button behaviour settings)

    G95 Custom settings page 1

    ISO Increments

    Choose the increments of exposure changes between 1/3 EV or 1 EV.

    Extended ISO

    ISO sensitivity can be set up to minimum of ISO 100. Base ISO of the sensor is 200, so this extended ISO basically halves this in software, with a slight decrease in quality.

    Exposure Comp. Reset

    An exposure value can be reset when the Recording Mode is changed or the camera is turned off.

    AF/AE Lock

    Lock focus and exposure with AF/AE LOCK. To clear the lock, press AF/AE LOCK again.

    AF/AE Lock Hold

    When ON is selected, focus and exposure stays locked even if you press and release AF/AE LOCK. To clear the lock, press AF/AE LOCK again.

    Shutter AF

    Set whether or not the focus is adjusted automatically when the shutter button is pressed halfway.

    Half Press Release

    The shutter will immediately fire when the shutter button is pressed halfway when this is ON.

    Quick AF

    As long as the camera is held steady, the camera will automatically adjust the focus and focus adjustment will then be quicker when the shutter is pressed. You’ll get better AF performance at the expense of battery life.

    Focus Menu page 2 of 7 (more Focus/Release Shutter settings)

    G95 Custom settings page 2

    Eye Sensor AF

    The Panasonic G90/G95 wil automatically start autofocus when the eye sensor is activated.

    Pinpoint AF Setting

    The methods for displaying the magnification window. View magnification full screen or picture in picture.

    AF Assist lamp

    AF assist lamp will illuminate the subject when the shutter button is pressed half-way making it easier for the camera to focus when recording in low light conditions. Range is about 1 meter.

    Direct Focus Area

    When you turn this feature ON in my G90 will allow you to to resize and move the focus area frame.

    Focus/Release Priority

    Set whether to give priority to focus or shutter release during Auto Focus. Setting it to Focus priority means you won’t be able to take an image if focus is not acquired. Release will.

    Focus Switching for Vert / Hor

    Memorises separate positions for horizontal and vertical orientations (two vertical orientations, left and right, are available).

    Loop Movement Focus Frame

    When setting the AF area position or the MF Assist display position, you can now loop the position from one edge to the other edge of the screen.

    AF Area Display

    Selects whether you want to see a visual representation of you selected AF area on screen.

    Focus Menu page 3 of 7 (more Focus/Release Shutter settings)

    G95 Custom settings page 3

    AF+MF

    When AF Lock is ON (press the shutter button halfway with the focus mode set to AFS or set AF Lock using AF/AE LOCK), you can make fine adjustments to the focus manually.

    MF Assist

    Sets the display method of MF Assist (enlarged screen) on the Panasonic Lumix G90/G95.

    MF assist settings

    MF Assist Display

    Sets whether MF Assist (enlarged screen) will appear in a windowed screen display or in a full screen display.

    Fn Button Set

    You can assign various features, such as recording functions, to specific buttons and icons as well as the function lever.

    1. Press up/down to select the function button you want to assign a function to and then press MENU/SET.
    2. Press up/down to select the function you want to assign and then press [MENU/SET].
    WB/ISO/Expo. Button

    This setting enables adjustment of WB/ISO/Exposure only while the exposure compensation button is pressed.

    ISO Displayed Setting

    Customise the Iso settings on the display screen.

    Exposure comp Display. setting

    An exposure value can be reset when the Recording Mode is changed or the Panasonic S1R is turned off.

    Q.MENU

    In Custom operations, you can customise the Q Menu according to your liking.

    You can add a maximum of 15 preferred settings to the Quick Menu.

    1. Press Q.MENU to display the Quick Menu.
    2. Press down to select the custom tool and then press MENU/SET.
    3. Press left/right arrow to select the menu item in the top row and then press MENU/SET.
    4. Press left/right to select the empty space in the bottom row and then press MENU/SET. (You can also set the menu item by dragging it from the top row to the bottom row)
    5. Press return to switch to the recording screen.
    Operation Menu page 4 of 7 (dial and buttons operation settings)

    G95 Custom settings page 4

    Dial Set.

    Assign Dial (F/SS): Assigns the operations of the aperture value and shutter speed in Manual Exposure Mode.

    Rotation (F/SS): Changes the rotation direction of the dials for adjusting the aperture value and shutter speed.

    Control Dial Assignment: It sets the item to be assigned to the control dial while the recording screen is displayed.

    Exposure Comp.: Assigns the Exposure Compensation to the front dial or rear dial so that you can directly adjust it.

    Dial Operation Switch Setup: Sets the items to be assigned temporarily to the front/rear dials when you press the function button to which Dial Operation Switch is assigned.

    Operation Lock Settings

    Sets the control functions on the Panasonic Lumix G90/G95 to be disabled with the function button Operation Lock. Cursor, Joystick and Touch screen can be turned off.

    Video Button

    Enables/disables the motion picture button.

    Video Rec. Button (Remote)

    Enables or disables the video button when using the remote control.

    Auto Review

    Displays a picture immediately after it is taken.

    Monochrome Live View

    You can display the recording screen in black and white. Recorded images will not be affected.

    Monitor/ Display Menu page 5 of 7 (settings for the display)

    G95 Custom settings page 5

    Constant Preview

    You can check the effects of the chosen aperture and shutter speed on the recording screen in Manual Exposure Mode. Some camera makers call this Live View.

    Live View Boost
    The screen is displayed bright so that you can check the composition in low-light environment like at night.
    Peaking

    In-focus portions (portions on the screen with clear outlines) are highlighted when focus is being adjusted manually. Great focussing aide for manual focussing. Can be set to High or Low.

    Histogram

    Display the histogram. A histogram is a graph that displays brightness along the horizontal axis (black to white) and the number of pixels at each brightness level on the vertical axis. It allows you to easily check a picture’s exposure.

    Guide Line

    This will set the pattern of guide lines displayed when taking a picture.

    Center Marker

    The center of the recording screen will be displayed as [+].

    Highlight

    When the Auto Review function is activated or when playing back, white saturated areas appear blinking in black and white.

    Zebra Pattern

    Indicates parts that may become white saturated through overexposure in a zebra pattern. You can select a brightness value between 50% and 105%. In Zebra 2, you can select OFF. If you select 100% or 105%, only the areas that are already white saturated are displayed in a zebra pattern. The smaller the value is, the wider the brightness range to be processed as a zebra pattern will be.

    Monitor/ Display Menu page 6 of 7 (monitor and lens behaviour settings)

    G95 Custom settings page 6

    Expo.Meter

    Display the exposure meter.

    • Set to ON to display the Exposure meter when performing Program Shift, setting aperture, and setting shutter speed.
    • Unsuitable areas of the range are displayed in red.
    • When the Exposure meter is not displayed, switch the display information for screen by pressing DISP.
    • If no operations are performed for approximately 4 seconds, the Exposure meter disappears.
    MF Guide

    When you set the focus manually, an MF guide that allows you to check the direction to achieve focus is displayed.

    LVF/Monitor Disp. Set

    You can select separate screen display styles for the viewfinder and the monitor.

    Monitor Info. Disp.

    Display the recording information screen.

    Viewfinder style: Scales down images slightly so that you can better review the composition of the images.

    Monitor style: Scales images to fill the entire screen so that you can see their details.

    Rec Area

    This changes the angle of view during motion picture recording and still picture recording. Displays the recording area according to the angle of view for still picture recording or video.

    Remaining Disp.

    This will switch display between the number of recordable pictures and available recording time.

    Menu Guide

    Display a selection screen when you set the mode dial to the paint palette icon.

    Lens Position Resule

    Saves the focus position when you turn off the camera. When an interchangeable lens that is compatible with power zoom is in use, the zoom position is also saved.

    Monitor/ Display Menu page 7 of 7 (monitor and lens behaviour settings)

    G95 Custom settings page 7

    Power Zoom Lens

    Change the settings for a power zoom lens. Sets the screen display and lens operations when using an interchangeable lens that is compatible with power zoom.

    • Disp Focal Length: When you zoom, the focal distance is displayed and you can confirm the zoom position.
    • Step Zoom: When you operate the zoom with this setting [ON], the zoom will stop at positions corresponding to predetermined distances.
    • Zoom Speed: You can set the zoom speed for zoom operations for both stills and vide to high, medium or low.
    • Zoom Ring: When set to OFF] the operations controlled by the zoom ring are disabled to prevent accidental operation.
    Lens Fn Button Setting

    Sets the function to be assigned to the focus button of an interchangeable lens. You can call up the assigned function by setting the focus selector switch of a compatible interchangeable lens to Fn and then pressing the focus button of the lens.

    Face Recog.

    Face Recognition is a function on the Panasonic G90/G95 which finds a face resembling a registered face and priorities focus and exposure automatically. Even if the person is located towards the back or on the end of a line in a group photo, the camera can still take a clear picture.

    On will automatically recognise faces, but you can also register up to six faces yourself.

    1. In this Menu, select an empty frame (or overwrite one).
    2. Take an picture of the face you want to register.
    3. Register this face. Note that you can register up to 3 images per face for more accurate results.
    Profile Setup

    If you set the name and birthday of your baby or pet in advance, you can record their name and age in months and years in the images.

    MENU – Setup Menu – page 1 of 4 (General Camera Setup)

    G95 general settings page 1

    Online Manual

    Display the URL or QR code to go to the online manual.

    Cust. Set Mem.

    Up to 5 sets of current camera settings can be registered using C1, C2, C3-1, C3-2 or C3-3. The first three are directly accessible via the Mode Dial.

    Saving a custom camera is quite simple, set the mode dial to C1, C2 or C3, change the cameras settings to your preferences, go in the Menu to this setting and press MENU/SET on the screen.

    Clock Set

    You have already probably set time and date when you first turned on the Panasonic G90/G95, but you can also change this here.

    World Time

    Sets the times for the region where you live (HOME) and your travel destination (DESTINATION). Time and date will be altered to reflect the local time and date at your travel destination.

    Travel Date

    If you set Travel Setup, elapsed days of your trip i.e. which day of the trip based on its departure and return dates will be recorded The travel date is automatically canceled if the current date is after the return date.

    If you set Location, the name of the travel destination that you enter will be recorded.

    Wi-Fi

    It’s possible to control your Panasonic G90/G95 with a smartphone or a tablet, display pictures on TV, print Wirelessly, Send images to a PC or use Web Services from Panasonic all via WiFi.

    To use the Wi-Fi function on this camera, a wireless access point is needed off course.

    By default, Wi-Fi is assigned to the Fn6 button when the camera is in Recording Mode, while it is assigned to Fn1 when the camera is in Playback Mode. You can assign it to any button you want.

    When you want to connect to WiFi, simply press this button.

    Wi-Fi Setup

    Priority of Remote Device: Sets either the camera or the smartphone as the priority control device to be used during remote recording.

    Wi-Fi Password: You can improve security by enabling password entry for a direct connection to a smartphone.

    LUMIX CLUB: Acquires or changes the “LUMIX CLUB” login ID.

    PC Connection: You can set the workgroup. To send images to a PC, a connection to the same workgroup as the destination PC is required.

    Device Name: You can change the name (SSID) of this unit.

    Wi-Fi Function Lock: To prevent incorrect operation and use of the Wi-Fi function by a third party and to protect saved personal information, protect the Wi-Fi function with a password.

    Network Address: Displays the MAC address and IP address of this unit.

    Approved Regulations: Displays the certification number for radio regulations.

    Bluetooth

    You can also connect to your Smartphone, Tablet or TV if your device has the Bluetooth functionality. A function called pairing is needed in order to establish a connection. You’ll find it in this menu, remember to also turn Bluetooth on if you want to do so.

    Wireless Connection Lamp

    This enables/disables the wireless connection lamp.

    MENU – Setup Menu – page 2 of 4 (General Camera Setup)

    G95 general settings page 2

    Beep

    This allows you to set the electronic sound and the electronic shutter sound. Remember this will be off if you’re in Silent Mode!

    Headphone Volume

    Changes the volume of your headphones connected to the G95.

    Economy

    These settings will determine the way the camera handles inactivity on your part to save battery life.

    Sleep Mode: The camera is automatically turned off if the camera has not been used for the time selected on the setting.

    Sleep Mode(Wi-Fi): The camera is automatically turned off if it is not connected to a Wi-Fi network and has not been used for 15 minutes (

    Auto LVF/ Monitor Off: The monitor/viewfinder is automatically turned off if the camera has not been used for the time selected on the setting.

    Power Save LVF Shooting: If you display the monitor using the viewfinder/monitor automatic switching function, the camera will turn off automatically after being left idle.

    Monitor Display Speed

    This sets the monitor frame rate to either 30fps or 60fps. 60fps will run smoother at the cost of battery life.

    Monitor Display

    Brightness, color, or red or blue tint of the Monitor/viewfinder can be adjusted.

    Monitor Luminance

    These settings will affect how and when brightness of the monitor is adjusted.

    Auto: The brightness is adjusted automatically depending on how bright it is around the camera.

    Mode 1: Makes the monitor brighter than normal.

    Mode 2: Set the monitor to the standard brightness.

    Mode 3: Makes the monitor brighter than standard.

    Eye Sensor

    Sensitivity will This will set the sensitivity of the eye sensor.

    LVF/Monitor Switch will This will set the method for switching between the monitor and viewfinder.

    Battery Life Priority

    Decide to give battery priority to either performance or longevity.

    MENU – Setup Menu – page 3 of 4 (General Camera Setup)

    G95 general settings page 4

    USB Mode

    Sets the communication method when connecting using the USB connection cable.

    Select on Connection: Select this setting to select the USB communication system when connecting to another device.

    PC Storage: Select this setting to export images to a connected PC.

    PC Tether: Select this setting to control the camera from a PC installed with supported software.

    Pictbridge PTP: Select this setting when connecting to a printer supporting PictBridge.

    USB Power Supply

    Supplies power via the USB connection cable when the camera is connected to a PC or PowerBank.

    TV Connection

    Set the format for the HDMI output when playing back on the HDMI compatible TV and monitor connected with this unit using the HDMI cable. It’s possible to set it to Auto or 4K, 1080p, 1080i, etc…

    Language

    Set the language displayed on the screen.

    Version Disp

    This enables the firmware versions of the camera and lens to be checked before an upgrade for instance.

    Folder/File Settings

    Set the folder and file name patterns in which images are to be saved.

    Save/Restore Camera Setting

    Save the camera’s setup information to the card. Since saved setup information can be imported to the camera, you can apply the same setup to more than one camera.

    No.Reset

    Reset the file number of the next recording to 0001.

    Reset

    The following settings are reset to the default:

    • Recording settings.
    • Setup settings Wi-Fi Setup and Bluetooth settings.
    • Custom settings (Face Recog. and[Profile Setup settings.
    • Setup/custom settings (except for Wi-Fi Setup, Bluetooth, Face Recog. and Profile Setup).

    MENU – Setup Menu – page 4 of 4 (General Camera Setup)

    G95 general settings page 3

    Reset Network Settings

    The following network settings are reset to the default:

    • Wi-Fi Setup (Excluding LUMIX CLUB).
    • Registered device information in Bluetooth and values in Wi-Fi network settings.
    Pixel Refresh

    It will perform optimization of imaging device and image processing. Use this function when you start seeing hot or dead pixels in your images.

    Sensor Cleaning

    Dust reduction to blow off the debris and dust that have affixed to the front of the imaging device is performed.

    Level Gauge Assist

    Adjust: Hold the camera in a horizontal position, and press MENU/SET. The level gauge will be adjusted.

    Level Gauge Value Reset: Restores the default level gauge setting.

    Demo mode

    For in-store demonstrations only.

    Format

    Format the card before recording a picture with this unit.

    Since data cannot be recovered after formatting, make sure to back up necessary data in advance.

    MENU – My Menu

    G90 My menu page

    My Menu Setting

    You can register frequently-used menus and display them in My Menu. You can register up to 23 menus for quick access.

    • Add: Specifies the menu to be displayed in My Menu to register it.
    • Sorting: Rearranges the menus displayed in My Menu. Select the menu you want to move and set the destination.
    • Delete: Deletes registered menus from the displayed menu list.
    • Display from my menu: Sets the type of the menu screen to be displayed.

    MENU – Playback Menu – Page 1 of 3

    G95 Playback Menu page 1

    Slide Show

    ou can play back the pictures you have taken in synchronization with music, and you can do this in sequence while leaving a fixed interval between each of the pictures.

    You can also put together a slide show composed of only still pictures, only motion pictures, etc.

    You can change the settings for slide show playback by selecting [Effect] or [Setup] on the slide show menu screen.

    Playback Mode

    Playback in Normal Play, Picture Only or Video Only can be selected.

    Protect

    You can set protection for pictures you do not want to delete by mistake.

    Rating

    You can set five different rating levels for images to do the following:

    • Delete all the pictures not set as ratings.
    • Checking the rating level on the file detail display of an operating system, such as Windows 10.
    Title Edit

    You can add text (comments) to pictures. After text has been registered, it can be stamped in prints using Text Stamp.

    Face Rec Edit

    You can clear and replace all information relating to face recognition in selected images.

    RAW Processing

    You can process the pictures taken in RAW format. The processed pictures will be saved in JPEG format.

    • White Balance: Allows you to select a White Balance preset and adjust it. If you select an item you can process the image with the setting at the time of recording.
    • Brightness correction: Allows you to correct the brightness within the range between – 2 EV and +2 EV.
    • Photo Style: Allows you to select a photo style effect.
    • i.Dynamic: Allows you to select an i.Dynamic setting.
    • Contrast: Allows you to adjust the contrast.
    • Highlight: Allows you to adjust the brightness of bright portions.
    • Shadow: Allows you to adjust the brightness of dark portions.
    • Saturation and Color Tone: Allows you to adjust the saturation. (When Monochrome or L.Monochrome is selected in Photo Style, you can adjust the color tone.)
    • Filter Effect: Allows you to select a filter effect. (Only when Monochrome or L.Monochrome is selected in Photo Style)
    • Noise Reduction: Allows you to adjust the noise reduction setting.
    • i.Resolution: Allows you to select an i.Resolution setting.
    • Sharpness: Allows you to adjust the resolution effect.
    4K PHOTO Bulk Saving

    You can save pictures of a 4K burst file that were extracted from any 5 second period at once.

    MENU – Playback Menu – Page 2 of 3

    G95 Playback Menu page 2

    Light composition

    Select multiple frames from 6K/4K burst files that you wish to combine. Parts of the image that are brighter than the preceding frame will be superimposed on the preceding frame to combine the frames into one picture.

    Sequence composition

    Select multiple frames from stop motion files that you wish to combine.

    Clear Retouch

    Remove unwanted objects and such right from the camera menu. The erasure operation can only be performed by touching. Clear Retouch automatically enables the touch operation.

    Text Stamp

    You can stamp recording information like names, dates, places on recorded images.

    Resize

    To allow easy posting to web pages, attachment to e-mail etc., picture size (number of pixels) is reduced.

    Cropping

    You can enlarge and then clip the important part of the recorded picture.

    Rotate

    Rotate pictures manually in 90 degree steps.

    Video Divide

    Recorded motion picture and 6K/4K burst files can be divided in two. It is recommended for when you want to divide a part you need with a part you do not need.

    MENU – Playback Menu – Page 3 of 3

    G95 Playback Menu page 3

    Time Lapse Video

    This function allows you to create a motion picture from a picture group recorded with Time Lapse Shot.

    Stop Motion Video

    A Motion picture is created from group pictures taken with Stop Motion Animation.

    Rotate Disp.

    This mode allows you to display pictures vertically if they were recorded holding the camera vertically.

    Picture Sort

    You can set the order in which the camera displays images during playback.Either via file name or date/time.

    Delete Confirmation

    This sets which option, Yes or No, will be highlighted first when the confirmation screen for deleting a picture is displayed.

    Quick access with the Q Menu (Fn 2)

    The most commonly used settings can be accessed through what is called the Q Menu. This is the FN2 button that you’ll find right next to the screen, above the trash bucket button.

    The features that can be adjusted using Quick Menu are determined by the mode or a display style the camera is in.

    Photo Style

    This applies only to Jpeg images, and the RAW preview when you load them into an app like Lightroom.. You can select a colour effect here.

    • Standard: standard Panasonic colour and contrast rendering.
    • Vivid: Brilliant effect with high saturation and contrast.
    • Natural: Soft effect with low contrast.
    • Monochrome: Monochrome  (black and white)effect with no color shades.
    • L.Monochrome: Black-and-white effect with rich gradation and crisp black accents.
    • Scenery: An effect appropriate for sceneries with vivid blue skies and greens.
    • Portrait: An effect appropriate for portraits with a healthy and beautiful skin tone.
    • Custom 1-4: Make your own presets for easy recall when needed.
    • Cinelike D: Gives priority to the dynamic range by using a gamma curve designed to create film-like images. Suited for editing.
    • Cinelike V: Gives priority to the contrast by using a gamma curve designed to create film-like images.

    As mentioned earlier, it’s possible to create your own Photo Style or customise the preset styles. This is basically a way of hacking into the Jpeg engine and adjusting it to your own style and preferences. There are 6 areas that you can alter.

    • Contrast: add or decrease the difference between the brightness and the darkness in the picture.
    • Sharpness: add a degree of sharpness or make your images softer.
    • Noise Reduction: add noise reduction for high ISO shooting.
    • Saturation: add more vividness to the colours. Or remove some.
    • Color Tone: add a blue, orange, red or green filter to your image.

    Motion Pic. Set

    G95 Q menu video format

    You can change bitrate and frame-rate for video here, as well as select the appropriate movie container.

    AVCHD

    AVHCD format frame rate

    MP4

    MP4 frame rate

    G95 Q menu picture setting

    Picture Setting

    You can quickly change picture size and picture quality here for your Jpeg’s.

    These are the aspect ratios available:

    • 4:3: native sensor ratio
    • 3:2: the ratio used in full frame cameras
    • 16:9: for a wider looking view
    • 1:1: Square aspect ratio, mostly used for social sharing

    Quality wise, you can choose between Small (S), Medium (M) and Large (L) files sizes. Obviously, Large will have the best quality Jpeg’s, at the expense of larger files. If you only shoot Jpeg (and not RAW) set it to Large. If you shoot both (Jpeg+RAW, see next screen), you could set it to small or medium since you’ll always work with the RAW in post processing. This way, you’ll still have a Jpeg for sharing quickly online or as a reference whilst still saving some space.

    G95 Q menu quality settings

    Quality

    Probably the most important setting is Quality. You can select either Jpeg, where the RAW data from the sensor is processed by an in-camera algorithm to produce a viewable image, or save your images in this RAW format. RAW retains all the data of the sensor, and is meant to be edited afterwards in a desktop application like Lightroom. Saving as RAW means that you have much more creative freedom afterwards to push shadows or pull highlights, sharpen and enhance your image in any way you please. A Jpeg retains only a fraction of this information, according to the algorithm inside the camera which might or might not suit your style and/or needs.

    Hence, my recommendation is always to shoot RAW or RAW Jpeg. This does mean larger files, but SD cards are inexpensive compared to your beautiful new Lumix. But some photographers prefer to shoot in Jpeg only because they are for instance not interested in post-processing images. In this case, I would set the Jpeg to the highest quality setting.

    G95 Q menu AFS/AFF

    AFS/AFF

    AFS is an abbreviation of Auto Focus Single and AFF is an abbreviation of Auto Focus Flexible. In AFS, the focus stays locked while the shutter button is pressed halfway and in AFF focus is continuously readjusted according to the movement of the subject. See AFF as a function between Single AF and Continuous AF.

    This can easily be changed by using the dial on the right of the ECF too:

    AFS/AFF

    The AFC function below AFS/AFF continuously changes focus according to the movement of your subject.

    Some more info on these modes for clarification:

    • AFS will find focus and stay focused at that distance until you take a photo or release the shutter button. This is handy if you want to focus and then recompose your shot for instance.
    • AFF will do the same unless it detects subject movement, at which time it will temporarily switch to AFC operation in order to re-focus.
    • AFC won’t start to seek focus until you half-press the shutter, and will continually evaluate subject movement and change focus as needed.
    • With AFS you can can lock focus on a particular point, then swing the camera to get the right framing; with AFC, it will not lock focus, but will keep re-focusing. That’s why Pinpoint focusing can’t be used with AFC.

    G95 Q menu AF area

    AF Mode

    This allows the focusing method that suits the positions and number of the subjects to be selected. There are 6 different methods available, each suited for different scenarios.

    Face/Eye Detection

    A person’s face, eyes, and body (the entire body or the upper half of the body) are automatically detected.

    When the camera detects a person’s face or body, an AF area is displayed over the detected person.

    • Yellow: This is the AF area for the person to be brought into focus. The camera automatically selects the person.
    • White: These are the AF areas for people other than the person to be brought into focus. This type of AF area is displayed when more than one person is detected.

    When a person’s face or eyes are detected, the eye closer to the camera will be brought into focus, if the eyes are inside the yellow frame.

    The camera can detect the faces of up to 15 people. To specify the person or eye to be brought into focus, align an AF area with the desired person or eye. You can do so easily by touching a person indicated with an AF area.

    Tracking

    The camera keeps adjusting the focus and exposure automatically to the specified moving object. Perform either of the following operations to lock the subject to be tracked:

    • Use a button: aim the AF tracking frame D over the subject, and press the shutter button halfway.
    • Use the touch screen: touch the subject on the screen.

    If it fails to lock, AF area will flash in red, and disappear.

    The AF area turns yellow while the subject is locked and green while the shutter button is pressed halfway. Press the Menu button to cancel the lock.

    49 Area

    Widest setting with all AF points used.  Up to 49 AF areas can be focused. This is effective when your subject is not in the center of the screen.

    Custom Multi

    From among 49 AF areas, you can freely set the optimum shape of the AF area for the subject.

    1-Area

    The camera focuses on the subject in the AF area on the screen.

    Pinpoint

    You can achieve a more precise focus on a point that is smaller than 1-Area. If you press the shutter button halfway, the screen that lets you check the focus by enlarging it.

    G95 Q menu shooting mode

    Burst Shot Setting

    You can choose your bust shot setting here for continuous drive mode.

    Burst shooting means that you’ll shoot continuously when you press the shutter button. You can apply different Burst Mode settings to Burst Shot 1 and and Burst Shot 2 Setting in these menus.

    You’ll see SH (for super high burst rates), SH pre (which actually goes back a few seconds in time and saves these images too). These SH modes are only available with the electronic shutter. Version 2 is always faster that version 1.

    Then we have High, Medium and Low which work with the Mechanical shutter too. The actual burst rate will be higher if you shoot Jpeg only.

    Metering Mode

    You can change how the light is metered here, and hence how a correct exposure is calculated by the camera. If you feel that the camera takes over- or underexposed images according to your personal preferences, it might be worth changing the metering mode.

    Implementation of this is quite basic in this camera, you have a total of only 3 methods to choose from:

    • Multiple: This is the method in which the camera measures the most suitable exposure by judging the allocation of brightness on the whole screen automatically.
    • Center weighted: This is the method used to focus on the subject on the center of the screen and measure the whole screen evenly.
    • Spot: This is the method to measure the subject in the spot metering target.

    Exposure Comp

    If you feel like your Lumix G90/G95 is over- or underexposing your images (or you want to purposely underexpose), you can dial in what is called exposure compensation here. A range of plus minus 5 is available here to correct the auto exposure of the camera.

    ISO sensitivity

    Sets the upper and lower limits of the ISO sensitivity when you use Auto ISO or i ISO. Lower Limit should be set to 200 and upper limit to 3200, this is the range where you’ll get usable images without too much noise.

    Conclusion

    So this was a quick run-though of all the PanasonicG90/G95 Menu items, with pointers, tips and tricks along the way. This information should get you familiarised with this fantastic mirrorless camera. If you would like any clarification or extra information on any functionality here, let me know through the comment section below. Happy shooting!

  • What does mirrorless camera mean

    What does mirrorless camera mean

    Loading…

    Introduction

    I’ve been writing about mirrorless cameras for 7 year now, ever since the release of the original Sony A7. Much has changed since then, and I often get asked what does mirrorless cameras mean in 2019? And what is all the fuss about? Lent’s start at the beginning and see where digital photography has evolved from.

    Mirrored versus Mirrorless cameras

    DSLR or mirrored cameras

    Let’s first talk about the DSLR, the digital camera that most people know and recognise immediately. This abbreviation stands for digital single-lens reflex camera and basically uses a mirror system to transmit light (your image) too the optical viewfinder. This works exactly like a real life mirror (say a rearview mirror) which allows you to see the traffic behind you. Only when you press the shutter button, this mirror flips up and the digital sensor behind it can be exposed to the light.

    mirrorless camera evolution

    This used to be the only way to accurately ‘see’ what you were photographing, as this is the exact same image that is captured by the sensor when the mirror flips up.

    What does Mirrorless camera mean today?

    As technology advanced over the years and digital cameras became mini computers, smart engineers figured that they did not need this mirror mechanism to be able to accurately see what image the sensor would record. Instead, why not feed the digital information of the sensor continuously (like when recording video) to a tiny little monitor (an EVF or electronic viewfinder)? This way cameras could be made smaller as well as at potentially lower cost.

    Technical advancements in the field of sensor- and microprocessor development

    The first couple of generations of mirrorless cameras could however not compete with an optical viewfinder because the resolution of the EVF was too low, and the processing power was just not up to this technically challenging task. The arrival of a new size sensor however, the micro-four-thirds sensor from 2008 onwards, turned out to be a good marriage between image quality whilst still keeping the data flow manageable for the micro processors of that time. Although not sufficient for professional use (except perhaps for those with large pockets who could afford the advanced Leica M8), many amateurs and later semi professionals started using these smaller and user-friendly cameras.

    With every new generation came an upgrade in EVF resolution and refresh rate, as well as microprocessor power, allowing larger APS-C sensors to be used accumulating in Full Frame and even Medium Format cameras from 2008 onwards.

    mirror-less vs DSLR

    This is where the mirrorless cameras slowly started to be a real competitor for the professional DSLR.

    Mirrored versus Mirrorless camera autofocus system

    We’ve so for not talked about one of the most important aspects of the mirrored vs mirrorless debate: the difference in autofocus system. Although this used to be a big shortcoming of the mirrorless system, it’s now set to match and even improve on the DSLR autofocus system.

    A DSLR works with a separate phase detection autofocus module. As you read earlier, the light entering the lens is reflected upwards to the optical viewfinder. The mirror however is specially treated to let a small amount of light can pass through this mirror and is again reflected to this autofocus module.

    Phase detection is achieved by dividing the incoming light into pairs of images and comparing them. If an image in out of focus then the two images will not line up, and based on how far off they are the camera knows which way to focus the lens to achieve that perfect sharp focus. (In reality it’s more complex, but you get the idea of this system). The only problem here is that even though the calculation of when your image is in focus might be right according to this autofocus module, it might be slightly different when it’s recorded on the digital sensor.

    mirrorless vs mirrored camera

    This type of autofocus method was inherited from the late film days, but the arrival of the digital sensor gave way to a second autofocus method. This method involves measuring the contrast difference between pixels on the sensor, which naturally increases with perfect focus. It’s called contrast detection autofocus and is the system you’ll mostly see in early mirrorless cameras. The advantage is that it’s a fast and continuous autofocus system in good light, but in scenes with a lack of contrast and low light, it’s very unreliable.

    Mirrorless on-sensor phase detection

    In order to bypass the shortcomings of the early generation contrast detection autofocus systems, engineers developed ways of machining phase detecting pixels into a digital sensor. Even a 16 megapixel sensor has 16 million light sensitive diodes pixels on the surface, so exchanging  a couple of hundred of these light sensitive diodes by a different type of phase detecting diodes does not really harm the image quality. The combination of both phase and contrast detection gives us the most advanced autofocus system yet, and this is what is found in the high-end mirrorless bodies from Canon, Nikon and Sony today.

    What does mirrorless camera mean

    It’s of course also possible to use these sensors inside a DSLR body, something that is also still done today. Combining on sensor contrast detection with a separate phase detection module also works brilliantly and perhaps even more accurately. In this case, the reason why some photographers prefer to stick with a DSLR is because they prefer an Optical viewfinder to an EVF.

    Disadvantages of the mirrorless camera

    We’ve come a long way in the last ten years and top-of-the-line mirrorless cameras are now every bit as good as a DSLR when it comes to autofocus capabilities and viewfinder. Even though an older photographer might prefer an Optical viewfinder over an Electronic viewfinder, I see few younger people who started their careers using an EVF not liking the latest generation.

    There are however two main disadvantages of using a mirrorless camera. The first is heat. Because the sensor is always on when the camera is in use, these bodies can get hot, especially during processes like shooting video or when using your camera in intense heat. The second one is battery life. Exactly due to this sensor always on necessity, you need more power than when using a DSLR that does not rely on the constant sensor feed for autofocus or seeing something through the viewfinder.

    In both cases however, big advances have also been made in the last few years, especially by Sony. I’ve actually never had a mirrorless camera body shut down on me due to overheating, and the latest batteries last me through most of a full day shooting.

    Advantages of mirrorless cameras

    There are luckily a couple of advantages too. This first one is debatable, but due to the lack of the separate autofocus system and complex mirror system, these mirrorless bodies can be made smaller than a DSLR. This might or might not suit you of course.

    Secondly, due to the more complex dual contrast/phase detection on-sensor autofocus systems, as well as the ‘always on’ digital sensor policy, new autofocus methods and tricks are being developed. The most advantageous that comes to mind is Sony’s Eye AF which is a true revelation for portrait photographers wanting to shoot at large apertures for a shallow depth-of-field. The tracking capabilities of their flagship A9 is also amazing and a continuation of their 4D focus system.

    Thirdly, the fact that without the mirror box, the distance between the sensor and the lens can be made shorter. This leads to new lens designs specifically for mirrorless sensors (instead of still using lens designed in the last century for film) and it also allows you to use almost any lens ever designed for a DSLR using an adapter.

    Conclusion

    If you ever wondered what does mirrorless camera mean, I’ve given you a brief overview of the differences between a mirrored and mirrorless camera as well as what the advantages and disadvantages of the mirrorless camera system are. On the one hand, there are still photographers who prefer an optical viewfinder to the mirrorless electronic version, but on the other hand, the on-sensor phase and contrast detection system of the latest mirrorless cameras could give you an advantage in this regard.

    Whatever your interest and focus are, it’s important to realise that a good photographer can make great images with almost any camera, regardless of technological innovation and new trends.

  • lensball photography tutorial

    Lensball photography tutorial

    Introduction

    Let’s first start with explaining what lensball photography actually is. You can see a lensball as a high-quality and completely transparent solid glass ball or sphere made of streak-free crystal glass and it’s which is ideally suited as a photography accessory for special effects.

    how to use a lens ball

    It’s most often made from a material called K9 glass, which has a denser mass than normal glass, turning the ball into a type of lens on each side of the sphere. This creates the most striking feature of a lensball: it turns the image reflected through it upside down

    lensball interiors

    Both professionals and amateur photographers use it and it works with your DSLR, mirrorless camera or even with a smartphone. You can use autofocus but also manual focus will work, and you can shoot in any camera mode imaginable like full manual. It’s the ideal photography accessory for creative photography

    Different lensball sizes and quality

    When you first get into the field of glassball photography, you’ll notice that there are different sizes. These range from 60 cm up to 90 cm, but you can now find even larger ones. The basic rule is that the smaller your camera, lens and camera sensor is, the smaller the ball you’ll need. If you’re trying out lensball photography with your smartphone, a 60mm lens ball will suffice. If on the other hand you are using a DSLR or mirrorless camera with a big full frame sensor and larger lenses, it’s best to get a larger 90cm lensball.

    lensball geometry

    These lensball weigh between 0,5 and even up to 2 Pounds, so generally speaking, you can carry these glass spheres conveniently in every bag or photo backpack. If you’re a professional photographer, even the biggest lensball weigh no more than a zoom lens, so you can still take itwith you on trips and photo tours. A handy tip I can give you is to always carry a microfibre cloth to clean and remove fingerprints and dirt before every shoot, I even have microfibre gloves to totally avoid any nasty fingerprints which might ruin a good shot.

    lensball photography example

    You should also take care to go for high-quality processed and polished crystal glass that has no air bubbles so that you’ll get crystal clear and sharp pictures.

    Is lensball photography for you?

    The field of lensball photography covers many styles from landscape and architectural photography to portraiture and special effects. Want to get a lot of likes on Instagram ? Surprise your audience with lensball picture, adding a completely new atmosphere with a creative take on your photography and literally turn your world upside down. It’s also well-suited for abstract photography, double exposure photography and can be used any time of day. Lensball photos always stand out from the crowd, just remember to bring along a microfiber cloth for regular cleaning.

    lensball creative

    Lensbal photography with a dedicated camera

    The effect of lensball photography allows for many surreal and imaginative images. The most beautiful images are made when the reflected and inverted image through the ball is perfectly in focus, while the rest of the image is blurred.

    lensball photography tips

    This effect can be achieved when using a fast aperture lens, at least an f/2.8 lens. Just turn your camera too what is called aperture priority mode and set aperture lens to the largest opening (in this case f/2.8). Using a tele zoom lens at setting it to the tele end (for instance 200mm on a 70-200mm lens) will also get you the added benefit of a photography effect called image compression, which makes the out-of-focus part of your image even creamier. You might want to get your tripod out when using a tele zoom as the slightest movement will change your composition at this focal length.

    lenasball creative use
    You can always flip your image if you wat to have the reflected image appear the right side up.

    When your lens is set to a large aperture, you’ll need to take care to focus correctly. With a shallow depth-of-field, your focus point is very important as the in-focus area is shallow. This is aggravated by the fact that the ball is round, so you’ll need to focus on the centre of the ball. In order to achieve this, it’s best to set your camera to something like a one point focus (differs per camera brand) and then move the focus point to the centre of the ball in your composition. Always take a few shots just to be sure.

    Lensball photography with a Smartphone 

    If you’re not a professional photographer and you’re using your smartphone, don’t worry, you can get some cool lensball photography shots straight from your phone camera too. The key is always to go for a good composition and a unique perspective, more than merely relying on complicated techniques. Focus won’t be that important with a smartphone camera since even an f/1.8 aperture lens here equates to around an f/16 aperture on a full frame camera. This means that the portion of your shot that is in-focus will be a lot larger, albeit at the expense of the softness of the out of focus area.

    lensball photography tutorial

    If however you own one of the latest iPhones or a more expensive Android smartphones that support something called depth maps, it’s also possible to create (more) of this blurred background effect using an app that supports this like Focos for iPhone . Apps for Android phones differ per manufacturer as many have different technologies behind their depth map system.

    Some general tips and warnings for lensball photography 

    • Make sure to always clean your lensbal before a new shoot.You don’t want any greasy fingerprints or dust on the surface as this will impact the sharpness and clarity of your photos. It’s always best to keep your lensball in it’s original case or packaging in order to prevent accidents and damage to the glass ball. This is best done with a microfibre cloth which is used to clean lenses too. I have a pair of microfibre gloves that came with my lensbal which are great for handling as well as cleaning the lensball.
    • Once you’ve found a great spot to use your lensball, you’ll need to use a type of stand in order to prevent it from rolling or moving (as well as damage to the ball itself). My lensball came with a small stand that I always use, but a bottle cap is also an option in a pinch. a roll of adhesive tape or a small rubber ring (like for plumbing) can also be a good idea if you want something that won’t show up in your pictures.You’ll also need a flat surface.  You’ll be safe on sand or in the grass as it’s unlikely that your lensball will roll away on those surfaces. If you want to be extra safe, you can always sprinkle some salt on any surface in order to get some more grip.

    lensball stand

    • You can use any lens you want with this magical photography tool, depending on what type of photo you’re after. If you want to get a lot of surroundings alongside the photography lensball, go for a wide angle lens like a 24mm. I would not go wider than that since you’ll get too much volume distortion towards the edges of the frame, making the lensball appear elongated. If you want to focus more on the lensball itself and not the surroundings, go for a more tele lens like a 85mm or even go extreme with a 200mm! As I mentioned before, it’s a great idea to have a large aperture lens in order to get a smooth and blurred background effect. It also helps to get a lens with a quite close minimum focussing distance of at least below 30 cm so that the lensball can be large enough in your images to be noticed.
    • I have my camera on aperture mode for this creative photography technique, so that I can switch between f/2.8 and perhaps a larger aperture like f/4 when I move closer to the ball. I mostly use a 24-70mm zoom by the way, as this allows me to switch between a wide field of view and a more narrow ‘lensball only’ view when I want. A shutter speed of between 1/250 and 1/125 is recommended when shooting handheld in order to get tack sharp images without camera shake. For longer exposures, like when taking pictures at night or at dusk, a tripod is strongly recommended. You could also try to use ND filters to make long exposures near bodies of water or waterfalls and have that reflected in the lensball too. The possibilities are endless!

    lensball photography tricks

    • Beware when doing what is called freehand glass ball Photography (walking around with the lensball in hand): the balls are not only relatively heavy, but also slippery. If you focus too much on the camera, you run the risk of dropping and breaking it.
    • Remember that a lensball is really a kind of magnifying glass. It works in the same way when a lensball is placed in direct sunlight that it focusses the rays of the sun and can actually start a fire. So be very careful when using it.

    Conclusion

    Whether you’re an amateur or advanced photographer, with a smartphone or a DSLR, Crystal ball reflection photography is a fun and creative tool for anyone interested in making unique and eye-catching images. You can use it with all kinds of light sources in landscape photography, cityscape, in a photo studio with water and even for portraiture of people.

    lensball creative

    The right size of K9 Crystal photography ball will depend on the size of your camera. In general the bigger the camera, the bigger ball needed. Besides this you’ll need a fast aperture (at least) f/2.8 lens if you want to be able to get a blurry background that stands out against the in-focus inverted projection of the lensball.A  K9 Crystal Photography Ball is an ideal photography accessory for all skill levels of photography that can produce dreamlike images with a moderate tele or wide angle lens.

    Questions

    What are the benefits of using a lensball?

    Lensballs will make your photos more remarkable, and is always a crowd favourite. Whether you’re a pro-photographer or just enjoy taking photos for fun, a lensball will make you more creative in composing shots and adding elements. A lensball will make any photo more unique and interesting.

    How do you use a lensball?

    Lensballs are cool! You can use them to take awesome pictures. Hold up the ball in front and shoot through it. That’s how you get started.Lensballs are great for taking pictures of nature. You can use them to capture amazing scenery or even take photos of simple objects. Try using lensballs to take awesome photos!

    How to take a great photo using your lensball?

    Lensballs are very unique objects.

    1. Refraction photography requires getting the right position. You need to get the right distance between the lensball, and the object you want to shoot. This means you should use a tripod or something similar.
    2. Make sure that there is enough light around the object you want to photograph.
    3. A crisper and more defined picture means that you need to be closer to the ball than before.
    4. You also need to hold the lensball very carefully as you take the picture. (Your hands might appear in the image.)
    5. Use a tripod to avoid capturing your hands or anything else in your photo.
    6. Hold the lensball higher than the object and shoot from below.
    7. Lensballs are great for taking photos because you don’t need a tripod.
    8. You can use them anywhere and anytime.Depth of field refers to how much of the foreground and background is in focus.
    9. A shallow depth of field means more of the scene is sharp while a deep depth of field means less of the scene is sharp. To achieve a shallow depth of field, use a wide-angle lens and zoom in close. F
    10. or a deep depth of field, use telephoto lenses and zoom out far away.
    11. Lensballs are cool things that help people see better.
    12. Cropping helps bring out more of what you want to show.
    13. Selective desaturation makes the lensball pop out of the picture.
    14. The subject should be well-lit.
    15. Lighting is key when taking photos with lenses.
    16. The subject should be in focus.
    17. The background should be blurred.
    18. Lensballs are very unique objects. We love them because they’re spherical and shiny.
    19. Hold the bottom of the ball, not the drawstrings or top of the bag, and make sure the bag is supporting the lensball.U
    20. Don’t leave your lensball in direct sunlight.
    21. When you’re done using the lensball, store it in an airtight container.
    22. Store it away from heat and light.Lens ball photography is a new type of photography, but it’s very easy to learn.

    What is a Lensball and How does it Work?

    A Lensball or K9 Crystal Photography Ball is basically a transparent glass sphere that photographers use to take pictures. Inside the sphere, the camera sees the world upside down. This magical photography tool makes the picture appear as if it were taken through a fish-eye lens. Lensballs come in different sizes.

    The smaller ones cost less money, but you get fewer shots per ball. Larger balls give more shots per dollar spent.Refraction photography is used by photographers who want to create images that look like they were taken inside a crystal ball. They use lenses with convex glass (or plastic), so the camera sees the image upside-down and reflected through the convex glass.

  • Canon EOS RP easy manual

    Canon EOS RP easy manual 

    Introduction

    The Canon EOS RP features a 26.2 megapixel Full Frame CMOS sensor with the now standard DIGIC 8 image processor.  This is already Canon’s second full frame mirrorless camera, but they’ve managed to produce a sensor with 4779 selectable AF positions which are sensitive to f/11. The electronic viewfinder also has a decent 2.36 million dots and the EOS RP features a vari-angle touchscreen on the back. When it comes to video, the Canon EOS RP is no slouch either, with 4K capabilities at 25fps and a time-lapse mode and Full HD at 60fps.

    Canon EOS RP advanced manual product image

    If you’re new to digital photography or Canon mirrorless cameras, I’m sure this guide full of tips and trips will make you more familiar with the various settings, features and functionalities of the Canon R. Now it’s time to turn your camera on and press the Menu button. You’ll be able to follow along page by page with this guide. Please note that to see all the pages, set the camera’s mode to Av, Tv or M as some other modes provide only a small subset of menu options.

    Firstly, you might have landed here for another Canon mirrorless camera. Even though the menus are similar, it’s best to use my specific guide per camera. 

    You can find other manuals here:

    Also, if you want to see this more soothing black camera interface instead of the bright white, change the colour of the Menu in: Disp Level settings – Menu Display – Standard.

    Canon EOS RP Menu system

    The Shoot Menu (Red Camera Icon)

    Page Shoot 1 (SHOOT1) 

    Canon EOS RP red camera icon page shoot 1

    Image quality: you primarily need to decide whether to shoot RAW or JPEG. Raw records all the data from the sensor, Jpeg is basically a much smaller file that has all kinds of information already baked in. Most serious photographers shoot RAW, as this gives you the most flexible file to work with in an application like Adobe Lightroom.

    You’ll be able to recover more colour in the highlights of your image for instance, and pull more detail out of the shadows with a Raw file than with a Jpeg. The only downside are the larger files and the fact that of course you’ll need to develop them later on. RAW file average size of 20.8 MB an JPEG file average size of 10 MB with the EOS RP.

    You’ll see that the is also a cRAW option, this is a format that uses lossy compression to reduce file sizes by roughly 40%. This is absolutely fine to use, the deterioration is negligible.

    If you decide to shoot Jpeg, you can choose between Large, Medium or Small, each with a Fine or Normal setting. Check the table above for the relative pixel sizes for each setting. I would advise Large and Fine of course.


    Still img aspect ratio: this describes how square (1:1) or wide (16:9) your image is. It’s expressed as a figure, like this: width:height (width always comes first). The aspect ratio of a Full Frame sensor is 3:2, and you should use this if you want to use the full surface of the sensor. Cropping can also be done later.  

    • 3:2: the native sensor dimension of the full frame mirrorless Canon EOS RP.
    • 1.6x: this is wat is called crop mode, and is used when you use EF-S lenses from the APS-C cameras.
    • 4:3: native resolution of a micro-four-thirds camera .
    • 16:9: for a wider perspective.
    • 1:1: a basic square setting.

    Image review: You can modify the amount of time the image displays on the LCD monitor after your EOS RP writes it to the memory card. You can set the preview time from 2 to 8 seconds or display the image until you turn off the camera. Or you can turn it OFF if you don’t want this.

    I turn it off as I can always press the play button if I decide to review a shot I’ve just taken..

    • Off
    • 2 sec
    • 4 sec
    • 8 sec
    • Hold

    Release shutter without card

    If this is set to ON, you want be able to use the shutter button if there is no SD card inserted in the camera. This is a security feature, so that you won’t start shooting images without actually recording them on an SD card. On the other hand, if you’re just testing the features of the camera, you probably won’t wan’t to store these files, and then you can leave it ON.


    Page Shoot 2 (SHOOT2)

    Canon EOS RP red camera icon page shoot 2

    Lens aberration correction: digital technology provides the ability to adjust images in-camera. One area this can be useful is in correcting for optical performance. By mapping the performance of each camera and lens at a variety of focal lengths, focus distances and apertures, it is possible to correct for these irregularities and bring the lens performance closer to ‘perfection’. These corrections are only available for photos captured in the JPEG file format. There is no reason to turn this off, except if you’re noticing a slow down when shooting in burst mode, then this might be the reason.

    • Peripheral illumination correction: This is called lens light fall-off or drop in the corners or vignetting.
    • Distortion correction: If you’re shooting with a wide-angle lens you may have noticed that at the wide end you will most likely find some distortion. This corrects distortion for any lens in the lens database.
    • Digital Lens Optimizer: Performs high- level correction for lens aberration in-camera
    • Chromatic aberr corr: Automatically remove color fringing due to Chromatic aberration.
    • Diffraction correction: a camera and lens specific correction that uses a profile of the lens used to ameliorate the effects of diffraction caused by small apertures (usually f/11 and beyond where there will be decrease in sharpness).

    All options “OFF” (though Chromatic Aberration correction is a good option to leave enabled for most).


    External speedlite control: Using this menu item, you can adjust flash power. The Flash Control option also enables you to customize as well as control an external flash head.

    • Flash firing: Normally, this option is set to Enable. If you want to disable the flash, you can choose Disable instead. However, you don’t have to take this step in most cases.
    • E-TTL II meter: This option enables you to switch from the default flash metering approach, called Evaluative. In this mode, the camera exposes the background using ambient light when possible and then sets the flash power to serve as fill light on the subject. If you instead select the Average option, the flash is used as the primary light source, meaning that the flash power is set to expose the entire scene without relying on ambient light. Typically, this results in a more powerful (and possibly harsh) flash lighting and dark backgrounds.

    • Slow synchro: Slow Sync Flash is a function found on many cameras that tells your camera to shoot with both a longer shutter speed as well as firing the flash. This means you get the best of both worlds above and can both get a relatively sharp shot of your main subject as well as get some ambient light from the background and foreground.
    • Safety FE: The camera automatically changes the shutter speed or aperture value when the flash fires to avoid overexposing and blowing out the highlights in the scene.

    • Flash func. Setting and External flash C.Fn setting: these last 2 options on the Flash Control list relate to how to control external flashes from the EOS RP itself. This depends very much on what flash you’re using, and you should consult the flash manual in order to set this up.


    Page Shoot 3 (SHOOT3)

    Canon EOS RP red camera icon page shoot 3


    Expo.comp./AEB: Exposure Compensation and Auto Exposure Bracketing.

    Exposure compensation: If you believe that your camera is over- or underexposing your images, or you want to do this for creative reasons, you can change the level of exposure by a scale of plus or minus 3 EV.

    Auto Exposure Bracketing.: Using the exposure compensation setting, you can capture images at different exposure levels, and then select the optimal image later with a +/- 5 EV scale. These two functions can the be used in combination.


    ISO speed settings for photos

    ISO speed: can either be set to Automatic or determine an appropriate value for yourself. Say for landscapes when using a tripod this is generally set to what is called base ISO 100. ISO 100 would give you the optimal quality for this sensor, but for many other types of photography you’ll need a higher ISO in order to have a fast enough shutter speed and hence no movement in your images. Leave this on auto for most uses.

    ISO Auto: This is used to set the max for Auto, from 400 to the top value of 40000. When raising the ISO value, you are effectively raising the sensitivity of the sensor by boosting the output. This leads to more and more noise with every doubling of power. A Maximum of 12800 is as far as I would go with the Canon EOS RP.


    Auto Lighting Optimizer

    Auto-corrects image brightness and contrast. This only affects Jpeg and not your Raw files, but it can be handy for the Jpeg shooters out there. Have a go and see if you like the effect set to low or standard.


    Highlight tone priority

    Improves gradation in highlights to avoid over exposure in bright subjects. What the camera does in highlight tone priority is underexpose the image to avoid clipping highlights, then boost the shadows up to give the appearance of a wider dynamic range in the jpegs. It does the same thing you might do when processing raw files, except it just applies it to jpegs. Another great feature to experiment with. Either Off or enabled.


    Metering timer

    When you half press the shutter (or use back button focus) in one of the creative zone modes and then release it, the camera’s meter takes a reading and sets the exposure values. These values time out and disappear after the amount of time set by this option. You have to half press again to take a new reading at that point. From 4, 8, 16, 30 sec too 1, 10, 30 min.


    Expo. Simulation

    When ‘Exp.SIM’ (which stands for Exposure Simulation) is on, indicates the image you are seeing on the rear screen and EVF is what the final image will look like. You can leave this on except when using flash in the studio as you’ll only see a dark frame in that case.


    Page Shoot 4 (SHOOT4)

    Canon EOS RP red camera icon page shoot 4


    White balance

    Normally AWB (auto white balance) will do just fine but you also have the option to change this to AWB W (auto white balance with white priority This setting is amazing for indoor lighting), Daylight, Shade, Cloudy, Tungsten, White fluorescent, Flash, Custom and Colour Temperature adjustable.


    Custom white balance

    This setting brings up compatible images to use. Set the white balance under the same light source thatwill illuminate your shot.


    WB Shift/Bkt.

    White balance shift is a setting on the EOS RP camera that allows a photographer to bias the colours in images in either blue, amber, magenta or green directions. This colour shift can be used to add or remove colour shifts that may occur when shooting in mixed lighting conditions. Typically think flash and daylight, flash and indoor lights, street lights and daylight and so on. White balance can be shifted from -9 to +9 in both blue / amber and green / magenta directions, or combinations of blue/amber and green/magenta shifts. The blue/amber shift is equal to five mired for each step.


    Color space

    sRGB is what is used online, and Adobe RGB has a more extended colour profile that mimics the human eye. You might think that the latter is preferable, but unless you print a lot of photos with professional equipment, Adobe RGB is more hassle than its worth since you’ll need to proof every picture you want to use online and convert it to sRGB.


    Picture Style

    Picture style allows you to take photos in the color tones that Canon deems most suitable to each subject . These include normal presets like Standard, Portrait and Landscape but also advanced scenarios like Monochrome, Fine Detail, Neutral and Faithful.

    All these picture styles can be individually adjusted to taste with adjustments like Sharpness, Fine detail, Threshold, Contrast, Saturation, Hue. These adjustments can be saved in 3 user defined slots and even transferred to other EOS cameras.

    Auto, Standard, Portait, Landscape, Fine Detail, Neutral, Faithful, Monochrome, User Def. 1, 2 and 3].

    Set to Neutral with Strength = 1 (Note: the low contrast “Neutral” picture style provides a histogram on the back of the camera that most-accurately shows me blown highlights and blocked shadows on the camera LCD. I usually change the Picture Style to “Standard” in DPP after capture.)


    Page Shoot 5 (SHOOT5)

    Canon EOS RP red camera icon page shoot 5


    Long exp. noise reduction

    Turn On noise reduction for exposures of 1 second or longer with the Canon EOS RP. This function takes a second black or dark frame (with the shutter closed) with the identical shutter time of your first photo. The noise in this frame is then subtracted from the original photo. This method is the most reliable type of noise reduction, as the noise is measured specifically at that place and time with the same level of humidity and temperature. All factors that can contribute to noisy images especially in long exposures.

    Some photographers however find it annoying to have to wait for this to finish as it doubles the time. You can turn it off and experiment with other types of noise reduction in Lightroom or any other photo editor if you shoot RAW. 


    High ISO speed NR

    You can choose from 3 levels of noise reduction: Standard, High or Low. This function is especially effective when shooting at high ISO speeds.

    Multishot: This technique automatically combines four images captured at once to reduce noise. Compared to setting High ISO speed NR to [High], this feature minimises loss of image quality while reducing noise. Best technique for Jpeg shooters.

    Again, noise reduction is destructive to images details. I prefer to add noise reduction sparingly during post processing.


    Dust Delete Data

    This function allows you to download your shots to your computer using the canon software. The software will analyse the images and any dust spots that show up on multiple images will be registered. This database is then relayed back to the Canon R that will ignore the pixels with dust on.

    I don’t think this is necessary, as periodically wet cleaning yourself or by a professional should be part of your camera cleaning routine anyway.


    Touch Shutter

    If the Touch Shutter function is set to On, you can take shots easily by having the camera focus on your subject and adjust the brightness simply by touching. I don’t use this function, but if you’re coming from a smartphone, you could find it very useful.


    Multiple Exposure

    As you shoot multiple exposures (2–9), you can select how the images will be merged into a single image.

    • On: Func/Ctrl (Function and control priority) Convenient when shooting multiple exposures gradually as you check the results. During continuous shooting, the continuous shooting speed will decrease greatly.
    • On: ContShtng (Continuous shooting priority) Used for continuous multiple exposures of moving subjects.Continuous shooting is possible without the following operations: menu viewing, image review after capture, image playback, and undo last image.

    Multi-expos ctrl setting:

    • Additive: The exposure of each single image captured is added cumulatively. Based on the number of exposures setting, set a negative exposure compensation. Follow the basic guide below to set the exposure compensation amount. (Two exposures: -1 stop, three exposures: -1.5 stop, four exposures: -2 stops)
    • Average: Based on the number of exposures setting, negative exposure compensation is set automatically as you shoot multiple exposures. If you shoot multiple exposures of the same scene, the exposure of the subject’s background will be automatically controlled to obtain the standard exposure.

    • Bright/Dark: Brightness (or darkness) of the base image and added images is compared at the same position, and bright (or dark) portions are retained. Some overlapping colors may be mixed, depending on the relative brightness (or darkness) of the image.

    HDR Mode

    You can shoot still photos with clipped highlights and shadows reducedfor a high dynamic range of tones even in high-contrast scenes. HDR shooting is effective for landscape and still-life shots.
    With HDR shooting, three images of different exposures(standard exposure, underexposure, and overexposure) are captured consecutively for each shot and then merged together automatically. The HDR image is recorded as a JPEG image.

    You can select the dynamic range of the HDR images and an effect like Natural, Art standard, Vivid, Bold or Embossed.

    HDR images will always be saved as Jpeg!


    Focus Bracketing

    When enabled, the focus bracketing feature instructs the camera to take a series of pictures with the lens’ focus distance setting increasing between each image captured until the specified number of images are captured or until infinity focus is reached. The resulting set of images can then be focus stacked during post-processing with the result being an increased depth of field, potentially by a significant amount, while avoiding the softening effects of diffraction caused by very narrow apertures use.

    This technique is commonly used in macro photography as the depth of field is typically extremely shallow at very close focus distances. Landscape photographers frequently use this technique to keep entire scenes that include a close foreground subject in focus.

    There are four settings used to control the focus bracketing feature.

    1. Activate Focus Bracketing (Enable/Disable)
    2. Input number of shots (2 to 999)
    3. Focus increment (1-10)
    4. Exposure smoothing (Enable/Disable)

    The number of shots instructs the camera to capture up to the specified number of images. I say “up to” because the camera stops taking photographs when infinity focus distance is reached and this may only require a small number of images regardless of the number of shots setting. Use this setting to limit the camera to a shorter focus distance range, or set the number very high to ensure that all distances including infinity are covered.

    The focus increment setting is definitely the vaguest on this list. This setting deals with the granularity of the focus distance adjustment between each shot with 1 requesting fine increments and 10 requesting wide increments. Specific distance changes are not able to be input and with the depth of field increasing with distance, a non-specific increment value makes sense. Focus brackets always start with the initial focus distance and proceed toward infinity (the ending distance cannot be directly specified). “The wider the pre-set lens aperture, and the closer the lens is to the subject for the first shot, the finer the focus increments should normally be, and the more Focus Bracketed shots should be dialed-in.”

    Exposure smoothing is disabled by default, but when enabled, the camera keeps image brightness consistent through the image set. This feature is primarily useful for compensating for light transmission losses when lenses, especially macro models, are focused at very close distances.

    Optional is for the camera to create a new folder on the memory card before the bracketed sequence starts, making it easy to separate a potentially large number of images. Tapping the “Folder +” icon creates a new folder and subsequent images are saved there.


    Page Shoot 6 (SHOOT6)

    Canon EOS RP red camera icon page shoot 6


    Interval timer

    For fully customisable time-lapse photos and movies.


    Bulb Timer

    This is used for long exposures. Turn this, on, set the exposure timer to your desired setting and then shoot a Bulb exposure.  If you want to end the exposure early, just tap the shutter.


    Anti Flicker Shoot.

    With anti-flicker shooting, the camera detects the frequency of the light source’s blinking and takes the picture when the flicker’s effect on the exposure or color is detectable.

    If you shoot an image with a fast shutter speed under a light source such as fluorescent light, the blinking of the light source causes flicker and the image may be vertically unevenly exposed. If continuous shooting is used under these conditions, uneven exposures or colors across the images may result.
    With anti-flicker shooting, the camera detects the frequency of the light source’s blinking and takes the picture when the flicker’s effect on the exposure or color is minimal.

    High Speed Display

    The  Canon EOS RP must be set to high speed frame rate to enable this option. This setting lets the EVF update faster than the 5 FPS rate at which the EOS RP shoots in Continuous Hi mode. Doesn’t work with adapted lenses.

    Set to ON. The camera must be set to Servo AF and high speed continuous frame rate to enable this option.


    Page Shoot 7 (SHOOT7)

    Canon EOS RP red camera icon page shoot 7

    AF operation

    One Shot: for Still Subjects. When you press the shutter button halfway, the camera will focus only once.

    • When focus is achieved, the dot inside the AF point achieving focus lights up briefly in red, and the focus confirmation light <> in the viewfinder will also light up.
    • With evaluative metering, the exposure setting will be set at the same time focus is achieved.
    • While you hold down the shutter button halfway, the focus will be locked. You can then recompose the shot if desired.

    Servo: This AF operation is for moving subjects when the focusing distance keeps changing. While you hold down the shutter button halfway, the subject will be focused continuously.

    • The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken.
    • When the AF point selection is automatic, the camera first uses the center AF point to focus. During autofocusing, if the subject moves away from the center AF point, focus tracking continues as long as the subject is covered by another AF point.

    AF method

    Face + Tracking:

    • the Canon R searches for faces in the frame. If it finds one, it displays a white focus frame over the face.
    • In a group shot where more than one face is recognized by the camera, you see arrows on either side of the focus frame. To choose a different face as the focusing target, tap the face or use the Multi-controller to move the target frame over the face.
    • To lock focus on the face, press and hold the shutter button halfway down or press and hold the AF-ON button. When focus is locked, the focus frame turns green, as shown on the right above, and the camera emits a beep. (Disable the sound effect via the Beep option on Shooting Menu 1.) If focus isn’t successful, the focus frame turns red.

    1 point AF: only one AF point is used for extremely precise autofocus.

    Expand AF area: Focusing uses one AF point and points above, below, and to the left and right. Effective for moving subjects, which are difficult to track with 1-point AF. Although Servo AF requires you to focus on a subject initially with an AF point, focusing is easier with this AF method than with Zone AF.

    Expand AF area: Around: Focusing uses one AF point and surrounding points. Enables focusing over a wider area than F point expansion. Effective for moving subjects, which are difficult to track with 1-point AF. Servo AF operation is the same as for AF point expansion.

    Zone AF: Uses auto selection AF in Zone AF frames to cover a larger area than AF point expansion, which makes focusing easier than with 1-point AF/AF point expansion and also effective for moving subjects. Generally focuses on the nearest subject. Note the camera attempts to focus on faces of any people in the Zone AF frame.

    Large Zone AF: Vertical: Uses auto selection AF in a vertical Large Zone AF frame to cover a larger area than Zone AF, which makes focusing easier than with 1-point AF/AFpoint expansion and also effective formoving subjects. Generally focuses on the nearest subject. Note the camera attempts to focus on faces of any people in the Zone AF frame.

    Large Zone AF: Horizontal: Uses auto selection AF in a horizontal Large Zone AF frame to cover a larger area than Zone AF, which makes focusing easier than with 1-point AF/AF point expansion and also effective for moving subjects. Generally focuses on the nearest subject. Note the camera attempts to focus on faces of any people in the Zone AF frame.


    Eye Detection AF

    This is an exciting new feature, introduced with the EOS M APS-C cameras.  When its AF Method is set to Face Detect + Tracking, the entire active AF area (see the colored outlines in the graphics above) is used for focusing.  And, if a human face is detected, the Face Detect technology has been enhanced — the camera doesn’t simply focus on the most prominent face in the scene.  Instead, it now is able to detect the nearest eye on that face, and puts a smaller focus box on that eye.  If that person moves around the picture area, the Eye Detection AF continues to track that eye, as long as it remains visible.

    When Eye Detection AF is active, you’ll see a large, outer box indicating that Face Detection has recognized a human face.  And within it, a smaller box will surround the actual eye that is being concentrated upon for Eye Detection AF.

    This means that sharp focus will more than ever be placed on the “leading” eye of your subjects, whether you’re shooting portraits or candid pictures.  Where many experienced photographers might have previously made the effort to change to a single AF point, and move it manually to cover the face of a human subject, the new Eye Detection AF technology means that the process can be left to the EOS RP in many cases.

    All that has to be done to activate Eye Detection AF is to Enable Eye Detection AF in the 3rd Shooting Menu screen, and be sure that Face Detect + Tracking is the active AF Method.  It will function in most shooting modes.

    While Eye Detect AF will normally focus upon the eye nearest to the camera, if you want to concentrate on the subject’s other eye, that’s easy to do — just press the AF Point Select button, on the back of the camera, twice.  You’ll see the smaller “box” surrounding the detected eye jump to the subject’s other eye.

    For Face Detection AF, and the more advanced Eye Detection AF to function, the camera basically has to be able to identify typical human facial features two eyes, a nose, and a mouth.  Accordingly, there can be some limits to the EOS RP’s Eye Detection AF:

    • It will not function with Servo AF, so it’s unable to work with moving subjects (therefore, Eye Detection AF is not possible in Sports Mode or Panning Mode).  
    • It’s disabled if you’re using the Miniature effect or Fish-eye effect settings, within the Creative Filters modes.
    • Eye Detection AF cannot be used when recording video (overall Face Detection is possible during video recording, including when continuous Movie Servo AF is active).
    • The primary face in the scene needs to be sufficiently close to take up a certain amount of space in the picture — if a detected face is too distant or small in the frame, the EOS RP will revert to conventional Face Detection, and you won’t see the smaller “box” displayed over a subject’s eye before you take the picture.  
    • Eye Detect AF may have problems if the subject’s eyes are partially or fully closed.
    • The primary face needs to be turned so it’s essentially facing toward the camera, and the eyes need to be somewhat in the camera’s direction as well.  While direct eye contact with the camera isn’t required, if the subject’s eyes are angled significantly to one side or the other, the EOS RP’s Eye Detection AF may not be able to detect the eye nearest the camera (again, it will usually revert to ordinary Face Detection, or conventional Automatic AF point selection).
    • If one or both of the subject’s eyes are in deep shadow, Eye Detection AF (and sometimes overall Face Detection AF) may have difficulty functioning.
    • Sunglasses, excessive make-up around the eyes, masks, and so on will usually prevent the Eye Detection AF from being able to detect and focus upon the nearest eye.  And, like Face Detection, it’s designed to detect human eyes… it normally will not work with animals or other non-human subjects.

    Continuous AF

    Enable or disable continuous AF where the camera constantly tries to acquire focus, even without pressing the shutter. Turn this Off.


    Touch & drag AF settings

    Touch & Drag AF basically means that you can drag the desired autofocus point to anywhere on the screen. This is much faster than any other method to do this.

    You can select the active touch area: Whole panel, Right, Left, Top Right, Btm Right, Top Left, Btm Left. I have it set to the Bottom Left since this allows you to look through the EVF and change the focus point easily at the same time.

    Set to Enable, this allows a thumb drag across the rear LCD to quickly move the AF point while looking through the electronic viewfinder.


    Page Shoot 8 (SHOOT8)

    Canon EOS RP red camera icon page shoot 8


    Lens electronic MF

    Disable after One-Shot AF/Enable after One-Shot AF:  The latter allows you to fine-tune focus manually in AF mode whilst half-pressing the shutter button.


    AF-assist beam firing

    This is a read beam that some flashes have which helps to acquire focus in situations with low light.


    MF peaking settings

    Peaking is a focussing aide when the camera is set to manual focus. The in-focus area will have a type of coloured noise superimposed onto scene in the EVF or on the screen. This is of course not stored, it’s merely an aide that helps you determine where your focus lies and if your subject will be in focus. Very handy feature, I have it set to the Color red and Level High.

    Page Shoot 9 (SHOOT9)

    Canon EOS RP red camera icon page shoot 9


    Movie rec Size

    Movie Recording Size

    Total Possible Recording Time on Card

    File Size

    8 GB

    32 GB

    128 GB

    4K

    23,98p, 25p

    IBP

    8 min.

    35 min.

    2 hr. 20 min.

    869 MB/min.

    FHD

    59,94p, 50p

    IBP

    17 min.

    1 hr. 09 min.

    4 hr. 37 min.

    440 MB/min.

    29,97p, 25p

    IBP

    33 min.

    2 hr. 15 min.

    9 hr. 01 min.

    225 MB/min.

    HDR movie

    23,97p, 25p

    IBP

    1 hr. 26 min.

    5 hr. 47 min.

    23 hr. 11 min.

    87 MB/min.

    HD

    59,94p, 50p

    IBP

    38 min.

    2 hr. 34 min.

    10 hr. 19 min.

    196 MB/min.

    29,97p, 25p

    IBP

    1 hr. 13 min.

    4 hr. 53 min.

    19 hr. 34 min.

    103 MB/min.


    Sound Recording

    You can record movies while recording sound with the built-in stereo microphone or an external stereo microphone. You can also freely adjust the sound-recording level.

    • Auto: The sound-recording level is adjusted automatically. Auto level control will take effect automatically in response to the sound level.
    • Manual: You can adjust the sound-recording level as needed. Select Rec. level and press the left/right keys while looking at the level meter to adjust the sound-recording level. Look at the peak hold indicator, and adjust so that the level meter sometimes lights up on the right of the –12 dB mark for the loudest sounds. If it exceeds “0”, the sound will be distorted.
    • Disable: Sound will not be recorded.

    Wind Filter: Set to Auto to reduce wind noise automatically when there is wind outdoors. Only activated when the camera’s built-in microphone is used. When the wind filter function takes effect, part of the low bass sounds will also be reduced.

    Attenuator: Automatically suppresses sound distortion caused by loud noises. Even if Sound rec. is set to Auto or Manual for recording, sound distortion may still result if there is a very loud sound. In this case, setting it to Enable is recommended.

    Using a microphone:

    Normally, the camera’s built-in microphone records in stereo.
    If an external microphone equipped with a miniature stereo plug (3.5 mm diameter) is connected to the camera’s external microphone IN terminal, the external microphone will be given the priority. Using the Directional Stereo Microphone DM-E1  is recommended.

    Using headphones:

    By connecting commercially available headphones with a 3.5 mm mini plug to the headphone terminal, you can listen to the sound as movies are recorded.


    Movie Digital IS 

     

    In-camera image stabilization electronically corrects camera shake during movie recording. This function is called “Movie digital IS”. With Movie digital IS, images can be stabilized even when using a lens without Image Stabilizer. When using a lens with built-in optical Image Stabilizer, set the lens’s Image Stabilizer switch to ON.

    • Disable: Image stabilization with Movie digital IS is disabled.
    • Enable: Camera shake will be corrected. The image will be slightly magnified.
    • Enhanced:  (Not displayed for still photos shooting) Compared to when Enable is set, stronger camera shake can be corrected. The image will be more magnified.

    Combination IS:

    Even more effective correction is possible by recording movies with Movie digital IS and a Combination IS-compatible lens, which will combine optical and digital image stabilization by the lens and camera.


    Movie Servo AF

    With this function enabled, the camera focuses on the subject continuously during movie recording.


    Auto slow shutter

    You can choose whether to shoot movies that are brighter and less affected by image noise than when set to [Disable]by automatically slowing the shutter speed under low light.

    • Disable: You can choose whether to shoot movies that are brighter and less affected by image noise than when set to  Disable by automatically slowing the shutter speed under low light.
    • Enable: Enables you to shoot brighter movies, less affected by image noise, than when set to Disable by automatically reducing the shutter speed to 1/30 sec. (NTSC) or 1/25 sec. (PAL) under low light.

    Playback Menu (blue playback icon)

    Page Play 1 settings (PLAY1)

    Canon EOS RP playback Menu page 1

    Protect images

    You can select how to protect and unprotect an image from deletion on the EOS 50D. Once an image is protected, it cannot be erased by the camera’s erase function. To erase a protected image, you must first cancel the protection. If you erase all the images, only the protected images will remain. This is convenient when you want to erase unnecessary images all at once.

    You can choose to Select images, Select range, All images in folder, unprotect all images in folder, All images on card or unprotect all images on card.


    Rotate image

    Vertical images are rotated automatically so they are displayed vertically on the camera’s LCD monitor and personal computer instead of horizontally. The setting of this feature can be changed.

    • Immediately after image capture, the vertical image will not be automatically rotated for the image review.
    • If the vertical image is taken while the camera is pointed up or down, the image might not rotate automatically for playback.
    • If the vertical image is not automatically rotated on the personal computer screen, it means the software you are using is unable to rotate the image.

    Erase images

    Select and erase images by selecting a range or All images in folder orAll images on card.


    Print order

    You can connect the camera to a printer via Wi-Fi to print your images directly. This setting takes you to the selection screen where you can select a single image, multiple images for printing and the general set up. See the tutorial below on how to connect to a smartphone, it is the same procedure to connect to a printer


    Photobook Set-up

    This function is useful for ordering photobooks online and for printing photobooks on a printer. 

    When you select images to use in photobooks (up to 998 images) and use EOS Utility (provided software) to transfer them to a computer, the selected images will be copied into a dedicated folder. This function is useful for ordering photobooks online and for printing photobooks on a printer.


    Image transfer

    With the dedicated software Image Transfer Utility 2, you can send images on the camera to a computer automatically. You’ll need to setup the Wifi connection first. 


    Page Play 2 settings (PLAY2)

    Canon EOS RP playback Menu page 2

    RAW image processing

    Being able to perform RAW image post-processing right after shooting on a camera is a function that comes in very handy.

    These settings are available on the Canon R:

    • Brightness adjustment: EV-1, EV-2/3, EV-1/3, EV±0, EV+1/3, EV+2/3, EV+1
    • White balance: WB: Shot settings, Auto, Day Light, Shade, Cloudy, Tungsten light, White fluorescent light, Flash, Colour temperature
    • Picture Style: Picture Style: Shot settings, Auto, Standard, Portrait, Landscape, Fine Detail, Neutral, Faithful, Monochrome, User Def. 1, User Def. 2, User Def. 3
    • Auto Lighting Optimizer: Disable, Low, Standard, High
    • High ISO speed Noise Reduction: Disable, Low, Standard, High
    • Image quality: write small, medium and large jpeg files in fine or standard resolution.
    • Peripheral illumination correction: Enable/Disable
    • Chromatic aberration: Enable/Disable
    • Diffraction correction: Enable/Disable

    Creative Assist

    Creative Assist provides customisable shooting presets and in-camera edit. An excellent aide for beginners, as you’ll see an outcome-orientated touchscreen system for adjusting parameters such as image brightness, contrast, saturation, color tone, monochrome and background blur.

    Canon EOS RP creative assist


    Quick Control RAW processing

    Toggle RAW processing inside the Quick control Menu on/off.


    Create album

    Create an album for printing using a can printer or compatible printing service. 


    Page Play 3 settings (PLAY3)

    Canon EOS RP playback Menu page 3


    Cropping

    Complementary to the other in-camera RAW processing feature, you can crop your image or multiple images here freely or according to preset dimensions.


    Resize

    It’s also possible to resize your RAW images and save them in-camera for posting on social media for instance.


    Rating

    You can add a star rating to your images here. This rating will show up later when you transfer the images to your computer if you use Canon’s Digital Photo Professional.

    You can:

    • Select images
    • Select range
    • All images in folder
    • All images on card


    Slide show

    You can setup and start an in-camera slideshow here.


    Set image search conditions

    You’ll find lots of factors to choose here, I honestly don’t know why this was implemented and never use it.


    Image jump w/dial

    This setting selects how much of the jump your image library will tale when you turn the dial.

    You can select one by one, jump 10, jump by specified number, by date, by folder, display movies only, stills only, protected only or display by image rating.


    Page Play 4 settings (PLAY4)

    Canon EOS RP playback Menu page 4


    Playback information display

    You can enable up to 9 individual screens – all except the first, which is the basic shooting info overlay, allow the histogram to be specified as brightness or RGB, and in some cases, both. Enable to avoid too many playback options. 


    Highlight alert

    The Highlight Alert setting will show you where the overexposed areas in your images are located.  The image preview will blink in areas that are completely white and have no detail.

    Set to Enable, it causes overexposed pixels to blink.


    AF point disp.

    This setting either shows or hides the number of AF points on screen and in your EVF.


    Playback Grid

    Sets the number of images or previews in the grid when you select Playback.

    Set to 3×3, it helps with checking alignment.


    View from last seen

    Either enable or disable the view from previous images in order to compare them.


    Magnificatn (apx)

    you can set the starting magnification and initial position for the magnified view.

    • 1x (no magnification): The image will not be magnified. The magnified view will start with the single-image display.

    • 2x, 4x, 8x, 10x (magnify from center): he magnified view will start at the image center at the selected magnification.
    • Actual size (from selected point): The recorded image’s pixels will be displayed at approx. 100%. The magnified view will start at the AF point that achieved focus. If the photo was taken with manual focus, the magnified view will start at the image center.

    • Same as last magnification (from center): The magnification will be the same as the last time you exited the magnified view. The magnified view starts from the image center.

    Set to “Actual size (from selected pt)”. It allows one button press during playback to zoom deeply into the image.


    Set Up Menu (Spanner, gear icon)

    Set Up Menu Page 1 (SET UP1)

    Canon EOS RP Setup Menu page 1


    Select folder

    You can select and/or create the folder on your SD card where files will be stored here.


    File numbering

    You can set the file numbering for each new shot to Continuous or Auto Reset/Manual Reset. Continuous will consecutively number your photos. Auto reset will reset the numbering every time an SD card is inserted, and Manual reset will reset the numbering once.


    Auto rotate

    Auto rotate automatically rotates your images that are shot in portrait mode to fit the screen size. You can turn this on or off and decide whether this will behaviour will also apply to images imported to your PC using the canon software .


    Format card

    You should format your SD card in-camera every time you insert an SD card when starting a new session. This to make sure that there won’t be any writing errors. Remember that formatting will erase all the images on the card, and won’t even be recoverable if you choose the low level format option.


    Mode Guide

    Enables a guide when you select the different shooting modes with the Mode Dial. 


    Feature Guide

    Enables an on screen guide with the most interesting feature of the Canon EOS RP. 


    Set Up Menu Page 2 (SET UP2)

    Canon EOS R Setup Menu page 2


    Eco mode

    This function allows you to conserve battery power.When the camera is not in use, the screen quickly darkens to reduce battery consumption


    Power saving

    The power will shut off in the following circumstances. Press the power button again to restore power.

    Shooting Mode Powers down approximately 3 minutes after the last control is accessed on the camera. The LCD monitor automatically turns off 1 minute* after the last control is accessed even if [Auto Power Down] is set to [Off]. Press any button other than the power button to turn the LCD monitor back on.
    Playback Mode or connected to a Printer. Powers down approximately 5 minutes after the last control is accessed on the camera.

    Display brightness

    Adjust the brightness of the display in 7 steps.


    Date/Time/Zone

    Select your local time zone, a date and time for your camera. This information will be written in the EXIF data of your photos.


    Language

    Select your preferred language for the camera Menus. I choose English, as it is easiest to find information online in English.


    Set Up Menu Page 3 (SET UP3)

    Canon EOS R Setup Menu page 3


    Video system

    Select either NTSC or PAL depending on the region where you live.


    Touch control

    You can turn on or off the touch sensitive screen on the back of your Canon EOS RP. Standard/Sensitive/Disable.


    Beep

    You can either enable or disable the beep when you engage the shutter as well as when you touch the screen.

    Set to disable as you don’t to hear you beeping camera setting changes or focus confirmation.


    Battery info.

    Display the battery charge in the upper right corner.


    Sensor cleaning

    You should set this to Auto cleaning. This will send a charge through your sensor every time you turn it off, dislodging any dust particles that might be on the sensor. You should also make a habit of regularly cleaning the señor cage with a simple air blower.

    If you prefer to only periodically clean the sensor, you can use the ‘clean now’ function to immediately do this procedure.


    HDMI resolution

    You can choose either Auto where the camera will decide automatically what type of device it’s connected too, 1080p or 4K.


    HDMI HDR output

    HDR output to compatible TV supported with a Micro – Type-D connector. If you won’t be using this function, turn It off.


    Set Up Menu Page 4 (SET UP4)

    Canon EOS R Setup Menu page 4


    Shooting info. Disp.

    There are a few sub menus here, let’s see what they do.

    Screen info. settings: these settings give 5 different screen options. The first 3 allow you to configure the data overlaid on live view and save them as 3 separate screen types. You can turn on or off the basic shooting info (the data at top and bottom of screen), the detailed shooting info (the icons running down the left and right sides), whether the data acts as a touch button or not – if not, it loses the white frame and grey background – this applies to the Q menu button, the touch shoot button, the magnify button, the shutter speed, aperture, EV compensation scale and ISO value and “buttonizes” or “debuttonizes” them all at once; the histogram; the level gauge.

    The fourth screen style is just the AF targets and the exposure info when it is active, and the last screen type is the black, non-live view DSLR-style info screen.  These options are the ones you cycle through with the Info button when shooting with the camera – effectively this section allows you to customise them to taste.

    Still within this submenu we haveL VF info/toggle settings (3 different EVF choices – one with basic shooting info under the screen, the other two configurable to individually add and combine as desired the vertical detailed shooting info icons, histogram, level gauge].  Like the previous item, it’s a way of customising what you get when you cycle through the styles of VF display whilst shooting when you use the Info button to do so.

    Then the submenu has Grid display [Off, 3×3, 6×4, 3×3+diag], Histogram disp [Brightness/RGB, Large/Small], Reset.  That’s the end of this submenu.

    Set to: Screen info. settings: Enable 1 (press Info, disable basic shooting info and enable Electronic level), 3 and 4.


    Viewfinder Performance

    You can set this to Power-saving to conserve battery life, even though refresh rates will be a bit slower than with the Smooth setting.


    VF display format

    [Display 1] shows the Live View image across the entire viewfinder screen. This allows you to fully maximize use of the EVF display, but shooting icons such as those indicating white balance settings and the Auto Lighting Optimizer will be overlaid on the sides of the viewfinder image. If you do not fancy that, you may prefer [Display 2], which features a smaller Live View image, with the shooting icons in the borders surrounding the image.
    The icons displayed are customisable to some extent, and rotate accordingly when you switch to portrait orientation.


    Display settings

    You can select whether to automatically switch from the back screen to the EVF if your eye is detected, or only use the back screen, or only use the EVF and turn the screen off.


    Shutter ban function for movies

    When the EOS RP is set to Movie mode, you can set the shutter button to start and stop movie recording instead of the Rec button. 


    Help Text size

    Choose the size of the help text that appears in the menu system.


    Set Up Menu Page 5 (SET UP5)

    Canon EOS R Setup Menu page 5


    Wireless communication settings

    On the Wireless communication settings screen, you can change the wireless communication function settings.

    Wi-Fi settings: 

    • You can set whether to Enable or Disable the wireless communication function.
    • Password: Set to None to allow a Wi-Fi connection to be established without a password (except when connecting to an access point via Wi-Fi).
    • Connection history: You can set whether to Show or Hide the history of the Wi-Fi connected devices.
    • Auto send images to computer: With the dedicated software Image Transfer Utility 2, you can send images on the camera to a computer automatically.
    • Send to smartphone after shot: Your shots can be sent to a smartphone automatically.
    • MAC address: You can check the MAC address of the camera.

    Wi-Fi function:

    • Communicate with smartphones
    • Remote control (EOS Utility)
    • Print from Wi-Fi printer
    • Send images to Web service

    Bluetooth function:  Displays the screen on which you can set or check the Bluetooth functions.

    Send images to smartphone: While the camera is connected to a smartphone, use this function to send images stored in the camera to the smartphone.

    Nickname: You can change the nickname using the virtual keyboard.

    Clear settings: Clear all wireless communication settings.


    GPS Device settings

    When you’re shooting while connected to a compatible smart device via Bluetooth, EOS RP can collect GPS data and automatically add it to your images using the Canon Camera Connect app. It makes identifying locations easy and provides a useful editing feature for when you’re back home.


    Set Up Menu Page 6 (SET UP6)

    Canon EOS R Setup Menu page 6


    Multi function lock

    If you find yourself regularly changing settings on the camera accidentally while moving around, then making use of the multi-function lock can avoid issues when you come to shoot in a fast-paced environment. The lock switch below the quick command dial can be used to lock the main dial, the multi-controller or the quick control dial – simply select which you would like to lock through the custom function in Group 2 Disp./Operation. When you come to change a setting, you may see L displayed in the viewfinder and on the top LCD panel. If this happens, you will be unable to change the setting because the multi-function lock is set. Simply flick the switch and the camera will return to normal.


    Custom Shooting Mode (CA-C3)

    You can register current camera settings, such as the shooting mode, menu functions, and Custom Function settings, as Custom shooting modes under the Mode Dial’s C1, C2, and C3 positions.

    Clear all camera settings

    This is used to restore your camera settings to the factory default.


    Copyright information

    Insert your own copyright information here. This will be written to every image you take.

    EOS RP back buttons


    Manual/software URL 

    A direct URL to the Canon EOS RP manual. 


    Certification Logo Display

    A bunch of certification logos. You officially have my permission to ignore this :).


    Firmware

    You can check the firmware revision number here. 


    Custom Function Menu 

    C. Fn1: Exposure Settings

    C. Fn1: Exposure Settings

    Exposure level increments

    Sets 1/2-stop increments for the shutter speed, aperture, exposure compensation, AEB, flash exposure compensation, etc. This is effective when you prefer to control the exposure in less fine increments than 1/3-stop.

    ISO speed setting increments
    You can change the manual ISO speed setting increments to 1-stop or 1/3 stop.

    Bracketing auto cancel
    ON: Enable
    When you set the power switch to 2, the AEB and white balance bracketing settings will be canceled. AEB will also be canceled when the flash is ready to fire or if you switch to movie shooting.
    OFF: Disable
    The AEB and white balance bracketing settings will not be canceled even if you set the power switch to <2>. (If the flash is ready to fire or if you switch to movie shooting, AEB will be canceled temporarily, but the AEB range will be retained.

    Bracketing sequence
    The AEB shooting sequence and white balance bracketing sequence can be changed from the starting point zero plus/minus 1.

    Number of bracketed shots
    The number of shots taken with AEB and white balance bracketing can be changed from the default, 3 shots, to 2, 5, or 7 shots.

    Safety shift
    OFF: Disable
    Tv/Av: Shutter speed/Aperture. This takes effect in the shutter-priority AE (s) and aperture priority AE (f) modes. If the subject brightness changes and the standard exposure cannot be obtained within the autoexposure range, the camera will automatically change the manually-selected setting to obtain a standard exposure.
    ISO: ISO speed. This works in the Program AE (d), shutter-priority AE (s), and aperture-priority AE (f) modes. If the subject brightness changes and the standard exposure cannot be obtained within the autoexposure range, the camera will automatically change the manually set ISO speed to obtain a standard exposure.

    Same exposure for new aperture
    If the <a> mode (manual exposure shooting) is set and the ISO speed is set manually (other than Auto ISO or H (12800) is set), the maximum aperture’s f/number may change to a higher number (smaller aperture) if you do any of the following: 1. Change the lens, 2.
    Attach or detach an Extender, or 3. Use a zoom lens whose maximum aperture f/number changes. If you then shoot at the exposure setting as is, the image will be underexposed by the amount the maximum aperture f/number changes to a higher number. However, by changing the ISO speed or shutter speed (Tv) automatically, you can obtain the same exposure that would be obtained before you did 1, 2, or 3.
    OFF: Disable
    Automatic changes in settings to maintain the specified exposure will not be applied. The ISO speed, shutter speed, and aperture already set will be used for shooting. If you do 1, 2, or 3 and the maximum aperture f/number increases, adjust the ISO speed and shutter speed before you shoot.
    ISO: ISO speed
    If you do 1, 2, or 3, the ISO speed will automatically increase to compensate for the amount that the maximum aperture f/number increases by. The same exposure that would be obtained before you did 1, 2, or 3 is thereby obtained.
    Tv: Shutter speed
    If you do 1, 2, or 3, a slower shutter speed will automatically be set to compensate for the amount that the maximum aperture f/number increases by. The same exposure that would be obtained before you did 1, 2, or 3 is thereby obtained.

    C. Fn2: Exposure Settings

    C. Fn2: Exposure Settings

    Set shutter speed range
    You can set the shutter speed range. In the <s> <a> modes, you can set the shutter speed manually within the shutter speed range that you have set. In the <d> <f> modes, the shutter speed will be set automatically within the shutter speed range that you have set.
    • Highest speed: You can set it from 1/8000 sec. to 15 sec.
    • Lowest speed: You can set it from 30 sec. to 1/4000 sec

    Set aperture range

    You can set the aperture range. In the <f> <a> <F> modes, you can set the aperture manually within the aperture range that you have set. In the <d> <s> modes, the aperture will be set automatically within the aperture range that you have set.
    • Min. aperture (Max. f/): You can set it from f/91 to f/1.4.
    • Max. aperture (Min. f/): You can set it from f/1.0 to f/64.

    AE lock meter. mode after focus

    If you check “spot” metering for AE locked after focus, then I can lock the exposure when the shutter button is pressed halfway to focus.  Then you can recompose the image using AE (perhaps evaluative) and Auto ISO.  The new compostion will now register new AE and Auto ISO.


    C. Fn3:  Operation Settings

    C. Fn3:  Operation Settings

    Dial direction during Tv/Av

    Dial turning direction when setting the shutter speed and aperture can be reversed.

    Control ring rotation
    The control ring rotation function can also be reversed here.  

    Focus ring rotation 
    Yes, the same goes for the lens focus ring, this can be reversed. 

    RF lens MF focus ring sensitivity 
    When using Canon RF lenses, you can control the sensitivity of the focus ring. 

    C. Fn4: Operation Settings

    C. Fn4: Operation Settings
     
    Customize buttons
     
    Within the Customize buttons category, the EOS RP lets users change the function of 14 different camera controls for still-image shooting; if the camera is set to a video recording mode, that drops to 12 different buttons.
     

    A few general points here, before we dive into the details. First, while the number of potential changes users can apply to most of the buttons are much more extensive than we’ve seen on previous Canon EOS DSLRs, each control has a specific, factory-set list of possible functions you can apply. And, these do vary in some cases, from one control to another. For instance, there are 25 possible choices to modify the rear AF point select button when you shoot still images, but 41 for the adjacent AE Lock button.

    Furthermore, it’s not possible (as of late 2018) to add or delete items from the factory-set customization list for each control — if a feature isn’t listed on the menu for customizing a particular button, it can’t be added to that button’s capabilities.

    Even with this, the list of possible changes is far more extensive than we’ve seen in previous Canon EOS DSLRs. To take just one example, the AF-ON button on the top-of-the-line EOS-1D X Mark II digital SLR camera gives the user 9 possible ways to customize it; the same AF-ON button on the EOS RP provides 41 possible choices.

    And, the EOS RP’s customization changes, depending on if the camera is in a still-image shooting mode, or switched over to a video shooting mode. Set to video, you lose the ability to customize the function of the Movie Start button (on top of the camera, with the red dot icon), and the shutter button, via the Customize buttons menu. (However, in a video shooting mode, there are settings in the 4th Set-up Menu screen for Shutter Button function, allowing users to modify how it operates for a half-press and full press during video shooting.)

    And, in a video shooting mode, the possible functions you can apply to a particular button sometimes change from what’s available in a still-image shooting mode. This is absolutely normal, and not a sign of any malfunction.


    Customize dials
    Change the operation of the Main Dial, Quick Control Dial, and Control Ring on Canon’s RF lenses (and on the optional Control Ring Lens Mount Adapter EF-EOS RP)

    Customize M-Fn Bar
    Here is where you determine functionality for the touch-sensitive Multi-function bar

    Clear customized settings
    Clear all customised settings and reset them to factory settings 

    C. Fn5: Other Settings

    C. Fn5: Other Settings
     
    Add cropping information
    It is possible to capture a full frame but add in crop marks for various aspect ratios such as 6:6 or 4:5. In the DPP software this makes it very much quicker to achieve an image in the aspect ratio you require for your end usage. If you plan to make use of the cropping information setting in the Custom Functions, first ensure that the crop/aspect ratio setting in the red ‘Shoot4’ is set to FULL. If it is set to anything else, you will be unable to add cropping information through the custom function menu.

    Default erase option
    You can specify which options will be your default when erasing images. This way, you don’t have to go through the default process when selecting images for erasing. 

     Release shutter w/o lens
    You’ll be able to engage the shutter without the Canon EOS RP detecting a lens. This is a handy option if you’re using third party manual lenses without electronic contacts. When using these lenses, the camera is unaware of the fact that a lens is connected, and the shutter would otherwise not work.

     Retract lens on power off
    If a powered zoom lens is attached to the EOS RP, setting this function to ON would cause the lens to retract when the camera is powered off.

    Add IPTC information
    If this function for adding IPTC (International Press Telecommunications Council) information is equipped with the camera, you can edit and register IPTC information. IPTC information registered on the camera can be added to shot images. IPTC information is comment information, such as captions, credits, and shooting location.

    C. Fn6: Clear

    C. Fn6: Clear

    Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)

    Clears all the user custom functions saved in the Custom functions Menu and resets them to the factory defaults. 


    Star icon (green)

    MY MENU1

    EOS RP My Menu

    My Menu allows you to build your own menus. You can add all your most used Menu functions to this page like Format for instance. Adding favourite functions to this menu means that you’ll be able to access them quicker than having to browse through the entire Menu system.

    Conclusion

    The EOS RP is a fantastic mirrorless camera, and as you might have noticed there are many features hidden inside the Menu system. Even when coming from another Canon full frame camera the Canon EOS RP is somewhat different because this is a mirrorless system with it’s own strengths and weaknesses.

    EOS RP flip screen

    An EVF like this might take some time to get used too for instance, but the addition of features like Eye AF should make your job as a photographer easier on the other. A great way to get to know the Canon EOS RP is to read this thorough menu run-through alongside your camera, set it up and do some testing of your own.

    If you have any questions, feel free to ask them in the comment section below. Happy shooting!

     

     

  • Sony A6400: settings, tips and tricks

    Sony A6400: settings, tips and tricks

    Introduction

    The Sony A6400 is an APS-C mirrorless camera, slotting in below the Alpha A6500 in the range, and replacing the Alpha A6300. The main highlights are the Real-time Eye AF and Tracking autofocus features, an updated image processor, and a 180-degree flipping touchscreen

    If you’re looking for an advanced guide for the Sony A6400 with tips and tricks to improve your understanding of this little wonder, you’ve come to the right place. I believe that the best way to learn all the features and functions is to have a good look at the menu system and gradually try to understand how everything works. This might take some time if you’ve never owned a Sony mirrorless, and even if you have, the menus have totally changed it this product. You can bookmark this page and simply refer back to it or continue reading whenever you feel like it.

    If you are looking for an A6000,  A6100A6300, A6500 or A6600 guide, you can find them by clicking on the camera name.

    So take your ILCE-A6400, press the Menu button and follow along.

    Sony A6400 camera Menu system walkthrough

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 1 (Quality settings and image size settings page 1)

    Menu, Red Camera Icon, page 1
    File Format:

    Do you edit your pictures on your desktop? If so, set to RAW or RAW+jpeg. A RAW file saves all information the Sony A6400 pixels register during shooting and will make for better quality images if you want to edit in something like Adobe Lightroom.

    RAW images recorded with this camera have a resolution of 14 bits per pixel. However, resolution is limited to 12 bits in the following shooting modes:

    • Long Exposure NR
    • Bulb
    • Cont. Shooting (including continuous shooting in Superior Auto)
    • Silent Shooting
    JPEG Quality

    A jpeg is a compressed image (available in FINE (larger) and STANDARD (smaller, less quality) which takes up less space on your SD card but is less suited for editing afterward. Jpeg images will also have in-camera noise reduction applied, something you might or might not want to take care of yourself later, depending on your style and preference.

    JPEG Image size:

    Large, medium or small is selectable (when you set Quality to jpeg). Set it to large for optimal quality, if SD card space is an issue, you can set it to Small.

    Knowing the pixel size can tell you how large you can print your images without quality degradation. There are techniques nowadays to print larger, but this information might be interesting to some.

    When Aspect Ratio is set to 3:2:

    • L: 24M
    • M: 12M
    • S: 6M

    When Aspect Ratio is set to 16:9:

    • L: 20M
    • M: 10M
    • S:5.1M

    When Aspect Ratio is set to 16:9:

    • L: 16M
    • M: 8M
    • S: 4M

    Sony A6400 manual, Ethiopia, omo valley, tribe

    Aspect ratio:

    You can choose 3:2 (which uses the full sensor surface), 16:9 (crop but a more broad view) or 1:1 for Instagram. Leave as is at 3:2, you can always crop your pictures later when you shoot RAW.

    Panorama Size:

    (when in panorama shooting mode) Size is selectable between standard and wide. Wide means your picture will cover a larger area. Set it to standard, having to scan an even broader area when making panoramas will take some experience with the Sony A6400 to do efficiently.

    Panorama direction

    A panorama picture (only available in jpeg) is a composite of several images stitched together. When in this mode, you’ll see an arrow that guides you in what direction and speed you should pan the Sony A6400 to take the sequential images that will be stitched together. You can choose the path in this menu (either, up, down, left or right).

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 2 (Quality settings and image size settings page 1)

    Menu, Red Camera Icon, page 2

    Long Exposure NR

    Set if you want the processing engine to apply noise reduction for images captured with a long exposure time. Leave it ON as there is no way of duplicating this process in post production, except to take a black frame of the same length in the same atmospheric conditions.

    High ISO NR

    Here you can select the amount of noise reduction applied to images with high ISO settings (when quality is set to jpeg). As Sony has rather aggressive noise reduction, I would change it to Low. (if not, you run the risk of getting paint-like, smeared images at higher ISO values).

    Color Space

    You can choose between Standard and Adobe (extended color range) RGB. This is only important if you shoot JPEG and not RAW. Adobe RGB would be preferable if you print many images because of the extended color range.

    Lens Comp

    The Sony A6400 allows you to select whether you would like to apply various lens compensations (shading, chromatic aberration, distortion) even when shooting in RAW. I leave this ON, but you might get a conflict with RAW files and using a lens profile in programs like Lightroom where you’ll see a reverse vignette for instance. 

    MENU –Red Camera Icon – page 3 (Shoot Mode and Drive settings page 1)

    Menu, Red Camera Icon, page3

    Auto Mode

    Switch the auto mode between Intelligent Auto and Superior Auto.

    Intelligent Auto:

    This mode automatically detects the type of scene you’re shooting and adjusts the scene automatically. You’ll see the icon for the recognized scene appears on the top right hand of the screen.

    These scenes are the same ones which can be selected individually in SCENE mode. The Sony A6400 will also use the most appropriate FOCUS AREA, and ISO value (the ISO range cannot be changed in iAuto though). Drive Mode (single shooting, continuous shooting Lo-Mid-Hi), Self-timer and Self-timer cont (multiple images with the self-timer) can be changed by using the Fn button. Works for both RAW and JPEG shooting. Disadvantage: ISO range is fixed to 50-6400 (you can’t change the range).

    Superior Auto:

    Superior Auto is similar to iAuto, as it also detects scenes automatically, except it uses more complex processing. This includes composite layering (layering different shots on top of each other for HDR style pictures) and automatically choosing what it thinks is the best image. You can either choose whether you want the Sony A6400 to save all images captured or just the composite image, by selecting S. Auto Img. Extract in the MENU system. Disadvantage: ISO range is (like in iAuto) fixed and only useable for jpeg shooting.

    Scene Selection

    Allows you to shoot with preset settings according to the scene. (like when setting the mode dial to SCN)

    Menu item details
    • Portrait: Blurs background and sharpens the subject. Accentuates the skin tones softly.
    • Sports Action: Shoots a moving subject at a fast shutter speed so that the subject looks as if it is standing still. The product shoots images continuously while the shutter button is pressed.
    • Macro: Shoots close-ups of the subjects, such as flowers, insects, food, or small items.
    • Landscape: Shoots the entire range of a scenery in sharp focus with vivid colors.
    • Sunset: Shoots the red of the sunset beautifully.
    • Night Scene: Shoots night scenes without losing the dark atmosphere.
    • Night Portrait: Shoots night scene portraits using the flash.
    • Anti Motion Blur: Allows you to shoot indoor shots without using the flash and reduces subject blur. The product shoots burst images and combines them to create the image, reducing subject blur and noise.
    Superior Auto Img Extract

    When in Superior Auto, the Sony A6400 takes multiple images and combines them into one (jpeg only). You can either save all images captured (OFF) or only the combined image (ON). Turn it OFF; I’ve tried this functionality, and the combined image feature does not work well.

    Drive Mode

    Do you want to take a single picture when you press the shutter button or multiple images? You can select this here, as well as self-timer functions and bracketing. Bracketing is taking a series of pictures, each with different settings, useful for combining your images with various exposures for HDR effects in software afterwards, to name just one example.

    You can also press the dedicated drive mode button to get to these settings.

    • Single Shooting: Normal shooting mode.
    • Cont. Shooting: Shoots images continuously while you press and hold down the shutter button.
    • Self-timer: Shoots an image using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since the shutter button was pressed.
    • Self-timer(Cont): Shoots a designated number of images using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since the shutter button was pressed.
    • Cont. Bracket: Shoots images while holding the shutter button down, each with different degrees of brightness.
    • Single Bracket: Shoots a specified number of images, one by one, each with a different degree of brightness.
    • WB bracket: Shoots a total of three images, each with different color tones according to the selected settings for white balance, color temperature, and color filter.
    • DRO Bracket: Shoots a total of three images, each at a different degree of D-Range Optimizer.
    Bracket Settings

    You can set the self-timer in bracket shooting mode, and the shooting order for exposure bracketing and white balance bracketing.

    • Selftimer during Brkt: Sets whether to use the self-timer during bracket shooting. Also sets the number of seconds until the shutter is released if using the self-timer. (OFF/2 Sec/5 Sec/10 Sec)
    • Bracket order: Sets the order of exposure bracketing and white balance bracketing.
    interval shoot Func.

    The Interval Shooting Function is a built in Intervalometer that can be setup up to take images at a regular intervals. Using Sony’s ‘Imaging Edge’ edit application these still images can be used to create a Time Lapse movie. On the second page of options you will see that there is an option for Silent Shooting which will save the wear and tear on your camera when shooting thousands of images. If you would prefer the camera to make a movie so that you don’t have to process the files you can use the new S&Q feature.

    Menu item details

    Interval Shooting: Sets whether to perform interval shooting. (On or Off)

    • Shooting Start Time: Sets the time from when you press the shutter button to when interval shooting starts. (1 second to 99 minutes 59 seconds)
    • Shooting Interval: Sets the shooting interval (time from when one exposure starts to when the exposure for the next shot starts). (1 second to 60 seconds)
    • Number of Shots: Sets the number of shots for interval shooting. (1 shot to 9999 shots)
    • AE Tracking Sensitivity: Sets the tracking sensitivity of the auto exposure against the change in luminance during interval shooting. If you select Low, exposure changes during interval shooting will be smoother. (High, Mid or Low)
    • Silent Shoot. in Interval: Sets whether or not to perform silent shooting during interval shooting. (On or Off)
    • Shoot Interval Priority: Sets whether or not to prioritise the shooting interval when the exposure mode is [Program Auto] or [Aperture Priority] and the shutter speed becomes longer than the time set for Shooting Interval.(On or Off)

    A little bit of background: The A6500 was the last A6000 series camera that used the ‘PlayMemories Apps’. These Apps could be purchased from Sony to add specialised functions to the camera. One of the most useful of these was the TimeLapse App. Sony have added this functionality to the A6400 via the new Interval Shooting Function.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 4 (Shoot Mode and Drive settings page 2)

    Menu, Red Camera Icon, page 4

    Recall (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)

    This functionality allows you to shoot an image after recalling often-used modes or camera settings registered with the Mode Dial memory positions in advance. It is now also possible to save your camera settings to a memory card and recall them later (or on a different camera). This is done by using the ‘select Rec. media’ function inside this menu.

    Memory (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)

    This setting allows you to register up to 3 often-used modes or product settings to the product and up to 4 (M1 through M4) to the memory card. You can recall the settings using just the mode dial. You can register various functions for shooting. The items that you can register are displayed on the menu of the Sony A6400. Aperture and Shutter speed are always available. You’ll need to select your SD card first using the ‘select Rec. media’ function inside the prior menu.

    Reg. custom shoot set

    You can register shooting settings (such as exposure, focus setting, drive mode, etc.) to a custom key in advance and temporarily recall them while holding down the key. Simply press the custom key to switch the settings quickly and release the key to go back to the original settings. This function is useful when recording active scenes such as sports.

    Setup process
    1. MENU –  Camera Settings 1 – Reg Cust Shoot Set – Select a registration number from Recall Custom hold 1 to Recall Custom hold 3.
    2. Using the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel, select the check boxes for the functions that you want to recall with one of the registration numbers and press the center to check each box.
    3. Select the function that you want to adjust using the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel, and press the center to adjust the function to the desired setting.
    4. Select Register.

    MENU –Red Camera Icon – page 5 (Autofocus settings page 1)

    Menu, Red Camera Icon, page 5

    Focus Mode:

    Here, you can select how the autofocus engine will behave when you half-press the shutter button. Novice users should set into AF-A. This functionality is partly dependent on what focus area you select (see next)

    • AF-S: With a half-press of the shutter button, the Sony A6400 will focus only once. Suitable for capturing stills.
    • AF-A: AF Automatic intelligently switches between S and C, depending on whether the camera detects movement or not. This is the standard setting and the easiest to use.
    • AF-C: The Sony A6400 will continuously focus on any movement when you half-press the shutter button.
    • DMF: The Sony A6400 focuses on your subject and allows you to fine-tune your focus area further using the manual focus ring on the lens.
    • MF: No autofocus is used, and you focus manually using the focus ring on the lens.

    You can see a focus indicator on screen or EVF. When it is lit, the subject is in Focus and focus is locked.

    Tip: if autofocus doesn’t seem to be working, check the lens barrel to see if the AF/MF slider is set to AF. It’s also possible to assign a button for what is called ‘Focus Hold’. With Focus Hold, you can freeze your focus point when you press this button. This is often used by photographers to allow for a greater flexibility in composition.

    Another important fact is that in Movie mode, only Continuous AF and MF are available.

    Priority Set in AF-S:

    Sets whether to release the shutter even if the subject is not in focus when Focus Mode is set to Single-shot AF, DMF or Automatic AF and the subject is still.

    Options are:

    • AF: Prioritizes focusing. The shutter will not be released until the subject is in focus.
    • Release: Prioritizes the shutter’s release. The shutter will be released even if the subject is out of focus.
    Priority Set in AF-C:

    Sets whether to release the shutter even if the subject is not in focus when the continuous AF is activated and the subject is in motion.

    Choose between:

    • AF: Prioritizes focusing. The shutter will not be released until the subject is in focus.
    • Release: Prioritizes the shutter’s release. The shutter will be released even if the subject is out of focus.
    • Balanced Emphasis: Shoots with a balanced emphasis on both focusing and shutter release.

    I have set my Priority Set in AF-C to release and usually get the quoted frame rates.

    Sony A6400 manual, Ethiopia, omo valley, tribe

    Focus area

    The Sony A6400 has a dual phase/contrast on-sensor autofocus system This makes it one of the fastest and most reliable AF systems in the world. You might think it is best to leave it on the wide factory setting (as this uses all AF points), but for certain scenes, it is often better to use a zone or flexible spot to get it to focus on what you want.

    • Wide: Wide focus area uses all focus points on the sensor. Ideal for action scenes where there is a lot of movement going on in your frame.
    • Zone: Select a zone on the monitor on which to focus, and the product will automatically select a focus area.
    • Center: Focusses on whatever is centered in your images. A fail-proof way of getting the Sony A6400 to focus on what you want. If you have any problems using the autofocus and are in a situation where you don’t want to miss any shots, revert to Center and just make sure you have your subject centered.
    • Flexible spot: Allows you to move the focusing frame to a desired point on the touch screen and focus on an extremely small subject in a narrow area. If you want to use this focus area, set it to medium or large, as the Sony A6400 will struggle to find focus when setting to small (except perhaps for close-up portraits where you’d want to focus on the iris of the eye)
    • Expand Flexible spot: If the camera can’t focus on a single selected point, it uses focus points around the flexible spot as a secondary priority area for focusing.
    • Tracking: When the shutter button is pressed and held halfway down, the product tracks the subject within the selected autofocus area. This setting is available only when the focus mode is set to Continuous AF. Point the cursor at Tracking on the Focus Area setting screen, and then select the desired area to start tracking using the left/right sides of the control wheel. You can also move the tracking start area to the desired point by designating the area as a zone, flexible spot or expand flexible spot. Accurate tracking can also make a difference when you lock onto a specific part of your subject.

    Tip: You can move the focus area in Flexible Spot, Expand Flexible Spot or Zone by touching the screen.

    Focus area limit

    It is now possible to limit the choice of focus areas you have to cycle through to find the one you are looking for. I typically use the Expand Flexible Spot in preference to the Small, Medium and Large Flexible Spots and the Center AF area. I have unselected these options. This is useful on the A6400 because it is possible to assign a custom button to cycle through the ones that remain.

    Switch V/H AF Area

    This is called Orientation linked AF points in Canon language. Switch AF point/AF Area to align with your subject in landscape mode (horizontal) if you change the camera orientation to Portrait (vertical) mode.

    • Off: disable this feature
    • AF Point Only: If you switch to portrait mode, the A9 will automatically move the AF point in use up to align with your subject.
    • AF Point AF Area: If you switch to portrait mode, the A9 will automatically move the AF point and AF area in use up.

    It may not be immediately obvious what functionality this menu items provides. The full unabbreviated name is Switch Vertical /Horizontal AF Area and it allows you to create one position for the AF point when the camera is held horizontally and a different AF position for the AF point if the camera is held vertically. This means that if you place the AF point in the top right-hand corner it won’t move to the top left or bottom right-hand corners when the camera is turned.

    MENU – Camera Settings – page 6 (Autofocus settings page 2)

    Menu, Red Camera Icon, page 6

    AF illuminator

    The AF illuminator is a little red light allowing the Sony A6400 to focus more easily when the shutter button is pressed halfway. It automatically is switched off when you fully press the shutter. Leave it on except if you are using an underwater housing.

    Face/Eye AF Set.

    This function is used to determine whether or not the camera will focus with priority on human faces or eyes.

    Eye AF Settings:
    • Face Priority in AFSets whether or not to detect faces inside the focusing area and focus on the eyes Eye AF when autofocus is activated. (On or Off)
    • Subject detection: either human or animal for animal eye AF
    • Right/Left Eye Select: Specifies the eye to be detected. If Right Eye or Left Eye is selected, only the selected eye is detected.  Auto : The camera detects eyes automatically. Right Eye : The right eye of the subject (the eye on the left side from the photographer’s perspective) is detected. Left Eye : The left eye of the subject (the eye on the right side from the photographer’s perspective) is detected.
    • Face Detect. Frame Disp.:Sets whether or not to display the face detection frame when Face Priority in AF is set to On. (On or Off)
    • Animal Eye Display: this will show a square around the eye of the animal , indicating focus.
    Eye AF by custom key

    The Eye AF function can also be used by assigning Eye AF to a custom key. The camera can focus on human eyes as long as you are pressing the key. This is useful when you want to temporarily apply the Eye AF function to the entire screen regardless of the setting for Focus Area.
    For instance, if Focus Area is set to Flexible Spot and you want the camera to focus on an eye outside of the focusing frame, you can apply the Eye AF function by pressing the custom key to which Eye AF has been assigned, without changing Focus Area.

    Switch Right/Left Eye by custom key

    When Right/Left Eye Select is set to Right Eye or Left Eye, you can switch the eye to be detected by pressing the custom key to which you have assigned the Switch Right/Left Eye function.

    When Right/Left Eye Select is set to Auto, you can temporarily switch the eye to be detected by pressing the custom key to which you have assigned the Switch Right/Left Eye function.

    The temporary left/right selection is cancelled when you perform the following operations, etc. The camera returns to automatic eye detection.

    AF with shutter

    Selects whether to focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down. Leave ON.

    Sony A6400 manual, Ethiopia, omo valley, tribe

    Pre-AF

    Pre-AF by default was normally set to OFF on previous models. This can be a useful feature when taking selfies but can cause issues in Continuous AF (AF-C) with an AF Tracking Area selected. The camera is likely to latch on to a subject before you have identified which subject you would like to track. I recommend switching this to OFF if you are more interesting in shooting action/sports rather than selfies.

    Eye-Start AF:

    This configuration starts AF once the EVF sensor has detected your eye near the viewfinder. I’ve never used it personally, but some people might find this setting interesting as it can prolong battery life.

    AF Area Registration:

    You can move the focusing frame to a preassigned position temporarily using a custom key. This function is useful when shooting scenes in which the subject’s movements are predictable; for example, sports scenes. With this function, you can switch the focus area quickly according to the situation.

    How to register focus area
    1. MENU –  Camera Settings1 – AF Area Registration – On.
    2. Set the focus area to the desired position and then hold down the Fn (Function) button.
    How to call up the registered focus area
    1. MENU – Camera Settings2 – Custom Key – desired key, then select Regist. AF Area hold.
    2. Set the camera to the shooting mode, hold down the key to which Regist. AF Area hold has been assigned and then press the shutter button to shoot images.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 7 (Autofocus settings page 3)

    Menu, Red Camera Icon, page 7

    Del. Regist. AF Area:

    Deletes the focusing frame position that was registered using AF Area Registration.

    AF Area Auto Clear:

    Sets whether the focus area should be displayed all the time or should disappear automatically shortly after focus is achieved.

    Disp. cont. AF Area:

    You can set whether or not to display the focus area that is in focus when Focus Area is set to Wide or Zone and Focus Mode is set to Continuous AF.

    Circ. of Focus Point:

    This is a new feature that, when set to ‘Circulate’, will allows the photographer to move a spot or zone AF point over the edge of the frame and have it reappear on the other side of the frame.

    Sets whether to allow the focusing frame to jump from one end to the other when you move the focusing frame with Focus Area set to Zone, Flexible Spot, or Expand Flexible Spot. This function is useful when you want to move the focusing frame from one end to the other quickly.

    • Does Not Circulate :The cursor does not move when you try to move the focusing frame past the end.
    • Circulate :The cursor jumps to the opposite end when you try to move the focusing frame past the end.
    AF Micro Adj.

    Allows you to adjust and register autofocused positions for each lens when using an A-mount lens with the Mount Adaptor LA-EA2 or LA-EA4. In general use, you do not need to adjust the autofocused position using this function. Use this function only when adjustments are needed for certain focus areas or focal lengths. Use this function only when adjustments are needed for certain focal lengths.

    MENU –Red Camera Icon – page 8 (Exposure settings page 1)

    Menu, Red Camera Icon, page 8

    Exposure Comp

    (Also available in the Quick Menu, accessed by pressing the FN button):

    If you find that your image is overexposed (for instance when you are shooting at large apertures for a shallow depth-of-field in bright daylight), you can tweak the exposure compensation here in a plus or minus 5 (exact EV dependent on next step) range.

    ISO setting

    You can select at which ISO value you’d like to capture your image or change the Auto ISO range.

    I have this range set between 100-3200 as this range is virtually noise free, and I don’t like the ISO performance above 3200. In a pinch, when you’re getting blurred images due to a too long shutter speed at low ISO,  you can experiment with higher ISO settings. It’s better to get a sharp but noisy image than a blurred one….

    You’ll also find the‘ISO Auto Minimum Shutter Speed’ setting here. This function enables the camera to give priority to faster shutter speeds with the disadvantage that you’ll go to higher ISO numbers more quickly. I add this menu item to my Fn menu for quick access. ISO can be modified from the right side of the Control Wheel.

    Metering Mode

    This feature appeared in the A6500 and allows the user to take a spot meter reading from the position of the Spot AF point. If you change the setting to Focus Point Link you will also need to set the metering Mode and the AF Area to Spot.

    Metering mode refers to the way the Sony A6400 reads the light and sets the exposure. In multi, it considers the whole frame and sets exposure according to internal algorithms programmed in camera. In spot or center, the Sony A6400 only considers what is in that spot or the center (per example, if your subject is completely black, the camera will try to compensate by overexposing the image).

    • Multi: Measures light on each area after dividing the total area into multiple areas and determines the proper exposure of the entire screen (Multi-pattern metering).
    • Center: Measures the average brightness of the entire screen, while emphasizing the central area of the screen (Center-weighted metering).
    • Spot: Measures only the central area (Spot metering). This mode is suitable for measuring light on a specified part of the entire screen. The size of the metering circle can be selected from Spot: Standard and Spot: Large. The position of the metering circle depends on the setting for [Spot Metering Point].
    • Entire Screen Avg.: Measures the average brightness of the entire screen. The exposure will be stable even if the composition or the position of the subject changes.
    • Highlight: Measures the brightness while emphasizing the highlighted area on the screen. This mode is suitable for shooting the subject while avoiding overexposure.

    Tip: When Spot is selected and Focus Area is set to either Flexible Spot or  Expand Flexible Spot while Spot Metering Point is set to Focus Point Link, the spot metering point can be coordinated with the focus area.

    Face Priority in Multi…

    Sets whether the camera measures brightness based on detected faces when Metering Mode is set to Multi.

    Spot Metering Point

    Sets whether to coordinate the spot metering position with the focus area when Focus Area is set to Flexible Spot or Expand Flexible Spot.

    Center: The spot metering position does not coordinate with the focus area, but always meters brightness at the center.

    Focus Point Link: The spot metering position coordinates with the focus area.

    Exposure step

    You can set the setting range for the shutter speed, aperture, and exposure compensation values either .3 or .5 EV steps.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 9 (Exposure settings page 2)

    Menu, Red Camera Icon, page 9

    AEL w shutter

    Sets whether to fix the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down. Select Off to adjust the focus and the exposure separately.

    • Auto (default setting): Fixes the exposure after adjusting the focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down when Focus Mode is set to Single-shot AF.
    • On: Fixes the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down.
    • Off: Does not adjust the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down. Use this mode when you want to change focus and exposure separately.

    The Sony A6400 keeps adjusting the exposure while shooting in Cont. Shooting or Spd Priority Cont. mode. Operation using the AEL button is prioritized over the AEL w/ shutter settings.

    Exposure Std. Adjust

    Adjusts this camera’s standard for the correct exposure value for each metering mode. You can set a value from -1 EV to +1 EV in 1/6 EV increments.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 10 (flash settings)

    Menu, Red Camera Icon, page 10

    Flash Mode:

    If you’re interested in flash photography, you’ll need to purchase a hot shoe flash. I would suggest a Godox, as these can both use HSS and TTL, and are quite cheap. (Also available in the Quick Menu accessed by pressing the FN button

    If you’d like to get more into flash photography, you should read up on the different possibilities and what their effect would be on your images. This is a basic explanation of what the different modes do:

    • fill flash: A fill flash is useful even in daylight to fill the shadows with light (like a person in the shade).
    • Slow sync: Tells the camera to use a longer shutter speed along with a flash, and thus is better for night shots. In manual and shutter priority modes, there is no difference in flash power. But when using aperture priority, program, or auto, choosing slow sync tells the Sony A6400 to use a longer shutter speed than it would ordinarily pick.What the slow sync flash mode does is a first fire the flash for the subject exposure, then allow for a longer shutter speed that will allow for more ambient light to be captured by the sensor.
    • Rear Sync: Capturing an image involves two shutter actions: one when the capture starts and on when it stops. Rear Sync tells the flash to fire right before the shutter closes. Moving objects will show a streak where they came from and a sharp image where they were at the end of the exposure. This conveys a sense of speed with moving objects. Rear Sync is a creative technique, if you’d like to know more about this type of photography, I’d suggest doing a Google search on ‘Rear Sync Flash Photography.’
    • Wireless: Select wireless is if want to use the in-camera flash to trigger an external flash like the Sony HVL-43M (with TTL!). Using an external flash is helpful when shooting weddings and dimly-lit subject matter, You can use your main flash to light the subject, and your external flash to light the background.
    Flash comp or Flash compensation:

    Especially when using Slow Sync or Rear Sync Flash modes, you might have to lower the power of the Flash to get a decently exposed image. (Also available in the Quick Menu accessed by pressing the FN button).

    Exp comp set:

    Selects if the Exposure compensation function (+-5 in 0.5EV or 0.3EV steps) also reduces flash power or not. Leave it to Ambient And Flash, unless if you want to use HSS sync with flashes, then it is handy to be able to control exposure and flash output separately.

    Sony A6400 manual, Ethiopia, omo valley, tribe

    Wireless Flash:

    There are two methods for wireless flash shooting:

    1. light-signal flash shooting that uses the light of the flash attached to the camera as a signal light,
    2. radio-signal flash shooting that uses wireless communication. To perform radio-signal flash shooting, use a compatible flash or the Wireless Radio Commander (sold separately). For details on how to set each method, refer to the instruction manual of the flash or the Wireless Radio Commander.
    Red Eye Reduction:

    This anti-Red Eye setting quickly fires the flash before your image capture starts, reducing the red-eye effect often seen when using a flash.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 11 (Color, White Balance, and Image processing settings page 1)

    Menu, Red Camera Icon, page 11

    White Balance

    You can either set the white balance to Auto, where the camera tries to guess what the neutral grey value is, or use one of the preset white balance settings for different lighting conditions or customize the white balance according to your preference or using a grey card.

    Priority Set in AWB

    Selects which tone to prioritize when shooting under lighting conditions such as incandescent light when White Balance is set to Auto.

    Standard: Shoots with standard auto white balance. The camera automatically adjusts the color tones.

    Ambience: Prioritizes the color tone of the light source. This is suitable when you want to produce a warm atmosphere.

    White: Prioritizes a reproduction of white color when the color temperature of the light source is low.

    DRO/Auto HDR
    DRO:

    This stands for Dynamic range optimise and analyses the contrast of your scene in real-time. It produces an image with optimal brightness and recovered shadow detail. You can use this function even while the subject is moving or during the continuous shooting.

    Auto HDR:

    (not available for RAW captures) this feature Shoots three images with different exposures and then overlays the bright area of the underexposed image and the dark area of the overexposed image to create a picture with an extended range from highlight to shadow.

    The highlight detail in auto HDR is better than that in DRO and with reduced noise. The shutter is released three times, so using this function for moving subjects is not recommended.

    Creative Style

    The Sony creative styles can best be explained as being film emulations (the same way as do some other camera manufacturers implements this). There is a range of styles available from vivid colour to black and white. If you’re shooting RAW, these styles are embedded, but can always be zeroed after importing them to you RAW editor of choice. Jpegs are saved with this styling applied. It is always useful to try some of these, and can be a real boost for your creativity, as you will notice that you make different images in say black-and-white as opposed to colour.

    • Standard: For shooting various scenes with rich gradation and beautiful colors.
    • Vivid: The saturation and contrast are heightened for shooting striking images of colorful scenes and subjects such as flowers, spring greenery, blue sky, or ocean views.
    • Neutral: The saturation and sharpness are lowered for shooting images in subdued tones. This is also suitable for capturing image material to be modified with a computer.
    • Clear: For shooting images in clear tones with limpid colors in highlight, suitable for capturing radiant light.
    • Deep: For shooting images with deep and dense colors, suitable for capturing the solid presence of the subject.
    • Light: For shooting images with bright and simple colors, suitable for capturing a refreshingly light ambience.
    • Portrait: For capturing skin in a soft tone, ideally suited for shooting portraits.
    • Landscape: The saturation, contrast, and sharpness are heightened for shooting vivid and crisp scenery. Distant landscapes also stand out more. Sunset: For shooting the beautiful red of the setting sun.
    • Night Scene: The contrast is lowered for reproducing night scenes.
    • Autumn leaves: For shooting autumn scenes, vividly highlighting the reds and yellows of changing leaves.
    • Black & White: For shooting images in black and white monotone.
    • Sepia: For shooting images in sepia monotone.
    • You can edit these different styles and save your own creative style if you want.
    • This functionality can be changed:
    • Contrast: The higher the value selected, the more the difference of light and shadow is accentuated, and the bigger the effect on the image.
    • Saturation: The higher the value selected, the more vivid the color. When a lower value is selected, the color of the image is restrained and subdued.
    • Sharpness: Adjusts the sharpness. The higher the value selected, the more the contours are accentuated, and the lower the value selected, the more the contours are softened.
    Picture Effect

    Think of this menu as an Instagram app right in your Sony A6400, with all kinds of retro filters and effects. These are only available when quality is set to Jpeg (Not in RAW).

    • Off: Disables the Picture Effect function.
    • Toy Camera: Creates a soft image with shaded corners and reduced sharpness.
    • Pop Color: Creates a vivid look by emphasizing color tones.
    • Posterization: Creates a high contrast, abstract look by heavily emphasizing primary colors, or in black and white.
    • Retro Photo: Creates the look of an aged photo with sepia color tones and faded contrast.
    • Soft High-key: Creates an image with the indicated atmosphere: bright, transparent, ethereal, tender, soft.
    • Partial Color: Creates an image which retains a specific color, but converts others to black and white.
    • High Contrast Mono.: Creates a high-contrast image in black and white.
    • Rich-tone Mono.: Creates an image in black and white with rich gradation and reproduction of details.
    Picture Profile

    Allows you to change the settings for the color, gradation, etc.

    The basic contrast and coloring are defined by the combination of Gamma (gamma curve) and Color Mode (color characteristics) settings.

    Gamma:
    • Movie: Standard gamma curve for video.
    • Still: Standard gamma curve for still images.
    • Cine1: Softens the contrast in darker image areas and emphasizes gradation changes in lighter image areas, producing a subdued tone overall (equivalent to HG4609G33) Gamma curve that obtains a dynamic range of 460% when the exposure is adjusted to 33% video output with 18% reflectance gray. The maximum value of video output is 109%. Images shot with this gamma can be used without grading, but since the images have smooth gradation characteristics, this can be used to grade and finalize the viewed image in the post-production process.
    • Cine2: Similar results to [Cine1] but optimized for editing with up to 100% video signal (equivalent to HG4600G30)
      Gamma curve that obtains a dynamic range of 460% when the exposure is adjusted to 30% video output with 18% reflectance gray. The maximum value of video output is 100%.
    • Cine3: Stronger contrast between dark and light image areas and greater emphasis on black gradation changes (compared to [Cine1] and [Cine2])
    • Cine4: Stronger contrast than [Cine3] in darker image areas.
    • ITU709 ITU709 gamma curve (low-light gain of 4.5).
    • ITU709: (800%) Gamma curve for checking scenes recorded using [S-Log2] or [S-Log3].
    • S-Log2 [S-Log2] gamma curve. This setting is selected when some grading work will be performed after recording. The exposure is set so that 18% reflectance gray video is output as 32%. Under these conditions, a dynamic range of 1,300% is obtained with 90% reflectance white. The maximum value of video output is 106%.
    • S-Log3: [S-Log3] gamma curve with characteristics closer to those of film. This setting is selected when some grading work will be performed after recording. It allows for better reproduction of gradations in shadows and the mid-tone range than S-Log2. The exposure is set so that 18% reflectance gray video is output as 41%. Under these conditions, a dynamic range of 1,300% is obtained with 90% reflectance white. As a characteristic of S-Log3, the dynamic range can be extended above 1,300%. However, Picture Profile is set to a dynamic range of 1,300% in order to maintain a balance with camera performance. Under these conditions, the maximum value of video output is 94%.
    Color Mode:
    • Movie Color tones for [Movie] gamma curve (standard color reproduction for movies when Picture Profile is not used)
    • Still Color tones for [Still] gamma curve (standard color reproduction for still images when Picture Profile is not used)
    • Cinema Color tones for [Cine1] and [Cine2] gamma curve
    • Pro Color tones similar to standard Sony broadcast camera image quality (used in combination with [ITU709] gamma curve)
    • ITU709 Matrix ITU709 color tones (used in combination with [ITU709] gamma curve)
    • Black & White Sets the saturation to 0 for recording in black and white
      S-Gamut Setting based on the assumption that some grading work will be performed after recording. Used when [Gamma] is set to [S-Log2].
    • S-Gamut3.Cine Setting based on the assumption that some grading work will be performed after recording. Used when [Gamma] is set to [S-Log3].
    • This setting is easier to use than [S-Gamut3], because it limits the color space to a more practical range than that of [S-Gamut3]. It is recommended in cases where [S-Gamut3], a wide color space, is not required.
    • S-Gammut3 Setting based on the assumption that some grading work will be performed after recording. Used when [Gamma] is set to [S-Log3].
      This setting has a wider color space than that of [S-Gamut3.Cine]. It is suited for converting images to a format with a wide color space like BT.2020.
      Depending on the type of camera, the entire [S-Gamut3] color space may not be supported.
    Black Level:

    This function adjusts the black level of the image -15 to +15.  As an image effect, you can emphasize the color black to create an image that gives a powerful impression, or you can weaken black to give the image a soft impression.

    Shifting Black Level in the minus direction emphasizes the black color in the image, while changing the level in the plus direction weakens the black color.

    If you want to simulate an old film, or capture winter morning fog, the black level value should be increased. If you decrease the value, gradations in dark areas will be smoothed out, making the areas appear in crisp black. When using multiple fixed cameras to shoot the same subject from different angles, the balance between subject and background often varies. This balance variation may cause the black color in the subject to appear different when cameras are switched. However, this is an optical illusion. If it occurs, you can correct it by adjusting Black Level to make the black color look the same.

    When using multiple fixed cameras to shoot the same subject from different angles, the balance between subject and background often varies.

    This balance variation may cause the black color in the subject to appear different when cameras are switched. However, this is an optical illusion. If it occurs, you can correct it by adjusting Black Level to make the black color look the same.

    Black Gamma:

    This function lets you alter the shape of the selected gamma curve and adjust gradations in dark image areas. Range available between Wide, Middle or Narrow. Leven between -7 and +7.

    [Range] controls the luminance range that Black Gamma influences. The [Narrow] setting keeps the range close to black, while the [Wide] setting extends the range to gray. [Range] should be set narrower when you want to control the quality of dark areas. If you want to adjust the overall image tone, [Range] should be set wider. At first, it may be a good idea to start from the [Narrow] setting.

    Increasing the [Level] value brightens the image, whereas decreasing the value makes the image darker. For example, if you set [Range] to [Narrow] and decrease the [Level] value, you can create an image with dark areas that are similar to the ones seen in films. Unlike Black Level, Black Gamma Level adjusts luminance subtly.

    Knee:

    This function sets the knee point and slope for video signal compression to prevent over-exposure by limiting signals in high-intensity areas of the subject to the dynamic range of your Sony A6400.

    First, select whether to set the knee point and slope automatically or manually in [Mode], and then adjust each setting.

    Knee > Mode: Auto / Manual

    Knee > Auto Set > Max Point: 90% to 100%

    Knee > Auto Set > Sensitivity: High / Mid / Low

    Knee > Manual Set > Point: 75% to 105%

    Knee > Manual Set > Slope: –5 to +5

    Mode:

    Auto:

    Automatically adjusts the knee based on what is selected in the following settings (when [Movie] or [ITU709] is selected in [Gamma]).[Max Point] determines the maximum knee point level (white level). The knee slope is automatically adjusted according to the Max Point setting. The standard is to keep it at 100%. A lower setting will turn white grayish, while a higher setting will discard gradations in high luminance areas.[Sensitivity] changes the luminance level at which the knee’s automatic adjustment starts. When set to [High], the knee’s automatic adjustment starts at lower input signal levels than normal. When set to [Low], the knee’s automatic adjustment starts at higher input signal levels than normal.When a parameter other than [Movie] or [ITU709] is selected in [Gamma], the gamma curve will not exceed the White clip point and over-exposure rarely occurs. When [Mode] is set to [Auto] with these settings, the Knee function is disabled. If you want to enable the Knee function, set [Mode] to [Manual].

    Manual:

    Sticks to settings based on the following selections.[Point] sets the position of the knee point output level.[Slope] determines the inclination of the knee slope.
    A negative slope setting results in a gentler knee slope angle. This expands the dynamic range, but reduces the ability to produce rich gradations. A positive slope setting makes the knee slope inclination steeper. This shrinks the dynamic range, but bolsters the ability to express gradations. When [Slope] is set to +5, the Knee function is disabled.Set [Point] and [Slope] in [Manual Set] in combination. If you select a higher setting for [Point] and a gentler setting for [Slope], you can obtain video-like sharp highlight effects. If softer film-like highlight effects are desired, select a lower setting for [Point] and a steeper setting for [Slope]. In practical terms, move [Point] and [Slope] up and down in opposite directions while checking the gradations in high luminance areas until you find the ideal settings.

    Saturation

    A positive value results in more vivid colors, while a negative value presents faded colors. Saturation must be adjusted in tandem with contrast. Bright and vivid settings produce video-like images, while dark and vivid settings result in film-like images. The combination of bright and light creates pastel tones, whereas dark and light settings create artistic finishes.

    Color Phase

    As you rotate the color wheel to the left (decreasing the set value) or to the right (increasing the set value), the colors shift along the spectrum from red to yellow, green, cyan, blue, magenta and red. Because this affects all colors, it is difficult to make specific adjustments exactly as intended. Use this function when matching coloring closely between different cameras.

    Color Depth

    This function adjusts the luminance for each color phase. The luminance changes more drastically when the selected color is richer (higher saturation). It does not change much at all when the color is achromatic.

    A higher set value lowers luminance while deepening the color. A lower set value increases luminance, making the color look paler.
    This setting does not only enhance the apparent vividness of colors, but also can express deep, dark colors.
    Because each of the 6 colors — R (Red), G (Green), B (Blue), C (Cyan), M (Magenta), Y (Yellow) — can be adjusted individually, you can apply this function to just the colors you want to emphasize.

    Emphasizing image edges (Detail)

    This function adjusts how much detail is applied to the subject’s image edges.

    Because settings other than [Level] are quite complex, we recommend you start by adjusting only the [Level] setting first.

    Level

    This function determines the strength of detail image processing to be applied.

    If you apply too much detail, the subject’s original atmosphere may be undermined, as its translucence may be lost or it may be given an unnatural luster. Excessive detail when shooting shiny leaves, for instance, may result in the leaves looking as if they are made of plastic. It is also advisable to apply detail only modestly when shooting paintings.

    Because Detail makes image edges wider, the original texture of a subject consisting of very fine lines may be lost if too much detail processing is applied. (Example: thin lace curtains)

    Also, be aware that Detail may fatten up the edges of noise particles that appear under a high gain setting, and may make such particles highly noticeable. In such cases, you can adjust the amount of detail processing on the noise particles by using the [Crispening] function.

    The image edges become more visible when viewed on large screens. It may be advisable to ease off on Detail if you plan to view the image on large TVs or screens.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 12 (Color, White Balance and Image processing settings page 2)

    Menu, Red Camera Icon, page 12

    Soft Skin Effect

    If you’re using this camera mainly for pics of friends and family, this is an excellent feature, as it will soften and smooth skin tones make you and your beloved ones look their best. (only available when quality is set to Jpeg)

    Shutter AWB Lock

    You can set whether or not to lock the white balance while the shutter button is pressed when White Balance is set to Auto or Underwater Auto. This function prevents unintentional changes to the white balance during continuous shooting or when shooting with the shutter button pressed halfway down.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 13 (Focus assist settings)

    Menu, Red Camera Icon, page 13

    Focus Magnifier

    When focussing manually or in DMF mode, you can set the Sony A6400 to magnify a part of the screen so you can check focus. This sub-menu allows you to select the part of the image that will be magnified during shooting.

    Focus Magnif Time

    You can set how long to hold the magnified area during MF assist. 2 sec, 5 seconds or no limit. 2 seconds is how I have it set up.

    AF in Focus Mag.

    You can focus on the subject more accurately using auto-focus by magnifying the area where you want to focus. While the magnified image is displayed, you can focus on a smaller area than the flexible spot.

    Magnify the image by pressing the center of the control wheel, and then adjust the position using top/bottom/right/left of the control wheel.

    Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.

    Press the shutter button all the way down to shoot.

    Sony A6400 manual, Ethiopia, omo valley, tribe

    MF assist

    This works in conjunction with the Focus Magnifier found on this page too You might remember that you can select the area to magnify there when using manual focus (MF). MF assist will need to be turned on if you want to use this feature.

    Peaking Setting
    Peaking Level

    Peaking Level is a manual focusing aid which works when you have your Sony A6400 set to MF or DMF.

    Peaking Color

    You can choose the color of this Peaking between Red, white and yellow. I have it set to red, as this contrasts nicely with most scenes you capture.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 14 (Face Detection and shoot assist settings)

    Menu, Red Camera Icon, page 14

    Face Registration

    If you register faces in advance, the product can detect the registered face as a priority when [Face Detection] is set to [On (Regist. Faces)]. Shoot the face from the front in a brightly lit place. The face may not be registered correctly if it is obscured by a hat, a mask, sunglasses, etc.

    1. MENU – Camera Settings 1 – Face Registration – New Registration
    2. Align the guide frame with the face to be registered, and press the shutter button.
    3. When a confirmation message appears, select Enter.
    Regist. Faces Priority

    Sets whether to focus with higher priority on faces registered using Face Registration when Face Priority in AF]is set to On.

    Smile Shutter

    Great for selfies as  the camera automatically shoots an image when it detects a smiling face. Up to 8 faces of your subjects can be detected.

    Auto Object Framing

    When enabled, the Sony 6400 will automatically crop your captured image to what it deems best. Meaning it will cut the picture for a nicer composition. Only available for Jpegs, though, a nice feature if you don’t want to bother too much with the technical side of photography.

    Self-portrait/ -timer

    As you probably know, you can change the angle of the monitor and shoot images while watching the monitor.

    Simple turn this setting on, flip the screen and press the shutter button. The camera will start shooting after three seconds.

    MENU – Purple Camera Icon – page 1 (Movie settings page 1)

    Menu, Purple Camera Icon, page 1

    Exposure Mode

    You can select the exposure mode for movie shooting here.

    • Program Auto / Program Auto: Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).
    • Aperture Priority / Aperture Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.
    • Shutter Priority / Shutter Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.
    • Manual Exposure / Manual Exposure: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) manually.
    S&Q Exposure Mode

    You can select the exposure mode for slow-motion/quick-motion shooting. You can change the setting and playback speed for slow-motion/quick-motion shooting with S&Q Settings later.

    • Program Auto / Program Auto: Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).
    • Aperture Priority / Aperture Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.
    • Shutter Priority / Shutter Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.
    • Manual Exposure / Manual Exposure: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) manually.
    File Format (video)

    You can choose between XAVC S 4K, XAVC S H or AVCHD. You’ll need a fast UHS Speed Class U3 SD card to record at 100 Mbps or more.

    • XAVC S 4K: Records 4K movies in the XAVC S format. This format supports a high bit rate. Audio: LPCM
    • XAVC S HD: Records HD movies in the XAVC S format. This format supports a high bit rate. Audio: LPCM. The file size of movies is limited to approx. 2 GB. If the movie file size reaches approx. 2 GB during recording, a new movie file will be created automatically.
    • AVCHD: Records HD movies in the AVCHD format. This file format is suitable for high-definition TV. Audio: Dolby Digital
    Record Setting  (video):

    You can choose the quality of recorded video here. Select the image size, frame rate, and image quality for movie recording. The higher the bit-rate, the higher the picture quality. Frame- and bit-rate differ depending on your movie file format.

    When File Format is set to XAVC S 4K you have these options:

    • 30p or 25p 100M: (Records movies in 3840×2160).
    • 30p or 25p 60M: (Records movies in 3840×2160).
    • 24p 100M: Records movies in 3840×2160 (24p).
    • 24p 60M: Records movies in 3840×2160 (24p).

    When File Format is set to XAVC S HD you have these options:

    • 60p 50M/50p 50M: Records movies in 1920×1080 (60p/50p).
    • 60p 25M/50p 25M: Records movies in 1920×1080 (60p/50p).
    • 30p 50M/25p 50M: Records movies in 1920×1080 (30p/25p).
    • 30p 16M25p 16M: Records movies in 1920×1080 (30p/25p).
    • 24p 50M: Records movies in 1920×1080 (24p).
    • 120p 100M/100p 100M: Records high-speed movies in 1920×1080.
    • 120p 60M/100p 60M: Records high-speed movies in 1920×1080.

    When File Format is set to AVCHD you have these options:

    • 60i 24M(FX)/50i 24M(FX): Records movies in 1920×1080.
    • 60i 17M(FH)/50i 17M(FH): Records movies in 1920×1080.
    S&Q settings

    You can do slow-motion recording or record quick-motion recording. The sound will not be recorded. In a slow-motion recording, the shutter speed becomes faster and you may not be able to obtain the proper exposure. If this happens, decrease the aperture value or adjust the ISO sensitivity to a higher value.

    How to record slow motion movie on the Sony A6400:

    1. Set the mode dial to (Movie/S&Q Motion).
    2. Select MENU- (Camera Settings2)-[Movie/S&Q Motion]- and select the desired setting of slow-motion/quick-motion (S&Q) ( Program Auto, Aperture Priority, Shutter Priority, or Manual Exposure).
    3. Select MENU- (Camera Settings2)-[ S&Q Settings] and select the desired settings for [ Record Setting] and [ Frame Rate].
    4. Press the MOVIE (movie) button to start recording. Press the MOVIE button again to stop recording.

    Record Setting: Selects the frame rate of the movie.

    Frame Rate: Selects the shooting frame rate.

    Playback speed: The playback speed will vary as below depending on the assigned Record Setting and  the Frame Rate.

    Proxy Recording
    This function allows you to simultaneously record a low bitrate proxy file at the same time as recording the high bitrate original file movie.

    MENU –Purple Camera Icon– page 2 (Movie settings page 2)

    Menu, Purple Camera Icon, page 2

    AF Drive Speed (movie)

    You can switch focusing speed when using autofocus in movie mode.

    • Fast: Sets the AF drive speed to fast. This mode is suitable for shooting active scenes, such as sports.
    • Normal: Sets the AF drive speed to normal.
    • Slow: Sets the AF drive speed to slow. With this mode, the focus switches smoothly when the subject to be focused is changed.
    AF Track Sens (movie)

    You can set the AF sensitivity separately in movie mode.

    • Responsive: Sets the AF sensitivity to high. This mode is useful when recording movies in which the subject is moving quickly.
    • Standard: Sets the AF sensitivity to normal.
    • Locked on: Sets the AF sensitivity to low. You can shoot with a stable focus by ignoring the influence of anything in front of the subject.
    Auto Slow Shut. (movie)

    Sets whether or not to adjust the shutter speed automatically when recording dark scenes.

    • On: Uses Auto Slow Shutter. The shutter speed automatically slows when recording in dark locations. You can reduce noise in the movie by using a slow shutter speed when recording in dark locations.
    • Off: Does not use Auto Slow Shut. The recorded movie will be darker than when On is selected, but you can record movies with smoother motion and less object blur.
    Sony A6400 manual, Ethiopia, omo valley, tribe
    Initial Focus Mag. (movie)

    Sets the initial magnification scale for  the Focus Magnifier functionality in the movie shooting mode. You can choose between 1 or 4 times magnification to check focus.

    Audio Recording

    You can switch off audio recording in movie mode. When you record audio movies with loud volumes, set Audio Rec Level to a lower sound level. Doing so enables you to record more realistic audio. When you record audio movies with lower volumes, set Audio Rec Level to a higher sound level to make the sound easier to hear. Regardless of the Audio Rec Level settings, the limiter always operates.

    Audio Rec Level

    You can adjust the audio recording level while checking the level meter.

    MENU -Purple Camera Icon- page 3 (Movie settings page 3)

    Menu, Purple Camera Icon, page 2

    Audio Level Display

    Sets whether to display the audio level on the screen.

    Don’t see the audio level display?

    • Check if Audio Recording]is set to Off.
    • Check if DISP (Display Setting) is set to No Disp. Info.

    During slow-motion/quick-motion shooting, audio is automatically turned OFF.

    Wind Noise Reduction

    This helps reduce noise from the wind during video recording.

    Marker Display (movie)

    Select if you want guidelines (a grid) in movie modeThe markers are displayed on the monitor or viewfinder

    Marker Settings (movie)

    Sets the markers to be displayed while shooting movies. You can display several markers at the same time.

    • Center: Sets whether or not to display the center marker in the center of the shooting screen. (Off or On)
    • Aspect: Sets the aspect marker display. (Off, 4:3, 13:9, 14:9, 15:9, 1.66:1, 1.85:1, 2.35:1)
    • Safety Zone: Sets the safety zone display. This becomes the standard range that can be received by a general household TV. (Off, 80%, 90%)
    • Guideframe: Sets whether or not to display the guide frame. You can verify whether the subject is level or perpendicular to the ground.
    Movie w/ shutter

    You can start or stop recording movies by pressing the shutter button, which is bigger and easier to press than the Movie button.

    MENU – Purple Camera Icon- page 4 (Shutter and Steadyshot settings)

    Menu, Purple Camera Icon, page 4

    Silent Shooting

    You can shoot images without the shutter sound, i.e. only using the electronic shutter.

    e-Front Curtain Shut.

    This shortens the time lag between shutter releases. When you shoot at high shutter speeds with a large diameter lens attached, the ghosting of a blurred area may occur, depending on the subject or shooting conditions. When a lens made by another manufacturer (including a Minolta/Konica-Minolta lens) is used, set this function to Off. If you set this function to On, the correct exposure will not be set or the image brightness will be uneven.

    Release without lens

    Makes it possible to capture images even if a lens is not supported by the Sony A6400. (Like when using an adapter with vintage lenses)

    Release without card

    If set to Off, you won’t be able to engage the shutter when there is no SD card in the slot. This is a useful failsafe to prevent you from shooting images without the ability to save them.

    SteadyShot

    Sets whether or not to use the SteadyShot (digital stabilisation in this case) function.For optimal sharpness, turn it off when using a tripod.

    MENU – Purple Camera Icon- page 5 (zoom settings)

    Menu, Purple Camera Icon, page 5

    Zoom

    Turn the digital zoom functionality on or off.

    Zoom setting

    Set to Optical zoom only (using the optical zoom capabilities of your lens.Two other settings are available which use digital zoom (cropping of the original image).

    Digital zoom:

    Pictures captured by the image sensor of the Sony A6400 are enlarged using digital signal processing. As the magnification level increases, signals to be also estimated growth and can reduce the picture quality.

    Clear Image Zoom:

    Zoomed images are captured close to the original quality when shooting a still picture. The camera first zooms to the maximum optical magnification, then uses Clear Image Zoom technology to enlarge the image an additional 2x, producing clear, sharp images despite the increased zoom ratio. If you don’t have a zoom lens, this might be an option as the Sony A6400 uses the RAW file to zoom; although still some image quality will be lost.

    Zoom ring rotate

    Assigns zoom in (T) or zoom out (W) functions to the zoom ring rotation direction. Available only with power zoom lenses that support this function.

    MENU – Purple Camera Icon- page 6 (Display and Auto Review settings page 1)

    Menu, Purple Camera Icon, page 6

    Disp button

    Selects the functionality (what is shown) on the screen when you press the DISP button (on the control wheel). You can choose Graphic Display, all info, no disp info, and histogram.

    Finder/Monitor

    You can set the behavior of the EVF and screen here. Do you want your screen on all the time, switch between screen and EVF once your eye has been detected near the viewfinder?  Or turn the screen off and only use the EVF? It can all be selected here.

    Finder Frame Rate

    Display the subject’s movements more smoothly by adjusting the frame rate of the viewfinder during still image shooting. This function is convenient when shooting a fast-moving subject.

    • 120fps/100fps: Displays the movements of the subject more smoothly on the viewfinder.
    • 60fps/50fps: Displays the subject at a normal frame rate on the viewfinder.
    Zebra setting

    The zebra function shows a zebra pattern on the screen while shooting in any area that is in danger of highlight clipping.

    You can switch this OFF or anywhere in a range between 70 and 100.

    The Zebra Pattern is a highlight warning indicator that is common in video cameras. It does not control exposure but just warns you that your highlights are blown out. It is not recorded into the resulting image.

    I have it set halfway at around 75, and it is a very useful indication of correct exposure of the entire scene.

    Grid Line

    Sets whether the grid line is displayed or not. The grid line will help you to adjust the composition of images.

    • Rule of 3rds Grid: Place main subjects close to one of the grid lines that divide the image into thirds for a well-balanced composition.
    • Square Grid: Square grids make it easier to confirm the horizontal level of your composition. This is suitable to determine the quality of the composition when shooting landscape, close-up, or duplicated images.
    • Diag. Square Grid: Place a subject on the diagonal line to express an uplifting and powerful feeling.
    • Off: Does not display the grid line.
    Exposure set guide

    The exposure set guide is an on-screen scroller that tells you the relation between your chosen aperture and the appropriate shutter speed for the scene you are shooting. I find this quite handy, but you can turn it off if you don’t.

    MENU – Purple Camera Icon- page 7 (Display and Auto Review settings page 2)

    Menu, Purple Camera Icon, page 7

    Live view Display

    Live view display allows you to see the image you’re going to capture with the settings you have dialed-in like aperture and shutter speed. Some users report easier autofocusing in low light when it’s turned OFF, and you’d need to turn it off when using external flashes too that can’t be used with Sony’s TTL (through the lens) functionality.

    Auto Review

    You can check your captured image on the screen directly after shooting.  You can select how long the image will stay on the screen (10, 5 or 2 seconds). I find this very annoying, so I turned it off. If you want to review your image, you can simply press play to do so.

    MENU – Purple Camera Icon- page 8 (Custom operation settings page 1)

    Menu, Purple Camera Icon, page 8

    Custom Key(Shoot.)/Custom Key(PB)

    You can assign the desired function to the desired key. Some functions are available only when they are assigned to a custom key.

    The keys that can be assigned functions are different for Custom Key Shoot.]and Custom Key PB.

    You can assign the desired functions to the following keys. You can also assign a shooting function to the focus hold button on the lens. However, some lenses do not have a focus hold button.2 1.

    • Custom Button 1
    • Custom Button2
    • AF/MF Button/AEL Button
    • Fn/ Button
    • Control Wheel (Center Button/Down Button/Left Button/Right Button)
    • Custom Button 3

    In the Custom Key menu I have assigned the AEL button to cycle between the 6 remaining AF area. I typically start wide and only come down in size if I am trying to avoid picking up subjects that are nearer to the camera than my primary subject. Some will start with an Expand Flexible Spot but you have to be quick at moving the Spot onto a moving target to start the tracking in order to be successful.

    Prior to the new AF Tracking I would normally recommend people to use a Wide or Zone AF area and only use Lock-on AF Areas when obstacles might appear in front of the subject. Now I will be recommending ‘Tracking’ as the default AF Area for shooting action/sports.

    Function Menu Set.

    You can assign the functions to be called up when you press the Fn (Function) button.

    My Dial Settings

    You can switch the functions of the front/rear dial between shutter speed and aperture.

    Dial/Wheel Setup

    You can switch the functions of the control dial and the control wheel.

    MENU – Purple Camera Icon- page 9 (Custom operation settings page 2)

    Menu, Purple Camera Icon, page 9

    Av/Tv Rotate

    Sets the direction of rotation for the front dial, rear dial, or control wheel when changing the aperture value or shutter speed. Normal or reverse.

    Dial/Wheel Ev Comp

    You can compensate the exposure using the front or rear dial. You can adjust the exposure in a range of -5.0 EV to 5.0 EV.

    Func. of Touch Oper.

    Select the functionality of the touch screen. There are two choices:

    1. Touch Shutter: When you shoot using the monitor, the camera automatically focuses on the point you touch and shoots a still image.
    2. Touch Focus: You can select a subject on which to focus using touch operations in the still image and movie recording modes.
    MOVIE Button

    Sets whether or not to activate the Movie button.

    Always: Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIE button in any mode.

    Movie Mode Only: Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIE button only if the shooting mode is set to “Movie/S&Q Motion” mode.

    Dial/Wheel Lock

    You can set whether the dials and wheels will be locked by pressing and holding the Fn (Function) button. You can release the lock by holding the Fn (Function) button down again.

    • Lock: Locks the front and rear dials when you press and hold the Fn button.
    • Unlock: The front or rear dials are not locked, even if you press and hold the Fn (Function) button.
    Audio Signals

    Selects whether the product produces a sound or not, for example when the focus is achieved by pressing the shutter button halfway down.

    MENU – Network Settings – page 1 (Wireless settings page 1)

    Menu, Network settings, page 1

    Send To Smartphone

    You can send one or several images directly to your wireless device (phone or tablet) by pressing this button.

    You can either decide to choose which images you want to transfer on the Sony A6400 or the wireless device (via the Sony PlayMemories app, available for free in the apple or android store).

    You’ll have to connect the-the camera via Wifi first (it makes a Wifi access point), using the instruction on the A6400 screen.

    It works just like connecting to any other access point with your phone or tablet.

    You should do this as quickly as possible, just to get it out of the way.

    When your phone has wirelessly connected to the camera once, and you’ve entered the password, it will remember this, and make it a lot faster to connect later.

    Send to Computer

    You’ll need to connect the computer physically to the Sony A6400 using the supplied USB cable, and you can push selected pictures to your Sony PlayMemories desktop software (installed from the CD or downloaded from their website). This can even be set up to continue pushing images after the camera has turned off.

    View On TV

    If you have a Wifi-enabled TV, you can see pictures and slideshows directly from your Sony A6400 through your home wireless network.

    One Touch NFC

    Enables Quick, one-touch connection (as opposed to first accessing the camera’s wireless network and then navigating to the Playmemories app) with NFC (near-field communication) capable devices.

    I have not tried this (as my iPhone does not have NFC), but it looks a lot easier to use.

    Airplane Mode

    Disables all wireless functionality, just like airplane mode does on your phone.

    Wi-Fi Settings:
    WPS Push

    If your access point has the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button, you can register the access point to this product easily by pushing the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button.

    Access Point Set.

    You can register your access point manually. Before starting the procedure, check the SSID name of the access point, security system, and password. The password may be preset in some devices. For details, see the access point operating instructions, or consult the access point administrator.

    Disp MAC Address

    Displays the MAC address of your Sony ILCE-A6400.

    SSID/PW Reset

    Your Sony A6400 shares the connection information for [Send to Smartphone] and [ Connection Info.] with a device that has permission to connect. If you want to change the device that is permitted to connect, reset the connection information.

    MENU – Network Settings – page 2 (Wireless settings page 2)

    network settings page 2

    Bluetooth Settings

    Controls the settings for connecting the camera to a smartphone via a Bluetooth connection. You need to pair the camera and smartphone before using the location information interlocking function. If you want to pair the Sony A6400 and smartphone in order to use the location information interlocking function, refer to “Loc. Info. Link Set..”

    Loc. Info. Link Set

    You can use the application PlayMemories Mobile to obtain location information from a smartphone that is connected with your camera using Bluetooth communication. You can record the obtained location information when shooting images.

    To use the location information linking function of the Sony A6400, you need the PlayMemories Mobile application on your smartphone and transfer an image to your smartphone to test the connection

    Procedure:

    Confirm that the Bluetooth function of your smartphone is activated. (Do not perform the Bluetooth pairing operation on the smartphone setting screen!!! In steps 2 to 7, the pairing operation is performed using the camera and the application PlayMemories Mobile. If you accidentally perform the pairing operation on the smartphone setting screen in step 1, cancel the pairing and then perform the pairing operation by following Steps 2 through 7 using the camera and the application PlayMemories Mobile.)

    1. On the camera, select MENU – (Wireless) – [Bluetooth Settings] – [Bluetooth Function] – [On].
    2. On the camera, select MENU – (Wireless) – [Bluetooth Settings] – [Pairing].
    3. Launch PlayMemories Mobile on your smartphone and tap “Location Information Linkage.”
    4. Activate [Location Information Linkage] on the [Location Information Linkage] setting screen of PlayMemories Mobile.
    5. Select [OK] when a message is displayed on the monitor of the camera. Pairing of the camera and PlayMemories Mobile is complete.
    6. On the camera, select MENU – (Wireless) – [ Loc. Info. Link Set.] – [Location Info. Link] – [On].
    7. (obtaining location information icon) will be displayed on the monitor of the camera. Location information obtained by your smartphone using GPS, etc., will be recorded when shooting images.

    Options in this Menu:

    • Location Info. Link: Sets whether to obtain the location information by linking with a smartphone.
    • Auto Time Correct.: Sets whether to automatically correct the date setting of the Sony A6400 using information from a linked smartphone.
    • Auto Area Adjust.: Sets whether to automatically correct the area setting of the camera using information from a linked smartphone.
    Edit Device name

    If you wish, you can change the name of the Device Access point) perhaps to make it easier to identify which A6400 is yours in particular situations.

    Reset Network set

    Resets all network settings.

    If something does not function properly, and you want to start from scratch, can be useful.

    MENU – playback options – page 1 (Playback settings page 1)

    Playback settings page 1

    Protect

    Set your camera to not shoot images without inserting an SD card.

    Rotate

    Change the orientation of images in-camera.

    Delete

    Delete one or multiple images stored on your SD cards.

    Rating

    Rate your images in-camera for easy culling in Lightroom afterward.

    Rating Set (Cust Key)

    Set a custom key for easy rating.

    Specify Printing

    Specify Printing is a feature that allows images to be marked for printing later. Registered images are displayed with the DPOF mark. (DPOF stands for Digital Print Order Format)

    MENU – playback options – page 2 (Playback settings page 2)

    MENU - playback options - page 2

    Photo Capture

    Captures a chosen scene in a movie to save as a still image. First shoot a movie, then pause the movie during playback to capture decisive moments that tend to be missed when shooting still images, and save them as still images.

    Enlarge Image

    Select an image and expand a portion of that picture. Useful for checking details and focus.

    Enlarge Initial Mag.

    Sets the initial magnification scale when playing back enlarged images.

    Enlarge Initial Position

    Sets the initial position when enlarging an image in playback. You can select either image center or the focus position.

    Sony A6400 manual, Ethiopia, omo valley, tribe

    Cont. PB for interval

    Continuously plays back images shot using interval shooting.

    You can create movies from still images produced by interval shooting using the computer software Imaging Edge. You cannot create movies from the still images on the camera.

    PB Speed for interval

    Sets the playback speed for still images during Continuous PB for interval.

    MENU – playback options – page 2 (Playback settings page 3)

    playback menu page 3

    Slide Show

    Select whether you want the camera to repeat slideshows when all pictures are viewed or not, and choose the interval between slides.

    View Mode

    Select how the camera will arrange captured pictures in the viewing browser.

    Image Index

    Choose whether you want the image browser to display 12 (larger) or 30 (smaller) images per page.

    Display as group

    When shooting bursts of images in Continuous Shooting it is possible during playback to see the groups of images rather than all images. When cycling through the groups you can see individual images in that group by pressing the Center Button in the Control Wheel.

    Display Rotation

    Select whether you want the camera to rotate images automatically when you rotate the camera or not.

    Image Jump Setting

    Image Jump Settings allows you to choose which images you choose to see when reviewing them in Playback, e.g., you can choose only to see your rated images. This will be useful to implement when you want to show somebody just your hero images from the day’s shoot.

    You can see all images by using the dial you have NOT assigned to see only the rated images.

    MENU – Camera Setup – page 1

    MENU - Camera Setup - page 1

    Monitor Brightness

    Manually set the Monitor brightness (recommended leave to zero) or change to a brighter setting for Sunny Weather.

    Viewfinder Brightness

    Set to Auto, which adapts to the lighting circumstances or manually changes to your preferred setting.

    Finder Color Temp

    Change the color temperature of the viewfinder (colder-warmer) to you liking. I don’t make any adjustments here.

    Gamma Disp. Assist

    Movies with S-Log gamma are assumed to be processed after shooting in order to make use of the wide dynamic range. They are therefore displayed in low contrast during shooting and may be difficult to monitor, using [Gamma Disp. Assist], contrast equivalent to that of normal gamma can be reproduced. In addition, [Gamma Disp. Assist] can also be applied when playing back movies on the camera’s monitor/viewfinder.

    Volume settings

    Modify the playback volume for recorded video or demos.

    Title Menu

    choose between tiles or a tiled front page when accessing the MENU or a linear tab style menu layout

    MENU – Camera Setup – page 2

    MENU - Camera Setup - page 2

    Mode Dial Guide

    Turn the description for each shooting mode ON or OFF. Can be handy at first for a novice user to get familiar with what the different shooting modes do.

    Delete Confirm

    When deleting images on your SD card, you’ll have to confirm every deletion (to make sure you don’t accidentally delete anything). You can turn Off this confirmation here if you wish.

    Display Quality

    You can change the display quality from standard to high at the expense of shorter battery life.

    Power Save Start time

    Sets time intervals to automatically switch to power save mode when you are not performing operations to prevent wearing down the battery pack. To return to shooting mode, perform an operation such as pressing the shutter button halfway down. I have it set to 5 minutes, a good balance between usability and battery life.

    Auto Power OFF Temp. 

    Sets the temperature of the camera at which the Sony A6400 turns off automatically during shooting (overheating). When it is set to High, you can continue shooting even when the temperature of the camera gets hotter than normal. Do not shoot while holding the camera in your hand as it can cause burns. Use a tripod. This will give you a 9-minute increase in movie recording at high ambient temperatures.

    NTSC/PAL Selector

    Plays back movies recorded with the product on an NTSC/PAL system TV.

    MENU – Camera Setup – page 3

    MENU - Camera Setup - page 3

    Cleaning Mode

    If dust or debris gets inside the Sony A6400 and adheres to the surface of the image sensor (the part that converts the light to an electric signal), it may appear as dark spots on the image, depending on the shooting environment. If this happens, follow the steps below to clean the image sensor.

    Touch Operation

    Sets whether or not to activate touch operations on the monitor. Touch operations when shooting with the monitor are referred to as “touch panel operations,” and touch operations when shooting with the viewfinder are referred to as “touch pad operations.”

    Touch Panel/Pad
    • Touch Panel+Pad: Activates both the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor and touchpad operations when shooting with the viewfinder.
    • Touch Panel Only: Activates only the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor.
    • Touch Pad Only: Activates only the touch pad operations when shooting with the viewfinder. Off: Deactivates all touch operations.
    • Off: Deactivates all touch operations.
    Touch Pad Settings

    Sets the area to be used for touchpad operations when shooting with the viewfinder. You can prevent unintentional operations caused by your nose, etc. touching the monitor.

    • Whole Screen: Uses the entire monitor as the touchpad.
    • Right 1/2 Area: Uses only the right half of the monitor as the touchpad.
    • Right 1/4 Area: Uses only the right quarter of the monitor as the touchpad.
    Demo Mode

    The Demo Mode function displays the movies recorded on the memory card automatically (demonstration) when the Sony A6400 has not been operated for a certain time. Normally select Off.

    TC/UB settings

    Timecode (TC) and the user bit (UB) information can be recorded as data attached to movies. This is used for synchronization of video in post production. The time code can be set between the following range: 00:00:00:00 to 23:59:59:29.

    • TC/UB Disp. Setting: Sets the display for the counter, time code, and user bit.
    • TC Preset: Sets the time code.
    • UB Preset: Sets the user bit.
    • TC Format: Sets the recording method for the time code. (Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.)
    • TC Run: Sets the count up format for the time code.
    • TC Make: Sets the recording format for the time code on the recording medium.
    • UB Time Rec: Sets whether or not to record the time as a user bit.

    MENU – Camera Setup – page 4

    MENU - Camera Setup - page 4

    Remote CTRL

    You can operate this product and shoot images using the SHUTTER button, 2 SEC button (2-second delay shutter), and START/STOP button (or Movie button (RMT-DSLR2 only)) on the Wireless Remote Commander RMT-DSLR1 (sold separately) and RMT-DSLR2 (sold separately). Refer also to the operating instructions for the Wireless Remote Commander.

    HDMI Settings

    When you connect the product to a High Definition (HD) TV with HDMI terminals using an HDMI cable (sold separately), you can select HDMI Resolution to output images to the TV.

    • Auto: The product automatically recognizes an HD TV and sets the output resolution.
    • 2160p/1080p: Outputs signals in 2160p/1080p.
    • 1080p: Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080p).
    • 1080i: Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080i).
    4K Output Sel.

    Outputs still image in 4K resolution to an HDMI-connected TV that supports 4K.

    USB connection

    Selects what will happen when you connect your Sony A6400 to your PC or MAC.

    Auto: Establishes a Mass Storage or MTP connection automatically, depending on the computer or other USB devices to be connected. Windows 7 or Windows 8 computers are connected in MTP, and their unique functions are enabled for use.

    Mass Storage: Establishes a Mass Storage connection between this product, a computer, and other USB devices.

    MTP: Establishes an MTP connection between this product, a computer, and other USB devices. Windows 7 or Windows 8 computers are connected in MTP, and their unique functions are enabled for use.

    PC Remote: Uses “Remote Camera Control” to control this product from the computer, including such functions as shooting and storing images on the computer

    USB LUN Setting

    Improves compatibility with external devices by limiting the functions of the USB connection. Older devices that are not able to connect to the Sony A6400 might work when set to single. Otherwise, use Multi.

    USB Power Supply

    You can extend battery life by providing a power supply over USB.

    MENU – Camera Setup – page 5

    MENU - Camera Setup - page 5

    PC Remote settings

    Sets whether to save still images stored in both the camera and the computer during PC Remote shooting. This setting is useful when you want to check recorded images on the camera without leaving the camera.

    Language

    Selects the language to be used in the menu items, warnings, and messages.

    Date/Time Setup

    The Clock Set screen is displayed automatically when you turn on your A6400 for the first time.

    Area Settings

    Sets where in the world where you are using your camera.

    Copyright info

    Writes copyright information onto the still images like your name or business.

    Format

    When you use a memory card with this camera for the first time, we recommend that you format the card using the Sony A6400 for stable performance of the memory card. Note that formatting permanently erases all data on the memory card, and is unrecoverable.

    MENU – Camera Setup – page 6

    MENU - Camera Setup - page 6

    File Number

    Name your files according to some shots or reset it to start from 1.

    Set File Name

    Use the standard file naming system or a customizable one.

    Select REC folder

    Selects where the Sony A6400 will store newly captured images.

    New Folder

    Make a new folder for quickly organizing events and locations.

    Folder name

    Choose whether to have folder names in standard form (DSC) or create a new one by date. Setting folders by date will make organizing your images easier.

    Recover Image DB

    If you have a storage card error, you can try to rebuild the database to retrieve lost images possibly.

    MENU – Camera Setup – page 7

    MENU - Camera Setup - page 7

    Display media info

    You can check how much space is left on your SD card (have pictures in your desired quality and how many minutes of video)

    Version

    Check what version of the operating system your camera and the lens is running. Sony sporadically releases updates with new features, so it might be worth checking if any new firmware versions are available.

    Setting Reset

    Fully resets the Sony A6400 to factory settings.

    The Next Chapter is about the various shooting Modes available, another concept that is necessary to understand fully.

    Shooting modes available via the Mode Dial 

    Intelligent Auto:

    This mode automatically detects the type of scene you’re shooting and adjusts the scene automatically. You’ll see the icon for the recognized scene appears on the top right hand of the screen. These scenes are the same ones which can be selected individually in SCENE mode. The Sony A6400 will also use the most appropriate FOCUS AREA, and ISO value (the ISO range cannot be changed in iAuto though). Drive Mode (single shooting, continuous shooting Lo-Mid-Hi), Self-timer and Self-timer cont (multiple images with the self-timer) can be changed by using the Fn button. Works for both RAW and JPEG shooting. Disadvantage: ISO range is fixed to 50-6400 (you can’t change the range).

    P (Program Auto):

    Program (P) mode automatically adjusts exposure and aperture according to your desired setting. See this as a more advanced iAuto mode, as you’ll be able to change all other settings through the touch screen (Focus area, creative style, exposure compensation,…); tip: lower the automatic ISO range to 100-1600 for better image quality (ISO-Auto range in MENU SYSTEM)

    A (Aperture Priority):

    Allows you to adjust the aperture and shoot, for example when you want to blur the background (large aperture like f/1.8), or want a sharp corner-to-corner image (around f/5.6-f/8). The aperture value can be changed during movie recording, a technique that will be familiar to videographers. Smaller F-value: The subject is in focus, but objects in front of and beyond the subject are blurred (what is called Bokeh). Larger F-value: The subject and its foreground and background are all in focus. If proper exposure cannot be set, the shutter speed on the shooting screen blinks.

    S (Shutter Priority):

    The go-to mode if you can’t shoot fast-moving subjects, by manually adjusting the shutter speed. You can express the movement of a moving subject in various ways by changing the shutter speed, for example, at the instant of motion with a high-speed shutter, or as a trailing image with a low-speed shutter. The shutter speed can be changed while recording movies. The aperture is automatically adjusted to obtain proper exposure. If a correct exposure cannot be obtained, the aperture value on the shooting screen blinks.

    Use a tripod to prevent blurring when you use a slow shutter speed.

    M (Manual Exposure):

    Both shutter speed and the aperture value can be changed in this mode, also during movie recording. Press the bottom side of the control wheel to select the shutter speed or aperture value, then turn the control wheel to select a value. When ISO Auto is used, the ISO value automatically changes to achieve the appropriate exposure using the aperture value and shutter speed you have set.

    If the aperture value and shutter speed you have set are not suitable for adequate exposure, the ISO value indicator will blink.

    Bulb Mode in Manual exposure

    Bulb is the mode used to shoot a trailing picture of a subject’s’ movement with a long exposure time. Think light trails from cars, or fireworks.

    Set the mode dial to M (Manual Exposure).

    Tips:

    Use a tripod for long exposures.

    Can’t get the shutter speed to Bulb Mode? Check these settings and turn them OFF:

    Is Smile Shutter activated?

    Movie:

    Although you can capture movies in any mode, it is easiest to change all related settings for video recording here. You can adjust the shutter speed or aperture value to your desired settings for recording movies. You can also check the image angle before shooting. Press the MOVIE button to start recording and again to stop recording. Menu:

    Program Auto: Allows you to shoot with the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) adjusted automatically. Other settings can be set manually, and the settings are retained.

    When a zoom lens is mounted, you can also zoom by operating that lens. When a motor zoom lens is mounted, move the zoom lever of the zoom lens to enlarge subjects.

    Sweep Panorama:

    Allows you to shoot a panoramic image by compositing the footage.

    Panorama mode will capture a series of images in succession.

    TIP: Panorama size (standard or wide) and panning direction can be changed in the MENU–.

    Scene Selection Mode (SCN)

    Allows you to shoot with preset settings according to the scene. iAuto and Superior Auto detect these scenes automatically for you and applies the presets it deems best, and does an excellent job at that. However, in certain circumstances (when you know what you are going to capture) it is better to select the appropriate scene yourself, as it takes the guessing work out of the equation. The Sony A6400 has a decent range of well-designed presets:

    Portrait:

    Blurred background for a beautiful Bokeh, and sharpens the subject. How good this will look relies heavily on the lens you’re using. A zoom is less suited to this kind of photography; best use a prime, fast lens. This preset accentuates the skin tones softly (you can select skin softening for all Modes in the Menu system too).

    Sports Action:

    Shoots a moving subject at a fast shutter speed so that the subject looks as if it is standing still. The product shoots images continuously while the shutter button is pressed.

    Macro:

    Shoots close-ups of the subjects, such as flowers, insects, food, or small items.

    Landscape:

    Shoots the entire range of scenery in sharp focus with vivid colors. The Sony A6400 will go to a smaller aperture to achieve this, as lenses are sharper corner-to-corner at smaller apertures.

    Sunset:

    Shoots the red of the sunset beautifully.

    Night Scene:

    Shoots night scenes without losing the dark atmosphere. Will go to higher ISO values and larger apertures to achieve a useable shutter speed, enabling you to capture sharp images without blur. 

    Hand-held Twilight:

    Shoots night scenes with less noise and blur without using a tripod. A burst of shots are taken, and image processing is applied to reduce subject blur, camera shake, and noise.

    Night Portrait:

    Shoots night scene portraits using the flash. The flash does not pop up automatically. Pop up the flash manually before shooting.

    Anti Motion Blur:

    Allows you to shoot indoor shots without using the flash and reduces subject blur. The product shoots burst images and combines them to create the image, reducing subject blur and noise.

    Other essential Sony A6400 functions

    Eye AF

    Eye AF has been totally updated since the A6500. Its no longer necessary to push a button to engage Eye AF. It is now also possible to select either the left or the right Eye!

    MENU – (Camera Settings1) – Face/Eye AF Set. – desired setting item.
    Face Priority in AF

    Sets whether or not to detect faces inside the focusing area and focus on the eyes (Eye AF) when autofocus is activated. ([On]/[Off])

    Right/Left Eye Select

    Specifies the eye to be detected. If [Right Eye] or [Left Eye] is selected, only the selected eye is detected.
    [Auto]: The camera detects eyes automatically.
    [Right Eye]: The right eye of the subject (the eye on the left side from the photographer’s perspective) is detected.
    [Left Eye]: The left eye of the subject (the eye on the right side from the photographer’s perspective) is detected.

    Face Detect. Frame Disp.:

     Sets whether or not to display the face detection frame when [Face Priority in AF] is set to [On]. ([On]/[Off])

    Auto Obj. Framing (not available in RAW)

    Menu – Red camera icon- page 13- Auto Obj. Framing – desired setting (On or Off)

    When the A6400 detects and shoots faces, macro shooting subjects or subjects that are tracked by Lock-on AF, the Sony A6400 automatically trims the image into an appropriate composition and saves it.

    Live View Display

    MENU – purple camera icon – page 7 – Live View Display – desired setting

    Live view shows your images as they’ll appear out of the camera, with effects of the exposure compensation, white balance, Creative Style, or Picture Effect on the screen.

    • Setting Effect ON (default setting and Intelligent Auto, Superior Auto, Sweep Panorama, Movie or Scene Selection): Displays Live View in conditions close to what your picture will look like as a result of applying all your settings. This setting is useful when you want to shoot pictures while checking the results of the shot on the Live View screen. Live View is always displayed with the appropriate brightness even in Manual Exposure mode.
    • Setting Effect OFF: Shows Live View without the effects of exposure compensation, white balance, Creative Style, or Picture Effect. This is useful for precisely checking your composition in particular conditions. Like when you use a third-party Flash, such as a studio flash, Live View Display may be dark for some shutter speed settings.
    e-Front Curtain Shut.

    MENU – purple camera icon – page 4 – e-Front Curtain Shut – desired setting ON or OFF

    Yes the Sony A6400 has an electronic front curtain shutter! This shortens the time lag between shutter releases.

    Remember that when you shoot at high shutter speeds with a large diameter lens attached, the ghosting of a blurred area may occur, depending on the subject or shooting conditions.

    When a lens made by another manufacturer (including a Minolta/Konica-Minolta lens) is used, turn this function off. If you set this function to On, the correct exposure will not be set, or the image brightness will be uneven.

    Lens compensation features

    The Sony A6400 has a range of built-in lens compensation functions. I can see this being useful for journalism and sports shooters who want to quickly get their jpegs to their editors with the minimum amount of editing.

    Shading Comp.

    MENU – Red camera icon – page 2 – Lens Comp – Shading Comp – desired setting ( Auto or Off)

    Compensates for the shaded corners of the screen caused by certain lenses.

    The Shading Comp function is only available with certain A-mount lenses.

    Chromatic Aberration Compensation

    MENU -Red camera icon – page 2 – Lens Comp –  Chro. Aber. Comp  – desired setting (Auto or Off)

    Reduces the colour deviation at the corners of the screen, caused by certain lens characteristics.

    The Shading Comp function is only available with certain A-mount lenses.

    Distortion Compensation

    MENU -Red camera icon – page 2 – Lens Comp – Distortion Comp – desired setting (Auto or Off)

    Compensates for the distortion of the screen, caused by particular lens characteristics.

    The Shading Comp function is only available with certain A-mount lenses and with some cannot be turned Off.

    Memory card issues

    Some people have reported problems with certain memory cards. These problems include:

    • Unable to magnify images on the card.
    • Buffer related problems.
    • Inability to read the memory card.
    • SD, SDHC, SDXC memory card and Memory Stick PRO Duo, Pro-HG Duo, PRO-HG HX Duo media are all supported.

    Make sure you:

    • Format the memory card once you’ve inserted in the camera.
    • If you’re using fast burst speeds, use a fast card (32GB 95MB/s read and 45mB/s) write is my recommendation to take advantage of the Sony A6400 FR and Buffer.
    • If you’re using larger cards (64 or 138GB), make sure you get the fastest available.
    • An SDHC UHS-I card (stands for “Ultra High Speed”) is recommended for best performance in burst mode.
    • Sandisk Extreme Pro SDHC UHS-I cards seem to work very well.

    Conclusion

    Here it is, the advanced manual for the Sony A6400 with plenty of tips and tricks to get you started. If you’re somewhat overwhelmed by this large post, I would suggest that you use the search function in a browser like Chrome at first to find the subject you are actually looking for.

    If you have any questions or need extra information on any subject covered here, feel free to write something in the comments section below. Have Fun!

  • Panasonic Lumix GX9 settings, tips and tricks

    Panasonic Lumix GX9 settings, tips and tricks

    GX9 Introduction

    Welcome to my Panasonic GX9 advanced manual with tips and tricks. This guide starts from your Menu settings and goes through all aspects of this interesting camera. I know it is a lot of information, but you’ll get the hang of it soon, I promise.

    As opposed the the video centric Panasonic GH5, the GX9 is more stills oriented camera, but it can still shoot 4K/30p video.

    Key Features

    • 20.3MP Live MOS sensor with no AA filter (same as GH5)
    • 2760k-dot resolution and 1.39x magnification
    • 1240k-dot resolution screen
    • 5-axis in-body image stabilization with Dual I.S. 2 (CIPA rated 6.5 stops)
    • 49 AF points concentrated towards the central portion of the frame
    • 140 JPEGs or 32 RAW files in burst
    • Magnesium body designed to be dust/weather-sealed
    • UHS-I SD slot
    • 4K Photo modes and in-camera focus stacking
    • USB charge and power capability
    • Wi-Fi Bluetooth

    I’ll be going over the entire Menu structure in this post, and giving you tips, pointers, and tricks along the way.

    Diving into the MENU system

    When you switch on your Panasonic Lumix GX9 you’ll be asked to enter a date, time and timezone. This setting is necessary, as all images captured will have a timestamp, making it easy to find your favorite pictures in the future. After this is setup, press the MENU button. You’ll see a range of icons and pages. We’ll start at page 1 of the camera Icon (camera settings)

    MENU – Camera Icon – page 1 of 4 (also called the Rec menu)

    Panasonic GX9 menu camera icon page 1

     

    Aspect Ratio

    You can change the aspect ratio of your photos here. Changing the aspect ratio can be used as a way to boost your creativity, for instance landscapes often look great with a 16:9 ratio, or for sharing on Instagram, a 1:1 crop might suit you better.

    An M43 (Micro Four-thirds) camera has a native aspect ratio of (not surprisingly) 4:3. You should realise that changing the aspect ratio to anything else than this will actually crop the sensor, meaning that you’ll lose pixels. You should look at it as re-framing your image (like you can do in Lightroom or other photo editors) inside the camera. Jpeg’s will be stored with the chosen ratio, but RAW images (although previewed with the chosen ratio), will still have the full information of the 4:3 sensor retained.

    These are the aspect ratios available:

    • 4:3: native sensor ratio
    • 3:2: the ratio used in full frame cameras
    • 16:9: for a wider looking view
    • 1:1: Square aspect ratio, mostly used for social sharing
    Picture Size

    Picture Size sets the number of pixels for Jpeg (nor RAW). The higher the numbers of pixels, the more detail your pictures will have.

    • When the aspect ratio is set to 4:3, you use all the 20 MP of the sensor for a maximum image size of 5184 x 3888
    • When the aspect ratio is 16:9, you only use a wide crop of 14.5 MP of the sensor for a maximum image size of 5184 x 2920.
    • When the aspect ratio is 3:2 you use 17 MP of the sensor and have an 5184 x 3456 image size.
    • When the aspect ratio is 1:1, you use 14,5 MP of the sensor for an 3888 x 3888 image size.

    The Panasonic GX9 also has a digital teleconverter option, allowing you to zoom in by a factor of times 2 or times 4. This can be a handy feature if you don’t shoot RAW (see next item for more info).  Thanks to  in-body digital processing, the resulting Jpegs actually retain a larger image size than what you’d expect of de facto cropping the sensor by a factor 2 or 4. I would however only recommend using this feature if you’re a die hard jpeg shooter, since using RAW files and developing your images in Lightroom or another app will almost always get you better results.

    Quality

    Probably the most important setting is Quality. You can select either Jpeg, where the RAW data from the sensor is processed by an in-camera algorithm to produce a viewable image, or save your images in this RAW format. RAW retains all the data of the sensor, and is meant to be edited afterwards in a desktop application like Lightroom. Saving as RAW means that you have much more creative freedom afterwards to push shadows or pull highlights, sharpen and enhance your image in any way you please. A Jpeg retains only a fraction of this information, according to the algorithm inside the camera which might or might not suit your style and/or needs.

    Hence, my recommendation is always to shoot RAW or RAW Jpeg. This does mean larger files, but SD cards are inexpensive compared to your beautiful new Lumix. But some photographers prefer to shoot in Jpeg only because they are for instance not interested in post-processing images. In this case, I would set the Jpeg to the highest quality setting.

    If you only shoot in RAW, the image on the rear screen when reviewing the images are of a very low quality. When you import to the computer they are fine but it might be better to shoot both RAW and JPEG.

    Lumix GX 9 tele zoom

    AFS/AFF

    AFS is an abbreviation of Auto Focus Single and AFF is an abbreviation of Auto Focus Flexible. In AFS, the focus stays locked while the shutter button is pressed halfway and in AFF focus is continuously readjusted according to the movement of the subject. See AFF as a function between Single AF and Continuous AF.

    This can easily be changed by using the dial on the right of the ECF too:

    AFS/AFF

    The AFC function below AFS/AFF continuously changes focus according to the movement of your subject.

    Some more info on these modes for clarification:

    • AFS will find focus and stay focused at that distance until you take a photo or release the shutter button. This is handy if you want to focus and then recompose your shot for instance.
    • AFF will do the same unless it detects subject movement, at which time it will temporarily switch to AFC operation in order to re-focus.
    • AFC won’t start to seek focus until you half-press the shutter, and will continually evaluate subject movement and change focus as needed.
    • With AFS you can can lock focus on a particular point, then swing the camera to get the right framing; with AFC, it will not lock focus, but will keep re-focusing. That’s why Pinpoint focusing can’t be used with AFC.
    Photo Style

    This applies only to Jpeg images, and the RAW preview. You can select a colour effect here.

    • Standard: standard Panasonic colour and contrast rendering.
    • Vivid: Brilliant effect with high saturation and contrast.
    • Natural: Soft effect with low contrast.
    • Monochrome: Monochrome  (black and white)effect with no color shades.
    • L.Monochrome: Black-and-white effect with rich gradation and crisp black accents.
    • Scenery: An effect appropriate for sceneries with vivid blue skies and greens.
    • Portrait: An effect appropriate for portraits with a healthy and beautiful skin tone.
    • Custom 1-4: Make your own presets for easy recall when needed.
    • Cinelike D: Gives priority to the dynamic range by using a gamma curve designed to create film-like images. Suited for editing.
    • Cinelike V: Gives priority to the contrast by using a gamma curve designed to create film-like images.

    As mentioned earlier, it’s possible to create your own Photo Style or customise the preset styles. This is basically a way of hacking into the Jpeg engine and adjusting it to your own style and preferences. There are 6 areas that you can alter.

    • Contrast: add or decrease the difference between the brightness and the darkness in the picture.
    • Sharpness: add a degree of sharpness or make your images softer.
    • Noise Reduction: add noise reduction for high ISO shooting.
    • Saturation: add more vividness to the colours. Or remove some.
    • Color Tone: add a blue, orange, red or green filter to your image.
    Filter Settings

    The filter Settings go a step further than merely a photo style. These include artistic effects like Low Key, Sepia, Cross Process and retro stylings. You can turn them ON or OFF here, select the effect you want to use and change the settings by using the touch screen. You can also set your camera up to shoot one with and one without an image effect simultaneously.

    If you’re wondering how you get to Creative Control mode, you need to set the mode dial to the paint palette.Creative Control mode

    And simply press up and down to select the image effects. You can also display the selection screen by touching the Recording Mode icon in recording screen.

    These are all the image effects available:

    • Expressive
    • High Key
    • Monochrome
    • Silky Monochrome
    • Cross Process
    • Bleach Bypass
    • Fantasy
    • Sunshine: you can select the position and size of the light source here.
    • Retro
    • Low Key
    • Dynamic Monochrome
    • Impressive Art
    • Toy Effect
    • Miniature Effect: you can select the portion of your image that is in focus here (and where the blur effect won’t happen)
    • Star Filter
    • Old Days
    • Sepia
    • Rough Monochrome
    • High Dynamic
    • Toy Pop
    • Soft Focus
    • One Point Color: you can select the color to leave in here by using a color picker.
    Color Space

    Select either sRGB or Adobe RGB here. Adobe RGB has a greater range of reproducible colors than sRGB, so it might be worth looking into this color space if you print to paper a lot. But remember that you’ll also need a monitor capable of reproducing the larger color range too. And this can often lead to problems when converting to sRGB or editing your images in external applications. Because of all this, I have it set to sRGB.

    Metering Mode

    You can change how the light is metered here, and hence how a correct exposure is calculated by the camera. If you feel that the camera takes over- or underexposed images according to your personal preferences, it might be worth changing the metering mode.

    Implementation of this is quite basic in this camera, you have a total of only 3 methods to choose from:

    • Multiple: This is the method in which the camera measures the most suitable exposure by judging the allocation of brightness on the whole screen automatically.
    • Center weighted: This is the method used to focus on the subject on the center of the screen and measure the whole screen evenly.
    • Spot: This is the method to measure the subject in the spot metering target.

    MENU – Camera Icon – page 2 of 4 (also called the Rec menu)

    Panasonic GX9 menu camera icon page 2

     

    Highlight Shadow

    This allows you to lighten the shadows and darkens the highlights in your image (or video).  So this is a method of creating balance in your image if you feel like the highlights are too strong or the shadows too dark. You have 4 presets available, and you can also make 3 custom presets yourself:

    • Standard: no adjustments is set.
    • Raise the contrast: Bright areas are brightened, and dark areas are darkened.
    • Lower the contrast: Bright areas are darkened, and dark areas are brightened.
    • Brighten dark areas: Dark areas are brightened.
    • Custom: make your own preset.

    This is how to adjust the parameters for Custom presets:

    1. Rotate the front/rear dial to adjust the brightness of bright/dark portions.ImageA – Bright portion B – Dark portion
      • The rear dial is for adjusting dark areas, and the front dial is for adjusting bright areas.
      • To register a preferred setting, press ▲, and select the destination where the custom setting will be registered to [Custom1]/[Custom2]/[Custom3].
      • Adjustments can also be made by dragging the graph.
    2. Press [MENU/SET].
      • The screen display can be switched by pressing [DISP.] on the brightness adjustment screen.Image
      • Turning off this unit will return the setting adjusted with Image / Image / Image / Image back to the default setting.
      • When [Photo Style] is set to [Like709] or [V-Log L], setting is fixed to [ Image ] (Standard).
    i. Dynamic

    This setting will change contrast and exposure when there is a big difference from the darkest area to the brightest are in your image. What really happens is that the camera adjusts the exposure in order to capture more details in the highlights. You can choose between High, Standard, Low or Off.

    This naturally causes an under-exposure in the shadow areas. But inside the jpeg engine, the camera will compensate for this by boosting shadows. The downside here is that this will obviously lead to more noise in the boosted regions, but because this is done with data directly coming from the sensor, it can be quite useful if you are a jpeg shooter.

    There is also an impact on RAW images, because the exposure will be underexposed.

    i. Resolution

    Another jpeg only functionality, i-Resolution is a form of sharpening. High, Standard, Low and Off are selectable, and you should see these like the threshold for sharpening in an application like Lightroom. Many photographers discard these intelligent functions, and if you shoot RAW only, it’s not that important for you (except i Dynamic which can change your exposure plus or minus 1/3 stop). But if you shoot jpeg only, you should set it to Low at least, since most of the time RAW files would be sharpened in post processing too.

    Flash

    all flash settings.

    Red-Eye Removal

    If you use a flash when using Red-Eye Reduction, the camera will automatically detect red-eye and corrects the picture.

    ISO Auto upper limit

    Sets the upper limit of the ISO sensitivity when you use Auto ISO or i ISO. Set upper limit to 3200, this is the range where you’ll get usable images without too much noise.

    Panasonic GX9 backlight

    Min. Shtr Speed

    A very important setting if you feel that the Panasonic GX9 is producing blurry images for your shooting style. Birds in flight, for instance, will need a faster shutter speed than many other types of photography.

    Since most of the time, you’ll need to raise ISO to gain faster shutter speeds, Panasonic (and many other camera producers) have made this option available.  You can set it to Auto, or choose a minimum shutter speed up to 1/32000. The latter is a bit high, but as I mentioned, if you shoot action sports or for certain types of nature photography, a minimum shutter speed of 1/1000 or 1/2000 should be set. At these speeds, you can begin to “freeze” action.

    Long Shtr NR

    The camera will automatically apply noise reduction to long exposures. This applies to both Jpeg and RAW files. A black frame is taken after your initial shot to measure the noise present. Since many environmental factors (like temperature and location) have an effect on the amount of noise that you’ll see, this is the best way to determine what is noise in your frame. This data is then subtracted from your image for a noise-free (more-or-less) result.

    MENU – Camera Icon – page 3 of 4 (also called the Rec menu)

    Panasonic GX9 menu camera icon page 3

    Shading Comp.

    All lenses have a lens profile that registers both distortion and shading in the corners at all apertures. These lens profiles can be applied in-camera to counter unwanted vignetting in your images. Especially important for jpeg shooters to turn this on. RAW shooters can apply these corrections later on (and with better results) in a desktop application like DXO optics Pro.

    Diffraction Compensation

    When you stop down your lens to a smaller aperture (normally from f/11 to f/22), a phenomenon called diffraction causes a loss in sharpness. It happens because light begins to disperse when passing through a small opening. When diffraction compensation is set to ON, the Panasonic GX9 will add sharpening to your image to try and counter this phenomenon. You should use it if you shoot jpeg.

    Stabilizer

    The Panasonic Lumix GX9 has a stabilised sensor. The sensor inside the camera is suspended on a magnetic field and can compensate for movement like the minute shakes of your hands or any other kind of movement. There are also many lenses available with an optical image stabilisation unit, that physically move glass elements around inside the lens to do the same. Both systems have their pros and cons, and it is generally accepted that a stabilised sensor works better for wide angle lenses (below 40mm) whilst optical lens stabilisation is more efficient for the tele range. It is also possible to use both systems at the same time (called Dual I.S.), where you’ll take advantage of the best of both worlds.

    It’s also possible to use the in-body sensor stabilisation with older, manual primes that don’t relay EXIF information (like most importantly focal length in this case).  You’ll need to manually set the focal length in the Focal length Set function to get an optimal performance.

    Ex. Tele Conv.

    You can digitally enlarge pictures without too much quality deterioration with this function. Only for jpeg use, you can extend the range of your lens by times 1.4 or 1.6 using this function.

    Digital Zoom

    Digital zoom takes this a step further, allowing you to zoom in up to 4 times for jpeg’s. I would not recommend either of these functions, as it is better to shoot RAW in this case and crop in processing for the best possible quality.

    Lumix GX9 india

    Burst rate

    The drive mode dial has two options for burst shooting. Burst shooting means that you’ll shoot continuously when you press the shutter button. You can apply different Burst Mode settings to Burst Shot 1 and and Burst Shot 2 Setting in these menus.

    You’ll see SH (for super high burst rates), SH pre (which actually goes back a few seconds in time and saves these images too). These SH modes are only available with the electronic shutter. Version 2 is always faster that version 1.

    Then we have High, Medium and Low which work with the Mechanical shutter too. The actual burst rate will be higher if you shoot Jpeg only.

    4K Photo

    4K photo mode is designed to help you to capture fleeting moments by letting you shoot at an incredible 60fps for 4K mode. Continuous autofocus mode is automatically activated and it draws on 4K video technology to shoot 8 MP images at this fast frame rate. You’re basically recording video where you can extract the frames in-camera.

    Extracting 8Mp stills from the GX9’s 4K Photo Mode footage is pretty easy as follows:

    1. Press the play button to located the files. Clips recorded in 4K Photo Mode are marked with the 4K Photo icon to make the easy to identify.
      Once you’ve found the clip you want, either tap the 4K Photo Icon on-screen or the Up navigation key.
    2.  If you have a long clip with fleeting moments of action you may like to use the slide bar at the top to quickly scroll to an interesting bit of footage. Alternatively, there’s a playback option (button Fn1) that you can use to play and pause the movie.
    3. Once you’ve found the area you’re interested in, tap the Frame View Icon to see a scrollable stack of frames, just swipe right and left to locate the best shots.
    4. When you find an image you like, tap the Menu/Set button or 4K Icon to save the image. Images are saved as jpegs.

    it’s possible to save all the frames from 5 second sections of your 4K movie. To do this:

    1. Tap the Menu button and scroll down to Playback (the 6th tab), then scroll to the second page of options and select 4K PHOTO Bulk Saving.
    2. Then swipe on the screen until you find the clip that you want to extract stills from.
    3. Now use the same on-screen movie navigation controls as you used before to find the first frame of the 5 seconds that you want to pull the stills from and tap the 4K Photo icon to save it and the image from the next 5 seconds.
    Self Timer

    The self timer function is self explanatory.  If you actually want to use this function, you’ll need to set the drive mode to:

    In this menu, you can select what type of self timer you’d like to use: a 10 second delay and one shot, 10 seconds with 3 shots with 2 second intervals or a 2 second delay, all after pressing the shutter.

    MENU – Camera Icon – page 4 of 4 (also called the Rec menu)

    Panasonic GX9 menu camera icon page 4

    Time Lapse shot

    You can take a sequential number of images with relatively long delays in between to achieve a time-lapse movie. You’ll need to turn the drive mode dial to Time Lapse for this:

    You can choose between Time Lapse or Animation in this menu.

    Time Lapse:
    1. Switch to Time Lapse Shot if it is not selected.
    2. change start time and shooting interval according to your preferences.
    3. press te shutter half way to exit the menu.
    4. press the shutter to start your time-lapse.

    Panasonic GX9 church

    Stop motion Animation

    Same principle applies to animation:

    1. Switch to Stop Motion Animation
    2. Change auto shooting and shooting interval according to your preferences
    3. press te shutter half way to exit the menu.
    4. press the shutter to start your time-lapse.
    5. move the subject per frame
    6. press the folder menu to end the recording
    Silent Mode

    Disables operational sounds and output of light at once for completely silent stealth mode shooting with the Panasonic GX9.

    Shutter Type

    You can use either the mechanical or electronic shutter, or 50/50, or let the Panasonic GX9 decide what is most appropriate. The electronic shutter has a maximum speed of 1/32000 sec, the mechanical shutter can go up to 1/8000 second and if you use the Electronic first curtain shutter, you can only go up to 1/2000 second.

    • AUTO: Switches the shutter type automatically depending on the recording condition and shutter speed.
    • MSHTR: Takes pictures in Mechanical Shutter Mode.
    • EFC: Takes pictures in Electronic Front Curtain Mode.
    • ESHTR: Takes pictures in Electronic Shutter Mode.

    Remember that in artificial light or when using a flash, you best use the mechanical shutter only to avoid artefacts.

    Shutter Delay

    To reduce the influence of hand shake or shutter vibration, shutter is released after the specified time has passed. 1, 2, 4 or 8 second delay are selectable. Keep your hands steady and don’t use this delay, else you might miss that critical moment.

    Bracket

    The Bracket function allows you to take multiple pictures while automatically adjusting a setting like exposure or aperture by pressing the shutter button.

    Possible bracket types:

    • Exposure Bracket: Press the shutter button and the Lumix will sequentially take multiple images with different exposures. You can select the number of pictures to be taken and the exposure range (from 1/3 EV to 1 EV stops difference).
    • Aperture Bracket: Press the shutter button and the Lumix will sequentially take multiple images at different apertures. Either select all apertures or a number of shots (3-5) within a selected range.
    • Focus Bracket:Press the shutter button and the Panasonic GX9 will sequentially take multiple images with different focus positions. You can select the distance between focus positions, the number of exposures and the sequence from far to near or the other way around.
    • White Balance Bracket: Press the shutter button and the Lumix GX9 will take three pictures with different white balance settings automatically
    • White Balance Bracket (color temperature): Press the shutter button once to take three pictures with different White Balance Color Temperature values automatically. You can also set the correction range by touching the up/down slider on the screen.
    HDR

    You can combine 3 image with different levels of exposure into a single picture a high dynamic range. This way, you can minimise the loss of gradations in bright areas and dark areas when, for example, the contrast between the background and the subject is large.

    Two setting are available:

    • Dynamic range: either select Auto where the camera will decide what range of exposure is suitable, or manually select plus/minus 1,2 or 3 EV.
    • Auto Align: Automatically aligns the resulting images to adjust for movement or not.
    Multi Exp.

    I multiple exposure is basically laying 2 (or more) images on top of each other. This is different to a HDR or  composite shot in the sense that these images should be totally different from each other. It’s a technique the comes from the darkroom photography area where 2 negatives where placed on top of each other to create a totally new image with the two images combined.

    How to do this:

    1. Press up/down to select start and then press Menu/Set.
    2. Decide on the composition and take the first picture. After this first image, press the shutter halfway down to take the next image.
    3. Shoot a  third or fourth exposure. all these images will add up to make a multiple exposure.
    4. Press the down arrow to exit or press the shutter button fully down.
    5. You multiple exposure is finished, and you can view it on the screen.

    MENU – Film Camera Icon – page 1 of 3 (also called Motion Picture Menu)

    Motion Picture Menu page 1

    These are all movie related settings, and menu of them are the same as the stills related menu options. YOu can however (obviously) set them up differently for video.

    Rec Format

    You can either choose to record in AVCHD or MP4 format. The higher the Bit rate value is, the higher the picture quality becomes. Since the camera employs the VBR recording method, the bit rate is changed automatically depending on the subject to record. As a result, the recording time is shortened when a fast-moving subject is recorded. Different frame rates and bitrates are selectable per format in the Rec Quality setting.

    Rec Quality

    Options are:

    • 4K, 100M, 30p
    • 4K, 100M, 25P
    • 4K, 100M, 24P
    • FHD, 28M, 60p
    • FHD, 28M, 50p
    • FHD, 28M, 30p
    • FHD, 20M, 25p
    • HD, 10M, 30p
    • HD, 10M, 25p
    AFS/AFF

    AFS is an abbreviation of Auto Focus Single and AFF is an abbreviation of Auto Focus Flexible. In AFS, the focus stays locked while the shutter button is pressed halfway and in AFF focus is continuously readjusted according to the movement of the subject. See AFF as a function between Single AF and Continuous AF.

    This can easily be changed by using the dial on the right of the ECF too:

    AFS/AFF

    The AFC function below AFS/AFF continuously changes focus according to the movement of your subject.

    Some more info on these modes for clarification:

    • AFS will find focus and stay focused at that distance until you take a photo or release the shutter button. This is handy if you want to focus and then recompose your shot for instance.
    • AFF will do the same unless it detects subject movement, at which time it will temporarily switch to AFC operation in order to re-focus.
    • AFC won’t start to seek focus until you half-press the shutter, and will continually evaluate subject movement and change focus as needed.
    • With AFS you can can lock focus on a particular point, then swing the camera to get the right framing; with AFC, it will not lock focus, but will keep re-focusing. That’s why Pinpoint focusing can’t be used with AFC.
    Continuous AF

    Focusing changes depending on the Focus Mode setting and the Continuous AF setting in this menu.

    AFS/AFF/AFC:
    • On: The camera automatically keeps focusing on subjects during recording.
    • Off: The camera maintains the focus position at the start of recording.
    MF

    You can use manual focus.

    Photo Style

    You can select a photo style (like for photography, see above) for video too.

    Filter Settings

    You can add the image effects (filters) of Creative Control Mode, see the stills info on this above.

    Metering Mode

    You can change how the light is metered here, and hence how a correct exposure is calculated by the camera. If you feel that the camera takes over- or underexposed images according to your personal preferences, it might be worth changing the metering mode.

    Implementation of this is quite basic in this camera, you have a total of only 3 methods to choose from:

    • Multiple: This is the method in which the camera measures the most suitable exposure by judging the allocation of brightness on the whole screen automatically.
    • Center weighted: This is the method used to focus on the subject on the center of the screen and measure the whole screen evenly.
    • Spot: This is the method to measure the subject in the spot metering target.

    MENU – Film Camera Icon – page 2 of 3 (also called Motion Picture Menu)

    Motion Picture Menu page 2

    Highlight Shadow

    This allows you to lighten the shadows and darkens the highlights in your image (or video).  So this is a method of creating balance in your image if you feel like the highlights are too strong or the shadows too dark. You have 4 presets available, and you can also make 3 custom presets yourself:

    • Standard: no adjustments is set.
    • Raise the contrast: Bright areas are brightened, and dark areas are darkened.
    • Lower the contrast: Bright areas are darkened, and dark areas are brightened.
    • Brighten dark areas: Dark areas are brightened.
    • Custom: make your own preset.

    For more info, see the equivalent setting for photos above.

    i.Dynamic

    This setting will change contrast and exposure when there is a big difference from the darkest area to the brightest are in your image. What really happens is that the camera adjusts the exposure in order to capture more details in the highlights. You can choose between High, Standard, Low or Off.

    This naturally causes an under-exposure in the shadow areas. But inside the jpeg engine, the camera will compensate for this by boosting shadows. The downside here is that this will obviously lead to more noise in the boosted regions, but because this is done with data directly coming from the sensor, it can be quite useful.

    i.Resolution

    i-Resolution is a form of sharpening. High, Standard, Low and Off are selectable, and you should see these like the threshold for sharpening in an application like Lightroom. Many photographers discard these intelligent functions, and if you shoot RAW only, it’s not that important for you (except i Dynamic which can change your exposure plus or minus 1/3 stop).

    ISO Auto upper limit

    Set the upper limit of the ISO sensitivity when it is set to AUTO.

    Diffraction Compensation

    When you stop down your lens to a smaller aperture (normally from f/11 to f/22), a phenomenon called diffraction causes a loss in sharpness. It happens because light begins to disperse when passing through a small opening. When diffraction compensation is set to ON, the Panasonic GX9 will add sharpening to your image to try and counter this phenomenon.

    Stabilizer

    The Panasonic Lumix GX9 has a stabilised sensor. The sensor inside the camera is suspended on a magnetic field and can compensate for movement like the minute shakes of your hands or any other kind of movement. There are also many lenses available with an optical image stabilisation unit, that physically move glass elements around inside the lens to do the same. Both systems have their pros and cons, and it is generally accepted that a stabilised sensor works better for wide angle lenses (below 40mm) whilst optical lens stabilisation is more efficient for the tele range. It is also possible to use both systems at the same time (called Dual I.S.), where you’ll take advantage of the best of both worlds.

    Flkr Decrease

    The shutter speed can be fixed to reduce the flicker or striping in your movies. 1/50,/1/60,1/100 or 1/120 second are available.

    Ex. Tele Conv.

    You can digitally enlarge movies without too much quality deterioration with this function. You can extend the range of your lens by times 1.4 or 1.6 using this function.

    MENU – Film Camera Icon – page 3 of  3 (also called Motion Picture Menu)

    Motion Picture Menu page 3

    Digital Zoom

    Digital zoom takes this a step further, allowing you to zoom in up to 4 times.

    Picture Mode in Rec.

    You can record still pictures while recording a movie on the Panasonic GX9. During movie recording, press the shutter button fully to record a still picture when turned On. Aspect will always be 16:9.

    There are 2 settings available:

    Video Priority
    • Pictures will be recorded with a picture size determined by the Rec Quality setting for motion pictures.
    • Only JPEG images are recorded when Quality is set to Raw (still pictures will be recorded in jpeg)
    • Up to 80 still pictures can be recorded during recording of the motion picture. (Up to 20 still pictures during 4K motion picture recording)
    Photo Priority
    • Pictures will be recorded with the set picture size and quality.
    • The screen will go dark while recording pictures. A still picture will be recorded in the motion picture during that period, and audio is not recorded.
    • Up to 20 still pictures can be recorded during recording of the motion picture. (Up to 10 still pictures during 4K motion picture recording)
    Lumix GX9 moiré
    Sound Rec Level Adj.

    Adjust the sound input level to 19 different levels (-12 dB to +6 dB).

    MENU – Custom Tool (Custom Menu)

    MENU → Custom Tool→ page 1

    You’ll find all customisable settings of the Panasonic GX9 in this Menu.

    Exposure Menu page 1 of 6 (Exposure and Shutter button behaviour settings)

    Custom Exposure settings G9

    ISO Increments

    Choose the increments of exposure changes between 1/3 EV or 1 EV.

    Extended ISO

    ISO sensitivity can be set up to minimum of ISO 100. Base ISO of the sensor is 200, so this extended ISO basically halves this in software, with a slight decrease in quality.

    Exposure Comp. Reset

    An exposure value can be reset when the Recording Mode is changed or the camera is turned off.

    AF/AE Lock

    Lock focus and exposure with AF/AE LOCK. To clear the lock, press AF/AE LOCK again.

    AF/AE Lock Hold

    When ON is selected, focus and exposure stays locked even if you press and release AF/AE LOCK. To clear the lock, press AF/AE LOCK again.

    Shutter AF

    Set whether or not the focus is adjusted automatically when the shutter button is pressed halfway.

    Half Press Release

    The shutter will immediately fire when the shutter button is pressed halfway when this is ON.

    Quick AF

    As long as the camera is held steady, the camera will automatically adjust the focus and focus adjustment will then be quicker when the shutter is pressed. You’ll get better AF performance at the expense of battery life.

    Focus Menu page 2 of 6 (more Focus/Release Shutter settings)

    Custom Exposure settings G9 page 2

    Eye Sensor AF

    The Panasonic GX9 wil automatically start autofocus when the eye sensor is activated.

    Pinpoint AF Setting

    The screen will be zoomed in when the shutter is pressed halfway, selectable in full screen or in a window.

    AF-point Scope Setting

    The methods for displaying the magnification window. View magnification full screen or picture in picture.

    AF Assist lamp

    AF assist lamp will illuminate the subject when the shutter button is pressed half-way making it easier for the camera to focus when recording in low light conditions. Range is about 1 meter.

    Focus/Release Priority

    Set whether to give priority to focus or shutter release during Auto Focus. Setting it to Focus priority means you won’t be able to take an image if focus is not acquired. Release will.

    Focus Switching for Vert / Hor

    Memorises separate positions for horizontal and vertical orientations (two vertical orientations, left and right, are available).

    Loop Movement Focus Frame

    When setting the AF area position or the MF Assist display position, you can now loop the position from one edge to the other edge of the screen.

    AF Area Display

    Selects whether you want to see a visual representation of you selected AF area on screen.

    Focus Menu page 3 of 6 (more Focus/Release Shutter settings)

    Custom Exposure settings G9 page 3

    AF+MF

    When AF Lock is ON (press the shutter button halfway with the focus mode set to AFS or set AF Lock using AF/AE LOCK), you can make fine adjustments to the focus manually.

    MF Assist

    Sets the display method of MF Assist (enlarged screen) on the Panasonic GX9.

    MF assist settings

    MF Assist Display

    Sets whether MF Assist (enlarged screen) will appear in a windowed screen display or in a full screen display.

    Fn Button Set

    You can assign various features, such as recording functions, to specific buttons and icons as well as the function lever.

    1. Press up/down to select the function button you want to assign a function to and then press MENU/SET.
    2. Press up/down to select the function you want to assign and then press [MENU/SET].
    FN Lever Setting

    You are also free to assign any function to the FN lever using the same method as Fn Button set.

    Q.MENU

    In Custom operations, you can customise the Q Menu according to your liking.

    You can add a maximum of 15 preferred settings to the Quick Menu.

    1. Press Q.MENU to display the Quick Menu.
    2. Press down to select the custom tool and then press MENU/SET.
    3. Press left/right arrow to select the menu item in the top row and then press MENU/SET.
    4. Press left/right to select the empty space in the bottom row and then press MENU/SET. (You can also set the menu item by dragging it from the top row to the bottom row)
    5. Press return to switch to the recording screen.
    Dial Set.

    Assign Dial (F/SS): Assigns the operations of the aperture value and shutter speed in Manual Exposure Mode.

    Rotation (F/SS): Changes the rotation direction of the dials for adjusting the aperture value and shutter speed.

    Control Dial Assignment: It sets the item to be assigned to the control dial while the recording screen is displayed.

    Exposure Comp.: Assigns the Exposure Compensation to the front dial or rear dial so that you can directly adjust it.

    Dial Operation Switch Setup: Sets the items to be assigned temporarily to the front/rear dials when you press the function button to which Dial Operation Switch is assigned.

    Joystick Setting

    The joystick provides the same functions as the cursor buttons MENU/SET button.

    Operation Menu page 4 of 6 (dial and buttons operation settings)

    Custom Exposure settings G9 page 4

    Operation Lock Settings

    Sets the control functions on the Panasonic GX9 to be disabled with the function button Operation Lock. Cursor, Joystick and Touch screen can be turned off.

    Video Button

    Enables/disables the motion picture button.

    Touch Settings

    Enables/disables the Touch operation.

    • Touch Screen: All touch operations are turned on.
    • Touch Tab: Operations of tabs are enabled.
    • Touch AF: Operation to bring the subject you touch into focus AF or adjust the focus and brightness AF+AE are enabled.
    • Touch Pad AF: Operation to move the AF area by touching the monitor when the viewfinder is in use.
    Auto Review

    Displays a picture immediately after it is taken.

    Monochrome Live View

    You can display the recording screen in black and white. Recorded images will not be affected.

    Constant Preview

    You can check the effects of the chosen aperture and shutter speed on the recording screen in Manual Exposure Mode. Some camera makers call this Live View.

    Peaking

    In-focus portions (portions on the screen with clear outlines) are highlighted when focus is being adjusted manually. Great focussing aide for manual focussing. Can be set to High or Low.

    Histogram

    Display the histogram. A histogram is a graph that displays brightness along the horizontal axis (black to white) and the number of pixels at each brightness level on the vertical axis. It allows you to easily check a picture’s exposure.

    Monitor/ Display Menu page 5 of 6 (settings for the display)

    Custom Exposure settings G9 page 5

    Guide Line

    This will set the pattern of guide lines displayed when taking a picture.

    Center Marker

    The center of the recording screen will be displayed as [+].

    Highlight

    When the Auto Review function is activated or when playing back, white saturated areas appear blinking in black and white.

    Zebra Pattern

    Indicates parts that may become white saturated through overexposure in a zebra pattern. You can select a brightness value between 50% and 105%. In Zebra 2, you can select OFF. If you select 100% or 105%, only the areas that are already white saturated are displayed in a zebra pattern. The smaller the value is, the wider the brightness range to be processed as a zebra pattern will be.

    Expo.Meter

    Display the exposure meter.

    • Set to ON to display the Exposure meter when performing Program Shift, setting aperture, and setting shutter speed.
    • Unsuitable areas of the range are displayed in red.
    • When the Exposure meter is not displayed, switch the display information for screen by pressing DISP.
    • If no operations are performed for approximately 4 seconds, the Exposure meter disappears.
    MF Guide

    When you set the focus manually, an MF guide that allows you to check the direction to achieve focus is displayed.

    LVF/Monitor Disp. Set

    You can select separate screen display styles for the viewfinder and the monitor.

    Monitor Info. Disp.

    Display the recording information screen.

    Viewfinder style: Scales down images slightly so that you can better review the composition of the images.

    Monitor style: Scales images to fill the entire screen so that you can see their details.

    Monitor/ Display Menu page 6 of 6 (monitor and lens behaviour settings)

    Custom Exposure settings G9 page 6

    Rec Area

    This changes the angle of view during motion picture recording and still picture recording. Displays the recording area according to the angle of view for still picture recording or video.

    Remaining Disp.

    This will switch display between the number of recordable pictures and available recording time.

    Menu Guide

    Display a selection screen when you set the mode dial to the paint palette icon.

    Panasonic GX9 portrait photography
    Lens Position Resule

    Saves the focus position when you turn off the camera. When an interchangeable lens that is compatible with power zoom is in use, the zoom position is also saved.

    Power Zoom Lens

    Change the settings for a power zoom lens. Sets the screen display and lens operations when using an interchangeable lens that is compatible with power zoom.

    • Disp Focal Length: When you zoom, the focal distance is displayed and you can confirm the zoom position.
    • Step Zoom: When you operate the zoom with this setting [ON], the zoom will stop at positions corresponding to predetermined distances.
    • Zoom Speed: You can set the zoom speed for zoom operations for both stills and vide to high, medium or low.
    • Zoom Ring: When set to OFF] the operations controlled by the zoom ring are disabled to prevent accidental operation.
    Lens Fn Button Setting

    Sets the function to be assigned to the focus button of an interchangeable lens. You can call up the assigned function by setting the focus selector switch of a compatible interchangeable lens to Fn and then pressing the focus button of the lens.

    Face Recog.

    Face Recognition is a function on the Panasonic GX9 which finds a face resembling a registered face and priorities focus and exposure automatically. Even if the person is located towards the back or on the end of a line in a group photo, the camera can still take a clear picture.

    On will automatically recognise faces, but you can also register up to six faces yourself.

    1. In this Menu, select an empty frame (or overwrite one).
    2. Take an picture of the face you want to register.
    3. Register this face. Note that you can register up to 3 images per face for more accurate results.
    Profile Setup

    If you set the name and birthday of your baby or pet in advance, you can record their name and age in months and years in the images.

    MENU – Setup Menu – page 1 of 5 (General Camera Setup)

    MENU → gear (Setup Menu) → page 1 of 5

    Online Manual

    Display the URL or QR code to go to the online manual.

    Cust. Set Mem.

    Up to 5 sets of current camera settings can be registered using C1, C2, C3-1, C3-2 or C3-3. The first three are directly accessible via the Mode Dial.

    Saving a custom camera is quite simple, set the mode dial to C1, C2 or C3, change the cameras settings to your preferences, go in the Menu to this setting and press MENU/SET on the screen.

    Clock Set

    You have already probably set time and date when you first turned on the Panasonic GX9, but you can also change this here.

    World Time

    Sets the times for the region where you live (HOME) and your travel destination (DESTINATION). Time and date will be altered to reflect the local time and date at your travel destination.

    Travel Date

    If you set Travel Setup, elapsed days of your trip i.e. which day of the trip based on its departure and return dates will be recorded The travel date is automatically canceled if the current date is after the return date.

    If you set Location, the name of the travel destination that you enter will be recorded.

    Wi-Fi

    It’s possible to control your Panasonic GX9 with a smartphone or a tablet, display pictures on TV, print Wirelessly, Send images to a PC or use Web Services from Panasonic all via WiFi.

    To use the Wi-Fi function on this camera, a wireless access point is needed off course.

    By default, Wi-Fi is assigned to the Fn6 button when the camera is in Recording Mode, while it is assigned to Fn1 when the camera is in Playback Mode. You can assign it to any button you want.

    When you want to connect to WiFi, simply press this button.

    Wi-Fi Setup

    Priority of Remote Device: Sets either the camera or the smartphone as the priority control device to be used during remote recording.

    Wi-Fi Password: You can improve security by enabling password entry for a direct connection to a smartphone.

    LUMIX CLUB: Acquires or changes the “LUMIX CLUB” login ID.

    PC Connection: You can set the workgroup. To send images to a PC, a connection to the same workgroup as the destination PC is required.

    Device Name: You can change the name (SSID) of this unit.

    Wi-Fi Function Lock: To prevent incorrect operation and use of the Wi-Fi function by a third party and to protect saved personal information, protect the Wi-Fi function with a password.

    Network Address: Displays the MAC address and IP address of this unit.

    Approved Regulations: Displays the certification number for radio regulations.

    Bluetooth

    You can also connect to your Smartphone, Tablet or TV if your device has the Bluetooth functionality. A function called pairing is needed in order to establish a connection. You’ll find it in this menu, remember to also turn Bluetooth on if you want to do so.

    Wireless Connection Lamp

    This enables/disables the wireless connection lamp.

    MENU – Setup Menu – page 2 of 5 (General Camera Setup)

    MENU → gear (Setup Menu) → page 2 of 5

    Beep

    This allows you to set the electronic sound and the electronic shutter sound. Remember this will be off if you’re in Silent Mode!

    Economy

    These settings will determine the way the camera handles inactivity on your part to save battery life.

    Sleep Mode: The camera is automatically turned off if the camera has not been used for the time selected on the setting.

    Sleep Mode(Wi-Fi): The camera is automatically turned off if it is not connected to a Wi-Fi network and has not been used for 15 minutes (

    Auto LVF/ Monitor Off: The monitor/viewfinder is automatically turned off if the camera has not been used for the time selected on the setting.

    Power Save LVF Shooting: If you display the monitor using the viewfinder/monitor automatic switching function, the camera will turn off automatically after being left idle.

    Monitor Display Speed

    This sets the monitor frame rate to either 30fps or 60fps. 60fps will run smoother at the cost of battery life.

    LVF Display Speed

    This sets the viewfinder frame rate, to either 60 or 120fps. Again, at 120 fps you’ll see movement smoother at the cost of battery life.

    Night Mode

    This displays the monitor and viewfinder screens in red. It reduces the difficulty in seeing the surroundings caused by brightly-lit screens at night or in any low-light environment.

    Monitor Display

    Brightness, color, or red or blue tint of the Monitor/viewfinder can be adjusted.

    Monitor Luminance

    These settings will affect how and when brightness of the monitor is adjusted.

    Auto: The brightness is adjusted automatically depending on how bright it is around the camera.

    Mode 1: Makes the monitor brighter than normal.

    Mode 2: Set the monitor to the standard brightness.

    Mode 3: Makes the monitor brighter than standard.

    MENU – Setup Menu – page 3 of 5 (General Camera Setup)

    MENU → gear (Setup Menu) → page 3 of 5

    Status LCD Backlight

    You can set the LCD Backlight to High, Low or Off.

    Eye Sensor

    Sensitivity will This will set the sensitivity of the eye sensor.

    LVF/Monitor Switch will This will set the method for switching between the monitor and viewfinder.

    USB Mode

    Sets the communication method when connecting using the USB connection cable.

    Select on Connection: Select this setting to select the USB communication system when connecting to another device.

    PC Storage: Select this setting to export images to a connected PC.

    PC Tether: Select this setting to control the camera from a PC installed with supported software.

    Pictbridge PTP: Select this setting when connecting to a printer supporting PictBridge.

    USB Power Supply

    Supplies power via the USB connection cable when the camera is connected to a PC or PowerBank.

    TV Connection

    Set the format for the HDMI output when playing back on the HDMI compatible TV and monitor connected with this unit using the HDMI cable. It’s possible to set it to Auto or 4K, 1080p, 1080i, etc…

    Language

    Set the language displayed on the screen.

    Version Disp

    This enables the firmware versions of the camera and lens to be checked before an upgrade for instance.

    MENU – Setup Menu – page 4 of 5 (General Camera Setup)

    MENU → gear (Setup Menu) → page 4 of 5

    Folder/File Settings

    Set the folder and file name patterns in which images are to be saved.

    Save/Restore Camera Setting

    Save the camera’s setup information to the card. Since saved setup information can be imported to the camera, you can apply the same setup to more than one camera.

    No.Reset

    Reset the file number of the next recording to 0001.

    Reset

    The following settings are reset to the default:

    • Recording settings.
    • Setup settings Wi-Fi Setup and Bluetooth settings.
    • Custom settings (Face Recog. and[Profile Setup settings.
    • Setup/custom settings (except for Wi-Fi Setup, Bluetooth, Face Recog. and Profile Setup).
    Reset Network Settings

    The following network settings are reset to the default:

    • Wi-Fi Setup (Excluding LUMIX CLUB).
    • Registered device information in Bluetooth and values in Wi-Fi network settings.
    Pixel Refresh

    It will perform optimization of imaging device and image processing. Use this function when you start seeing hot or dead pixels in your images.

    Sensor Cleaning

    Dust reduction to blow off the debris and dust that have affixed to the front of the imaging device is performed.

    MENU – Setup Menu – page 5 of 5 (General Camera Setup)

    MENU → gear (Setup Menu) → page 5 of 5

    Level Gauge Assist

    Adjust: Hold the camera in a horizontal position, and press MENU/SET. The level gauge will be adjusted.

    Level Gauge Value Reset: Restores the default level gauge setting.

    Format

    Format the card before recording a picture with this unit.

    Since data cannot be recovered after formatting, make sure to back up necessary data in advance.

    MENU – My Menu (that little man)

    My Menu Setting

    Light Composition

    Select multiple frames from 6K/4K burst files that you wish to combine in a composite image. Very cool feature. Parts of the image that are brighter than the preceding frame will be superimposed on the preceding frame to combine the frames into one picture.

    My Menu Setting

    You can register frequently-used menus and display them in My Menu. You can register up to 23 menus for quick access.

    • Add: Specifies the menu to be displayed in My Menu to register it.
    • Sorting: Rearranges the menus displayed in My Menu. Select the menu you want to move and set the destination.
    • Delete: Deletes registered menus from the displayed menu list.
    • Display from my menu: Sets the type of the menu screen to be displayed.

    MENU – Playback Menu – Page 1

    Playback Menu page 1

    Slide Show

    ou can play back the pictures you have taken in synchronization with music, and you can do this in sequence while leaving a fixed interval between each of the pictures.

    You can also put together a slide show composed of only still pictures, only motion pictures, etc.

    You can change the settings for slide show playback by selecting [Effect] or [Setup] on the slide show menu screen.

    Playback Mode

    Playback in Normal Play, Picture Only or Video Only can be selected.

    Protect

    You can set protection for pictures you do not want to delete by mistake.

    Rating

    You can set five different rating levels for images to do the following:

    • Delete all the pictures not set as ratings.
    • Checking the rating level on the file detail display of an operating system, such as Windows 10.
    Title Edit

    You can add text (comments) to pictures. After text has been registered, it can be stamped in prints using Text Stamp.

    Lumix GX9 street photography
    Face Rec Edit

    You can clear and replace all information relating to face recognition in selected images.

    RAW Processing

    You can process the pictures taken in RAW format. The processed pictures will be saved in JPEG format.

    • White Balance: Allows you to select a White Balance preset and adjust it. If you select an item you can process the image with the setting at the time of recording.
    • Brightness correction: Allows you to correct the brightness within the range between – 2 EV and +2 EV.
    • Photo Style: Allows you to select a photo style effect.
    • i.Dynamic: Allows you to select an i.Dynamic setting.
    • Contrast: Allows you to adjust the contrast.
    • Highlight: Allows you to adjust the brightness of bright portions.
    • Shadow: Allows you to adjust the brightness of dark portions.
    • Saturation and Color Tone: Allows you to adjust the saturation. (When Monochrome or L.Monochrome is selected in Photo Style, you can adjust the color tone.)
    • Filter Effect: Allows you to select a filter effect. (Only when Monochrome or L.Monochrome is selected in Photo Style)
    • Noise Reduction: Allows you to adjust the noise reduction setting.
    • i.Resolution: Allows you to select an i.Resolution setting.
    • Sharpness: Allows you to adjust the resolution effect.
    6K/4K PHOTO Bulk Saving

    You can save pictures of a 6K/4K burst file that were extracted from any 5 second period at once.

    MENU – Playback Menu – Page 2

    Playback Menu page 2

    6K/4K PHOTO Noise Reduction

    When saving pictures, reduce the noise produced during recording by high ISO sensitivity.

    Light composition

    Select multiple frames from 6K/4K burst files that you wish to combine. Parts of the image that are brighter than the preceding frame will be superimposed on the preceding frame to combine the frames into one picture.

    Clear Retouch

    Remove unwanted objects and such right from the camera menu. The erasure operation can only be performed by touching. Clear Retouch automatically enables the touch operation.

    Text Stamp

    You can stamp recording information like names, dates, places on recorded images.

    Copy

    Copy images on the card to the other card.

    Resize

    To allow easy posting to web pages, attachment to e-mail etc., picture size (number of pixels) is reduced.

    Cropping

    You can enlarge and then clip the important part of the recorded picture.

    Rotate

    Rotate pictures manually in 90 degree steps.

    MENU – Playback Menu – Page 3

    Playback Menu page 3

    Video Divide

    Recorded motion picture and 6K/4K burst files can be divided in two. It is recommended for when you want to divide a part you need with a part you do not need.

    Time Lapse Video

    This function allows you to create a motion picture from a picture group recorded with Time Lapse Shot.

    Stop Motion Video

    A Motion picture is created from group pictures taken with Stop Motion Animation.

    Rotate Disp.

    This mode allows you to display pictures vertically if they were recorded holding the camera vertically.

    Picture Sort

    You can set the order in which the camera displays images during playback.Either via file name or date/time.

    Delete Confirmation

    This sets which option, Yes or No, will be highlighted first when the confirmation screen for deleting a picture is displayed.

    Quick access with the Q Menu (Fn 2)

    The most commonly used settings can be accessed through what is called the Q Menu. This is the FN2 button that you’ll find right next to the screen, above the trash bucket button.

    The features that can be adjusted using Quick Menu are determined by the mode or a display style the camera is in.G9 Q Menu photo style

    Photo Style

    This applies only to Jpeg images, and the RAW preview when you load them into an app like Lightroom.. You can select a colour effect here.

    • Standard: standard Panasonic colour and contrast rendering.
    • Vivid: Brilliant effect with high saturation and contrast.
    • Natural: Soft effect with low contrast.
    • Monochrome: Monochrome  (black and white)effect with no color shades.
    • L.Monochrome: Black-and-white effect with rich gradation and crisp black accents.
    • Scenery: An effect appropriate for sceneries with vivid blue skies and greens.
    • Portrait: An effect appropriate for portraits with a healthy and beautiful skin tone.
    • Custom 1-4: Make your own presets for easy recall when needed.
    • Cinelike D: Gives priority to the dynamic range by using a gamma curve designed to create film-like images. Suited for editing.
    • Cinelike V: Gives priority to the contrast by using a gamma curve designed to create film-like images.

    As mentioned earlier, it’s possible to create your own Photo Style or customise the preset styles. This is basically a way of hacking into the Jpeg engine and adjusting it to your own style and preferences. There are 6 areas that you can alter.

    • Contrast: add or decrease the difference between the brightness and the darkness in the picture.
    • Sharpness: add a degree of sharpness or make your images softer.
    • Noise Reduction: add noise reduction for high ISO shooting.
    • Saturation: add more vividness to the colours. Or remove some.
    • Color Tone: add a blue, orange, red or green filter to your image.

    G9 Q Menu motion picture settingMotion Pic. Set

    You can change bitrate and frame-rate for video here, as well as select the appropriate movie container.

    AVCHD

    AVHCD format frame rate

    MP4

    MP4 frame rate

    G9 Q Menu picture setting

    Picture Setting

    You can quickly change picture size and picture quality here for your Jpeg’s.

    These are the aspect ratios available:

    • 4:3: native sensor ratio
    • 3:2: the ratio used in full frame cameras
    • 16:9: for a wider looking view
    • 1:1: Square aspect ratio, mostly used for social sharing

    Quality wise, you can choose between Small (S), Medium (M) and Large (L) files sizes. Obviously, Large will have the best quality Jpeg’s, at the expense of larger files. If you only shoot Jpeg (and not RAW) set it to Large. If you shoot both (Jpeg+RAW, see next screen), you could set it to small or medium since you’ll always work with the RAW in post processing. This way, you’ll still have a Jpeg for sharing quickly online or as a reference whilst still saving some space.

    G9 Q Menu picture quality settings

    Quality

    Probably the most important setting is Quality. You can select either Jpeg, where the RAW data from the sensor is processed by an in-camera algorithm to produce a viewable image, or save your images in this RAW format. RAW retains all the data of the sensor, and is meant to be edited afterwards in a desktop application like Lightroom or Luminar. Saving as RAW means that you have much more creative freedom afterwards to push shadows or pull highlights, sharpen and enhance your image in any way you please. A Jpeg retains only a fraction of this information, according to the algorithm inside the camera which might or might not suit your style and/or needs.

    Hence, my recommendation is always to shoot RAW or RAW Jpeg. This does mean larger files, but SD cards are inexpensive compared to your beautiful new Lumix. But some photographers prefer to shoot in Jpeg only because they are for instance not interested in post-processing images. In this case, I would set the Jpeg to the highest quality setting.

    G9 Q Menu AFS/AFFAFS/AFF

    AFS is an abbreviation of Auto Focus Single and AFF is an abbreviation of Auto Focus Flexible. In AFS, the focus stays locked while the shutter button is pressed halfway and in AFF focus is continuously readjusted according to the movement of the subject. See AFF as a function between Single AF and Continuous AF.

    This can easily be changed by using the dial on the right of the ECF too:

    AFS/AFF

    The AFC function below AFS/AFF continuously changes focus according to the movement of your subject.

    Some more info on these modes for clarification:

    • AFS will find focus and stay focused at that distance until you take a photo or release the shutter button. This is handy if you want to focus and then recompose your shot for instance.
    • AFF will do the same unless it detects subject movement, at which time it will temporarily switch to AFC operation in order to re-focus.
    • AFC won’t start to seek focus until you half-press the shutter, and will continually evaluate subject movement and change focus as needed.
    • With AFS you can can lock focus on a particular point, then swing the camera to get the right framing; with AFC, it will not lock focus, but will keep re-focusing. That’s why Pinpoint focusing can’t be used with AFC.

    G9 Q Menu AF mode

    AF Mode

    This allows the focusing method that suits the positions and number of the subjects to be selected. There are 6 different methods available, each suited for different scenarios.

    Face/Eye Detection

    A person’s face, eyes, and body (the entire body or the upper half of the body) are automatically detected.

    When the camera detects a person’s face or body, an AF area is displayed over the detected person.

    • Yellow: This is the AF area for the person to be brought into focus. The camera automatically selects the person.
    • White: These are the AF areas for people other than the person to be brought into focus. This type of AF area is displayed when more than one person is detected.

    When a person’s face or eyes are detected, the eye closer to the camera will be brought into focus, if the eyes are inside the yellow frame.

    The camera can detect the faces of up to 15 people. To specify the person or eye to be brought into focus, align an AF area with the desired person or eye. You can do so easily by touching a person indicated with an AF area.

    Tracking

    The camera keeps adjusting the focus and exposure automatically to the specified moving object. Perform either of the following operations to lock the subject to be tracked:

    • Use a button: aim the AF tracking frame D over the subject, and press the shutter button halfway.
    • Use the touch screen: touch the subject on the screen.

    If it fails to lock, AF area will flash in red, and disappear.

    The AF area turns yellow while the subject is locked and green while the shutter button is pressed halfway. Press the Menu button to cancel the lock.

    49 Area

    Widest setting with all AF points used.  Up to 49 AF areas can be focused. This is effective when your subject is not in the center of the screen.

    Custom Multi

    From among 49 AF areas, you can freely set the optimum shape of the AF area for the subject.

    1-Area

    The camera focuses on the subject in the AF area on the screen.

    Pinpoint

    You can achieve a more precise focus on a point that is smaller than 1-Area. If you press the shutter button halfway, the screen that lets you check the focus by enlarging it.

    G9 Q Menu Burst shot settings

    Burst Shot Setting

    You can choose your bust shot setting here for continuous drive mode.

    Burst shooting means that you’ll shoot continuously when you press the shutter button. You can apply different Burst Mode settings to Burst Shot 1 and and Burst Shot 2 Setting in these menus.

    You’ll see SH (for super high burst rates), SH pre (which actually goes back a few seconds in time and saves these images too). These SH modes are only available with the electronic shutter. Version 2 is always faster that version 1.

    Then we have High, Medium and Low which work with the Mechanical shutter too. The actual burst rate will be higher if you shoot Jpeg only.

    G9 Q Menu metering modes

    Metering Mode

    You can change how the light is metered here, and hence how a correct exposure is calculated by the camera. If you feel that the camera takes over- or underexposed images according to your personal preferences, it might be worth changing the metering mode.

    Implementation of this is quite basic in this camera, you have a total of only 3 methods to choose from:

    • Multiple: This is the method in which the camera measures the most suitable exposure by judging the allocation of brightness on the whole screen automatically.
    • Center weighted: This is the method used to focus on the subject on the center of the screen and measure the whole screen evenly.
    • Spot: This is the method to measure the subject in the spot metering target.

    G9 Q Menu exposure compensation

    Exposure Comp

    If you feel like your Lumix GX9 is over- or underexposing your images (or you want to purposely underexpose), you can dial in what is called exposure compensation here. A range of plus minus 5 is available here to correct the auto exposure of the camera.

    G9 Q Menu ISO settings

    ISO sensitivity

    Sets the upper and limit of the ISO sensitivity when you use Auto ISO or i ISO. Set upper limit to 3200, this is the range where you’ll get usable images without too much noise.

    Conclusion

    So this was a quick run-though of all the Panasonic GX9 Menu items, with pointers, tips and tricks along the way. This information should get you familiarised with this fantastic mirrorless camera. If you would like any clarification or extra information on any functionality here, let me know through the comment section below. Happy shooting!

  • Panasonic Lumix S1 settings, tips and tricks

    Panasonic Lumix S1 settings, tips, and tricks

    Introduction

    Welcome to my Panasonic Lumix S1 advanced manual with tips and tricks. This guide starts from your Menu settings and goes through all aspects of this interesting camera. I know it is a lot of information, but you’ll get the hang of it soon, I promise. If you’re looking for the S1r guide, by the way, you can find it here.

    Key Features

    • 24MP Live CMOS sensor
    • 3.68M-dot electronic viewfinder w/ 0.83x equivalent magnification
    • 1.04M-dot 3″ articulating touchscreen display
    • 5-axis in-body image stabilization with Dual I.S. 2 (CIPA rated 6.5 stops)
    • 20 fps burst w/continuous AF using the e-shutter (for ~50 frames)
    • 9 fps burst w/continuous AF using mechanical shutter (for 600 frames)
    • 80MP Raw and/or JPEG files using High-Resolution mode
    • 4K/60p UHD video capture
    • Magnesium body designed to be dust/weather-sealed
    • Dual UHS-II card slots supporting new high-speed ‘V’-rated cards
    • An assortment of 4K and 6K Photo modes and in-camera focus stacking
    • USB charge and power capability
    • Top plate LCD
    • AF joystick
    • Wi-Fi Bluetooth

    Panasonic Lumix S1 safari

    I’ll be going over the entire Menu structure in this post, and giving you tips, pointers, and tricks along the way.

    Diving into the MENU system

    When you switch on your Panasonic Lumix S1 you’ll be asked to enter a date, time and timezone. This setting is necessary, as all images captured will have a timestamp, making it easy to find your favorite pictures in the future.
    After this is setup, press the MENU button. You’ll see a range of icons and pages.
    We’ll start on page 1 of the camera Icon (photo settings)

    MENU – photo settings page 1 of 7 (image quality settings page 1)

    Panasonic S1, photo settings, image quality, page 1

    Photo Style

    This applies only to Jpeg images, and the RAW preview. You can select a color effect here.

    • Standard: standard Panasonic color and contrast rendering.
    • Vivid: Brilliant effect with high saturation and contrast.
    • Natural: Soft effect with low contrast.
    • Monochrome: Monochrome  (black and white)effect with no color shades.
    • L.Monochrome: Black-and-white effect with rich gradation and crisp black accents.
    • Scenery: An effect appropriate for sceneries with vivid blue skies and greens.
    • Portrait: An effect appropriate for portraits with a healthy and beautiful skin tone.
    • Custom 1-4: Make your own presets for easy recall when needed.
    • Cinelike D: Gives priority to the dynamic range by using a gamma curve designed to create film-like images. Suited for editing.
    • Cinelike V: Gives priority to the contrast by using a gamma curve designed to create film-like images.

    As mentioned earlier, it’s possible to create your Photo Style or customize the preset styles. This is a way of hacking into the Jpeg engine and adjusting it to your style and preferences. There are 6 areas that you can alter.

    • Contrast: add or decrease the difference between the brightness and the darkness in the picture.
    • Sharpness: add a degree of sharpness or make your images softer.
    • Noise Reduction: add noise reduction for high ISO shooting.
    • Saturation: add more vividness to the colors. Or remove some.
    • Color Tone: add a blue, orange, red or green filter to your image.
    Metering Mode

    You can change how the light is metered here, and hence how a correct exposure is calculated by the camera. If you feel that the Panasonic S1 takes over- or underexposed images according to your personal preferences, it might be worth changing the metering mode.

    Implementation of this is quite basic in this Lumix, you have a total of only 3 methods to choose from:

    • Multiple: This is the method in which the Panasonic S1 measures the most suitable exposure by judging the allocation of brightness on the whole screen automatically.
    • Center-weighted: This is the method used to focus on the subject on the center of the screen and measure the whole screen evenly.
    • Spot: This is the method to measure the subject in the spot metering target.
    • Highlight weighted: Optimise exposure of the subject for highlighted areas across the whole frame evenly.
    Aspect Ratio

    You can change the aspect ratio of your photos here. Changing the aspect ratio can be used as a way to boost your creativity, for instance, landscapes often look great with a 16:9 ratio, or for sharing on Instagram, a 1:1 crop might suit you better.

    A full-frame sensor camera has a native aspect ratio of 3:2. You should realize that changing the aspect ratio to anything else than this will crop the sensor, meaning that you’ll lose pixels. You should look at it as re-framing your image (like you can do in Lightroom or other photo editors) inside the Panasonic S1 Jpeg’s will be stored with the chosen ratio, but RAW images (although previewed with the chosen ratio), will still have the full information of the 3:2 sensor retained.

    These are the aspect ratios available:

    • 3:2: native sensor ratio
    • 4:3: the ratio used in the Panasonic micro-four-thirds cameras.
    • 16:9: for a wider looking view
    • 1:1: Square aspect ratio, mostly used for social sharing
    • 65:42: super wide crop for a panorama effect
    • 2:1: the more the better 🙂
    Picture Quality

    Probably the most important setting is Quality. You can select either Jpeg, where the RAW data from the sensor is processed by an in-camera algorithm to produce a viewable image, or save your images in this RAW format. RAW retains all the data of the sensor and is meant to be edited afterward in a desktop application like Lightroom. Saving as RAW means that you have much more creative freedom afterward to push shadows or pull highlights, sharpen and enhance your image in any way you please. A Jpeg retains only a fraction of this information, according to the algorithm inside the camera which might or might not suit your style and/or needs.

    Hence, my recommendation is always to shoot RAW or RAW Jpeg. This does mean larger files, but SD cards are inexpensive compared to your beautiful new Lumix. But some photographers prefer to shoot in Jpeg only because they are for instance not interested in post-processing images. In this case, I would set the Jpeg to the highest quality setting.

    If you only shoot in RAW, the image on the rear screen when reviewing the images are of a very low quality. When you import to the computer they are fine but it might be better to shoot both RAW and JPEG.

    Picture Size

    Picture Size sets the number of pixels for Jpeg (nor RAW). The higher the numbers of pixels, the more detail your pictures will have..

    The Panasonic S1 also has a digital teleconverter option, allowing you to zoom in by a factor of times 2 or times 4. This can be a handy feature if you don’t shoot RAW (see the next item for more info).  Thanks to in-body digital processing, the resulting Jpegs retain a larger image size than what you’d expect of de facto cropping the sensor by a factor 2 or 4. I would however only recommend using this feature if you’re a die-hard jpeg shooter, since using RAW files and developing your images in Lightroom or another app will almost always get you better results.

    Large: 46,5 MP 8368×5584 (for printing up to 41×29″)

    Medium: 23,5 MP 5952×3968 (for printing up to A2 16×20″)

    Small 12 MP 4272×2848 (for printing up to A2 16×20″)

    HLG Photo

    HLG Photo allows images to be shot with a wider dynamic range. By reproducing both glaring lights and dark shadows that are likely to be overexposed or underexposed, the Lumix S achieves rich, precise color expression as close as possible to visual memory.

    HLG Photos are produced as an HSP file. The user can play back these vibrant images on the latest Panasonic HLG-compliant 4KTV via HDMI cable connection or other HLG-compliant devices. It is also ideal for photographers’ photo presentations.

    High-Resolution Mode

    High resolution Mode menu

    Ah yes, High-Resolution Mode. Probably one of the most talked-about new camera features of the last few years. You’ll try it once, but you’ll be hard-pressed to find a real use for it in day to day shooting. What happens in High-resolution mode is that the Panasonic S1 uses the stabilized sensor to make two exposures of the same scene with a one-pixel difference (effectively moving the sensor by a pixel in the second capture). This doubles the resolution of your output file. This will only work in still scenes where there is absolutely no movement, and it is best to use a tripod to avoid camera shake.

    It is a quite simple process:

    1. Press up/down to select Start, and press MENU/SET. If there is any camera shake, the High-Res Mode icon will flash, telling you it is not possible to make a high res image.
    2. Decide on the composition, and perform recording. The screen will go dark during recording. The recording state indicator (red) will flash. Do not move the camera while the indicator is flashing. The recording will finish automatically. When the recording has finished, the Lumix S1 will combine the pictures, so it will not be able to perform the next recording for a while.
    3. Press Fn2 to end High-Res Mode.

    There is a new Mode 2, which tries to amend movement in the high res mode. This works great for leaves of trees and even water.

    Long Exposure NR

    The Panasonic S1 will automatically apply noise reduction to long exposures. This applies to both Jpeg and RAW files. A black frame is taken after your initial shot to measure the noise present. Since many environmental factors (like temperature and location) affect the amount of noise that you’ll see, this is the best way to determine what is noise in your frame. This data is then subtracted from your image for a noise-free (more-or-less) result.

    MENU – photo settings page 2 of 7 (image quality settings page 2)

    Panasonic S1, photo settings, image quality, page 2

    ISO Sensitivity

    Sets the upper and lower limits of the ISO sensitivity when you use Auto ISO or i ISO. Lower Limit should be set to 100 and upper limit to 6400, this is the range where you’ll get usable images without too much noise.

    Min. Shtr Speed

    A very important setting if you feel that the Panasonic S1 is producing blurry images for your shooting style. Birds in flight, for instance, will need a faster shutter speed than many other types of photography.

    Since most of the time, you’ll need to raise ISO to gain faster shutter speeds, Panasonic (and many other camera producers) have made this option available.  You can set it to Auto, or choose a minimum shutter speed up to 1/32000. The latter is a bit high, but as I mentioned, if you shoot action sports or for certain types of nature photography, a minimum shutter speed of 1/1000 or 1/2000 should be set. At these speeds, you can begin to “freeze” action.

    i. Dynamic Range

    This setting will change contrast and exposure when there is a big difference from the darkest area to the brightest are in your image. What happens is that the Panasonic S1 adjusts the exposure to capture more details in the highlights. You can choose between High, Standard, Low or Off.

    This naturally causes an under-exposure in the shadow areas. But inside the jpeg engine, the Lumix will compensate for this by boosting shadows. The downside here is that this will lead to more noise in the boosted regions, but because this is done with data directly coming from the sensor, it can be quite useful if you are a jpeg shooter.

    There is also an impact on RAW images because the exposure will be underexposed.

    Panasonic Lumix S1 wedding

    Vignetting Comp.

    All lenses have a lens profile that registers both distortion and shading in the corners at all apertures. These lens profiles can be applied in-camera to counter unwanted vignetting in your images. Especially important for jpeg shooters to turn this on. RAW shooters can apply these corrections later on (and with better results) in a desktop application like DXO optics Pro.

    Diffraction Compensation

    When you stop down your lens to a smaller aperture (normally from f/11 to f/22), a phenomenon called diffraction causes a loss in sharpness. It happens because light begins to disperse when passing through a small opening. When diffraction compensation is set to ON, the Panasonic Lumix S1 will add sharpening to your image to try and counter this phenomenon. You should use it if you shoot jpeg.

    Filter Settings

    The filter Settings go a step further than merely a photo style. These include artistic effects like Low Key, Sepia, Cross Process and retro stylings. You can turn them ON or OFF here, select the effect you want to use and change the settings by using the touch screen. You can also set your Panasonic S1 up to shoot one with and one without an image effect simultaneously.

    If you’re wondering how you get to Creative Control mode, you need to set the mode dial to the paint palette.Creative Control mode

    And simply press up and down to select the image effects. You can also display the selection screen by touching the Recording Mode icon in the recording screen.

    These are all the image effects available:

    • Expressive
    • High Key
    • Monochrome
    • Silky Monochrome
    • Cross Process
    • Bleach Bypass
    • Fantasy
    • Sunshine: you can select the position and size of the light source here.
    • Retro
    • Low Key
    • Dynamic Monochrome
    • Impressive Art
    • Toy Effect
    • Miniature Effect: you can select the portion of your image that is in focus here (and where the blur effect won’t happen)
    • Star Filter
    • Old Days
    • Sepia
    • Rough Monochrome
    • High Dynamic
    • Toy Pop
    • Soft Focus
    • One Point Color: you can select the color to leave in here by using a color picker.

    MENU – Camera Icon – page 3 of 7 (focus settings)

    Panasonic S1, photo settings, image quality, page 3

    AF Custom Setting (Photo)

    You can customize the operation settings of Auto Focus for stills here. These presets apply only when you’re in AFS or AFC.

    There are 4 Sets (or presets) to choose from:

    • Set 1: This is a basic general-purpose setting.
    • Set 2: This is a setting suited for scenes where the subject moves in only one direction at a constant speed.
    • Set 3: This is a setting suited for scenes where the subject moves in random directions and obstacles are likely to appear in the image.
    • Set 4: This is a setting suited for scenes where the speed of the subject changes significantly.

    There are three areas in which these presets can be tweaked according to your preferences:

    • AF Sensitivity: increase or decrease how sensitive the autofocus readjustment reacts to the movement of your subject.
    • AF Area Sensitivity: increase or decrease how sensitive the autofocus readjustment reacts to your subject moving out of the selected AF area.
    • Moving Object prediction: For still subjects, you can prevent defocusing caused by a sudden movement of the subject.
    AF Assist light

    AF assist lamp will illuminate the subject when the shutter button is pressed half-way making it easier for the Panasonic S1 to focus when recording in low light conditions. The range is about 1 meter.

    Focus Peaking

    In-focus portions (portions on the screen with clear outlines) are highlighted when the focus is being adjusted manually. A great focussing aide for manual focussing. It can be set to High or Low.

    1-Area AF moving speed

    This changes the speed of the autofocus point selection so that it’s easier to move your single autofocus point across the frame.

    MENU – Camera Icon – page 4 of 7 (flash settings page 1)

    Panasonic S1, photo settings, image quality, page 4

    Flash Mode

    You’ll need to override iAuto and set your S1 to P, A, S or M to have these options.

    Forced Flash On: The flash is activated every time regardless of the recording conditions.

    Slow Sync: when taking pictures against a dark background landscape, this feature will slow the shutter speed when the flash is activated. The dark background landscape will appear brighter.

    Forced Flash Off: The flash is not activated in any recording conditions.

    2nd Curtain Synchro: activates the flash just before the shutter closes when taking pictures of moving objects such as cars using slow shutter speed.

    Firing Mode

    Select whether to set the flash output automatically (TTL) or manually.

    Firing mode cannot be set when using a flash (DMW-FL580L/DMW-FL360L/DMW-FL200L: optional). It can be set only when using an external flash that does not use a battery (supplied with some models of Panasonic digital cameras).

    Flash Adjust

    just the flash brightness when pictures were taken with the flash are over or underexposed plus or minus 3EV.

    Flash Synchro

    you can Synchronise the output of the flash to the Exposure Compensation.

    Manual Flash adjust

    Adjust the flash output manually on the flash or not.

    Auto Exposure comp.

    The Panasonic S1 automatically optimizes the flash output for the Exposure Compensation value.

    Red-eye removal

    If you use a flash when using Red-Eye Reduction, the Lumix will automatically detect red-eye and corrects the picture.

    Wireless

    Flashes compatible with this camera (DMW-FL580L (DC-G9)/DMW-FL360L/DMW-FL200L: optional) come with the wireless recording function. You’ll need a hotshoe trigger like this to use this functionality. There is no built-in trigger in case you’re wondering.

    MENU – Camera Icon – page 5 of 7 (Flash settings page 2)

    Panasonic S1, photo settings, image quality, page 5

    Wireless channel

    With this function, you can separately control the firing of three flash groups and the flash attached to the hot shoe of the Panasonic S1.

    Wireless FP

    During wireless recording, an external flash fires an FP flash (high-speed repetition of flash firing). This firing allows recording with the flash at fast shutter speed.

    Communication Light

    Setting the output of communication light.

    Wireless setup

    Set up different groups and Flash modes for each group for ultimate control when using multiple flashes.

    MENU – Camera Icon – page 6 of 7 (Other Photo settings page 1)

    Panasonic S1, photo settings, image quality, page 6

    Bracketing

    The Bracket function allows you to take multiple pictures while automatically adjusting a setting like exposure or aperture by pressing the shutter button.

    Possible bracket types:

    • Exposure Bracket: Press the shutter button and the Lumix will sequentially take multiple images with different exposures. You can select the number of pictures to be taken and the exposure range (from 1/3 EV to 1 EV stops difference).
    • Aperture Bracket: Press the shutter button and the Lumix will sequentially take multiple images at different apertures. Either select all apertures or several shots (3-5) within a selected range.
    • Focus Bracket: Press the shutter button and the Panasonic S1 will sequentially take multiple images with different focus positions. You can select the distance between focus positions, the number of exposures and the sequence from far to near or the other way around.
    • White Balance Bracket: Press the shutter button and the Lumix S1 will take three pictures with different white balance settings automatically
    • White Balance Bracket (color temperature): Press the shutter button once to take three pictures with different White Balance Color Temperature values automatically. You can also set the correction range by touching the up/down slider on the screen.
    Silent Mode

    Disables operational sounds and output of light at once for completely silent stealth mode shooting with the Panasonic S1.

    Panasonic Lumix S1 fashion

    Image Stabilizer

    The Panasonic Lumix S1 has a stabilized sensor. The sensor inside the Lumix S1 is suspended on a magnetic field and can compensate for movements like the minute shakes of your hands or any other kind of movement. There are also many lenses available with an optical image stabilization unit, that physically move glass elements around inside the lens to do the same. Both systems have their pros and cons, and it is generally accepted that a stabilized sensor works better for wide-angle lenses (below 40mm) whilst optical lens stabilization is more efficient for the tele range. It is also possible to use both systems at the same time (called Dual I.S.), where you’ll take advantage of the best of both worlds.

    It’s also possible to use the in-body sensor stabilization with older, manual primes that don’t relay EXIF information (like most importantly focal length in this case).  You’ll need to manually set the focal length in the Focal length Set function to get optimal performance.

    There is also a new Auto mode where camera shake is corrected for up/down and left/right movement. This auto mode detects the panning direction automatically.

    Burst Shot 1 Setting

    The drive mode dial has two options for burst shooting. Burst shooting means that you’ll shoot continuously when you press the shutter button. You can apply different Burst Mode settings to Burst Shot 1 and Burst Shot 2 Setting in these menus.

    You’ll see SH (for super high burst rates), SH pre (which actually goes back a few seconds in time and saves these images too). These SH modes are only available with the electronic shutter. Version 2 is always faster that version 1.

    Then we have High, Medium and Low which work with the Mechanical shutter too. The actual burst rate will be higher if you shoot Jpeg only.

    Burst Shot 2 Setting

    You can assign any of these presets to 1 or 2 on the mode dial of the Panasonic Lumix S1.

    Shutter Type

    You can use either the mechanical or electronic shutter, or 50/50, or let the Panasonic S1 decide what is most appropriate. The electronic shutter has a maximum speed of 1/32000 sec, the mechanical shutter can go up to 1/8000 second and if you use the Electronic first curtain shutter, you can only go up to 1/2000 second.

    • AUTO: Switches the shutter type automatically depending on the recording condition and shutter speed.
    • MECH: Takes pictures in Mechanical Shutter Mode.
    • EFC: Takes pictures in Electronic Front Curtain Mode.
    • ELEC. : Takes pictures in Electronic Shutter Mode.
    • ELEC.+NR: uses a black frame to apply noise reduction

    Remember that in artificial light or when using a flash, you best use the mechanical shutter only to avoid artifacts.

    Shutter Delay

    To reduce the influence of hand shake or shutter vibration, the shutter is released after the specified time has passed. 1, 2, 4 or 8-second delay is selectable. Keep your hands steady and don’t use this delay, else you might miss that critical moment.

    Ex. Tele Conv.

    You can digitally enlarge pictures without too much quality deterioration with this function. Only for jpeg use, you can extend the range of your lens by times 1.4 or 1.6 using this function.

    MENU – Camera Icon – page 7 of 7 (Other Photo settings page 2)

    Panasonic S1, photo settings, image quality, page 7

    Time Lapse/Animation

    You can take a sequential number of images with relatively long delays in between to achieve a time-lapse movie or stop motion/animation. You’ll need to turn the drive mode dial to Time Lapse for this:

    time lapse

    You can choose between Time Lapse or Animation in this menu.

    Time Lapse:
    1. Switch to Time Lapse Shot if it is not selected.
    2. change the start time and shooting interval according to your preferences.
    3. press te shutter half way to exit the menu.
    4. press the shutter to start your time-lapse.
    Stop motion/Animation
    1. Switch to Stop Motion Animation
    2. Change auto shooting and shooting interval according to your preferences
    3. press te shutter half way to exit the menu.
    4. press the shutter to start your time-lapse.
    5. move the subject per frame
    6. press the folder menu to end the recording
    Self Timer

    The self-timer function is self-explanatory.  If you want to use this function, you’ll need to set the drive mode to:

    In this menu, you can select what type of self-timer you’d like to use: a 10-second delay and one-shot, 10 seconds with 3 shots with 2-second intervals or a 2-second delay, all after pressing the shutter.

    Flicker Decrease

    The shutter speed can be fixed to reduce the flicker or striping in your photos. 1/50,/1/60,1/100 or 1/120 seconds are available.

    6K/4K Photo

    6K/4K photo mode is designed to help you to capture fleeting moments by letting you shoot at an incredible 30fps (60fps for 4K mode). Continuous autofocus mode is automatically activated and it draws on 4K/6K video technology to shoot 18 MP images at this fast frame rate. You’re recording a video where you can extract the frames in-camera.

    There are three 6K Photo Modes, 6K Burst, 6K Burst (S/S) and 6K Pre-Burst. These modes determine how and when the footage will be recorded.

    • In 6K Burst mode, the Panasonic S1 shoots 6K footage for as long as you hold down the shutter release button.
    • In 6K Burst (S/S), S/S stands for Start/Stop and recording is started and ended with a press of the shutter release.
    • 6K Pre-Burst mode is useful for short bursts of action because it only records for 2 seconds. However, the camera starts scanning the moment it’s active and it records the 30 images from the 1 second before you pressing the shutter button as well as the 30 from the 1 second after you pressed it.

    4K is the same, except it allows you to go up to 60 frames per second.

    Extracting stills from the 6K Photo Mode footage is pretty easy as follows:

    1. Press the play button to located the files. Clips recorded in 6K Photo Mode are marked with the 6K Photo icon to make the easy to identify.
      Once you’ve found the clip you want, either tap the 6K Photo Icon on-screen or the Up navigation key.
    2.  If you have a long clip with fleeting moments of action you may like to use the slide bar at the top to quickly scroll to an interesting bit of footage. Alternatively, there’s a playback option (button Fn1) that you can use to play and pause the movie.
    3. Once you’ve found the area you’re interested in, tap the Frame View Icon to see a scrollable stack of frames, just swipe right and left to locate the best shots.
    4. When you find an image you like, tap the Menu/Set button or 6K Icon to save the image. Images are saved as jpegs.

    it’s possible to save all the frames from 5-second sections of your 6K movie. To do this:

    1. Tap the Menu button and scroll down to Playback (the 6th tab), then scroll to the second page of options and select 6K/4K PHOTO Bulk Saving.
    2. Then swipe on the screen until you find the clip that you want to extract stills from.
    3. Now use the same on-screen movie navigation controls as you used before to find the first frame of the 5 seconds that you want to pull the stills from and tap the 6K Photo icon to save it and the image from the next 5 seconds.

    Panasonic Lumix S1 editorial

    Post Focus

    Post focus means controlling your focus point afterward. This might sound like a sci-fi concept, but it’s quite simple if you know what is happening. The Panasonic S1 performs a burst of shots ( same picture quality and system as the fore-mentioned 6K/4K photo recording) while automatically shifting the focus to different areas. After the recording, you can select your desired focus point from the list of 30(6K) or 60(4K) per second captures. It works best with scenes with little to no movement, as having someone move around would, of course, add another degree of shifting focus points to the mix.

    In the same way, focus stacking can be achieved. Focus stacking is a method of making an image that are sharp across the frame. By recording the same scene multiple times with different focus points and later on combining all these images, you can get an image that is sharp across the frame. This is a technique often used in macro photography where your depth of field is very shallow (only a small part, where the focus lies, is sharp) because of the nature of shooting at close distances. But it can also be used for other types of photography like landscapes.

    It’s recommended to use a very fast SD card to achieve these high frame rates by the way.

    You’ll need to set your drive mode dial to this setting:

    Post Focus/ Focus stacking

    Now press the shutter button halfway so the Lumix can detect the possible focus areas, and then fully press the shooter to record the scene in burst mode (which is video as I mentioned earlier).

    For post focus:

    Select your series of images you just captured, there is an icon that reassures you this is a batch of images to avoid any confusion:

    post focus icon

    Once selected, all you need to do is use the touch screen to select the focus point you desire. And now touch this icon to save:

    save post focus image

    The Focus stacking function can be performed in-camera. This method also starts with selecting the series of images you just captured. Then you press the FN1 button and you’ll be in the focus stacking menu. There are two types of merging, Auto and range. Auto automatically selects the best images to merge into a sharper composite image, and Range allows you to select a specified focus range with your finger on the touch screen. When you have done this, touch the icon on the bottom right of the screen and the Lumix S1 will save the resulting composite image with the EXIF data from the closest focussed image.

    Self Timer

    The self-timer function is self-explanatory.  If you actually want to use this function, you’ll need to set the drive mode to:

    self timer

    In this menu, you can select what type of self timer you’d like to use: a 10-second delay and one-shot, 10 seconds with 3 shots with 2-second intervals or a 2-second delay, all after pressing the shutter.

    MENU – Video Menu- page 1 of 7 (also called Video Image Quality 1)

    Panasonic S1, video menu, page 1

    Exposure Mode

    Switch your Panasonic S1 to P, A, S or M. for full control over shutter speed, Iso and aperture.

    Photo Style

    You can select a color effect here.

    • Standard: standard Panasonic color and contrast rendering.
    • Vivid: Brilliant effect with high saturation and contrast.
    • Natural: Soft effect with low contrast.
    • Monochrome: Monochrome  (black and white)effect with no color shades.
    • L.Monochrome: Black-and-white effect with rich gradation and crisp black accents.
    • Scenery: An effect appropriate for sceneries with vivid blue skies and greens.
    • Portrait: An effect appropriate for portraits with a healthy and beautiful skin tone.
    • Custom 1-4: Make your own presets for easy recall when needed.
    • Cinelike D: Gives priority to the dynamic range by using a gamma curve designed to create film-like images. Suited for editing.
    • Cinelike V: Gives priority to the contrast by using a gamma curve designed to create film-like images.

    As mentioned earlier, it’s possible to create your own Photo Style or customise the preset styles. This is basically a way of hacking into the Jpeg engine and adjusting it to your own style and preferences. There are 6 areas that you can alter.

    • Contrast: add or decrease the difference between the brightness and the darkness in the picture.
    • Sharpness: add a degree of sharpness or make your images softer.
    • Noise Reduction: add noise reduction for high ISO shooting.
    • Saturation: add more vividness to the colours. Or remove some.
    • Color Tone: add a blue, orange, red or green filter to your image.
    Metering Mode

    You can change how the light is metered here, and hence how a correct exposure is calculated by the S1. If you feel that the camera takes over- or underexposed images according to your personal preferences, it might be worth changing the metering mode.

    Implementation of this is quite basic in this camera, you have a total of only 3 methods to choose from:

    • Multiple: This is the method in which the Panasonic S1 measures the most suitable exposure by judging the allocation of brightness on the whole screen automatically.
    • Center weighted: This is the method used to focus on the subject on the center of the screen and measure the whole screen evenly.
    • Spot: This is the method to measure the subject in the spot metering target.
    • Highlight weighted: Optimise exposure of the subject for highlighted areas of the frae Address measure the whole frame evenly.
    ISO sensitivity (video)

    Sets the upper and lower limits of the ISO sensitivity when you use Auto ISO or i ISO. Lower Limit should be set to 100 and upper limit to 3200, this is the range where you’ll get usable images without too much noise.

    Flicker Decrease

    The shutter speed can be fixed to reduce the flicker or striping in your movies. 1/50,/1/60,1/100 or 1/120 second are available.

    i. Dynamic

    This setting will change contrast and exposure when there is a big difference from the darkest area to the brightest are in your image. What really happens is that the camera adjusts the exposure in order to capture more details in the highlights. You can choose between High, Standard, Low or Off.

    This naturally causes an under-exposure in the shadow areas. But inside the jpeg engine, the Panasonic S1 will compensate for this by boosting shadows. The downside here is that this will obviously lead to more noise in the boosted regions, but because this is done with data directly coming from the sensor, it can be quite useful.

    Shading Comp.

    All lenses have a lens profile that registers both distortion and shading in the corners at all apertures. These lens profiles can be applied in-camera to counter unwanted vignetting in your images.

    Diffraction Compensation

    When you stop down your lens to a smaller aperture (normally from f/11 to f/22), a phenomenon called diffraction causes a loss in sharpness. It happens because light begins to disperse when passing through a small opening. When diffraction compensation is set to ON, the Panasonic S1 will add sharpening to your image to try and counter this phenomenon. You should use it if you shoot jpeg.

    MENU -Video Menu- page 2 of 7 (also called Video Image Quality 2)

    Panasonic S1, video menu, page 2

    Filter Settings

    The filter Settings go a step further than merely a photo style. These include artistic effects like Low Key, Sepia, Cross Process and retro stylings. You can turn them ON or OFF here, select the effect you want to use and change the settings by using the touch screen. You can also set your Panasonic Lumix S1 up to shoot one with and one without an image effect simultaneously.

    If you’re wondering how you get to Creative Control mode, you need to set the mode dial to the paint palette.Creative Control mode

    And simply press up and down to select the image effects. You can also display the selection screen by touching the Recording Mode icon in recording screen.

    These are all the image effects available:

    • Expressive
    • High Key
    • Monochrome
    • Silky Monochrome
    • Cross Process
    • Bleach Bypass
    • Fantasy
    • Sunshine: you can select the position and size of the light source here.
    • Retro
    • Low Key
    • Dynamic Monochrome
    • Impressive Art
    • Toy Effect
    • Miniature Effect: you can select the portion of your image that is in focus here (and where the blur effect won’t happen)
    • Star Filter
    • Old Days
    • Sepia
    • Rough Monochrome
    • High Dynamic
    • Toy Pop
    • Soft Focus
    • One Point Color: you can select the color to leave in here by using a color picker.
    Auto Exposure in P/A/S/M

    Sets auto exposure settings for video in these modes.

    Panasonic Lumix S1 architecture

    CreativeVideo combined set

    As with photography, aperture and shutter control dramatically change the way video looks.

    A film-maker aiming for a particular look will select an f-stop giving the required depth of field, or a shutter speed portraying sharp, clean movement, or maybe a soft motion-blur effect. The Hybrid camera allows such control during video mode, but there are limitations. Because the native frame rate of video is 25fps, the slowest shutter speed available is 1/25th sec.

    The rule of thumb for choosing shutter speed is based on the ‘shutter angle’ used in cinemas for projecting film. Until very recently, this was 180 degrees; it essentially means each frame is flashed twice on screen, which is one reason why film looks as it does in cinemas. If you are keen for a ‘cinematic’ look, not only should you shoot at 24fps, but also keep your shutter at 1/48th sec – on a DSLR/DSLM, the closest to this is 1/50thsec.

    You can use this ‘doubling rule’ when shooting at 25 or 50fps, but if you want to try a faster shutter for sharper movement capture, simply experiment! What works best for you? Just be aware that to achieve a bright enough exposure when sticking to a minimum 1/50th sec shutter speed, you may need to select a higher ISO or, better still, use very fast lenses.

    MENU – Video Menu – page 3 of 7  (Image Format settings)

    Panasonic S1, video menu, page 3

    Rec Quality
    MP4:
    • 4K, 60p 420/8bit/LongGOP, 150Mbps, LPCM
    • 4K, 30p 420/8bit/LongGOP, 1O0Mbps, LPCM
    • 4K, 24p 420/8bit/LongGOP, 1O0Mbps, LPCM
    • FHD, 60p 420/8bit/LongGOP, 28Mbps, AAC
    • FHD, 30p 420/8bit/LongGOP, 20Mbps, AAC
    High Speed Video
    • 180/30p FHD
    • 120/30p FHD
    • 60/30p 4K
    • 48/23,98p 4K
    Rec File Format

    MP4 or AVHCD.

    Luminance Level

    Select the luminance range to match the use of video.

    MENU – Video Menu – page 4 of 7 (focus settings)

    Panasonic S1, video menu, page 4

    AF Custom Setting (Video)

    You can customise the operation settings of Auto Focus for stills here. These presets apply only when you’re in AFS or AFC.

    There are 4 Sets (or presets) to choose from:

    • Set 1: This is a basic general purpose setting.
    • Set 2: This is a setting suited for scenes where the subject moves in only one direction at a constant speed.
    • Set 3: This is a setting suited for scenes where the subject moves in random directions and obstacles are likely to appear in the image.
    • Set 4: This is a setting suited for scenes where the speed of the subject changes significantly.

    There are three areas in which these presets can tweaked according to your preferences:

    • AF Sensitivity: increase or decrease how sensitive the autofocus readjustment reacts to movement of your subject.
    • AF Area Sensitivity: increase or decrease how sensitive the autofocus readjustment reacts to your subject moving out of the selected AF area.
    • Moving Object prediction: For still subjects, you can prevent defocusing caused by a sudden movement of the subject.
    Continuous AF

    Focusing changes depending on the Focus Mode setting and the Continuous AF setting in this menu.

    AFS/AFC:
    • On: The S1 automatically keeps focusing on subjects during recording.
    • Off: The camera maintains the focus position at the start of recording.
    MF

    You can use manual focus.

    Focus Peaking

    Turn on Focus Peaking when in Manual Focus. Focus Peaking helps you figure out where fine focus lies thanks to a type of coloured grain or noise in those areas.

    1-Area AF moving speed

    This changes the speed of the autofocus point selection so that it’s easier to move your single autofocus point across the frame.

    MENU – Video Menu – page 5 of 7 (audio settings)

    Panasonic S1, video menu, page 5

    Sound Rec Level Disp.

    Select if you want to display the microphone level on the recording screen.

    Sound Rec Level Adj.

    Adjust the sound input level to 19 different levels (-12 dB to +6 dB).

    Sound Rec Level Limiter

    The Panasonic Lumix S1 adjusts the sound input level automatically, minimising sound distortion (clipping noise) when the volume is too high.

    Wind Noise Canceller

    This will reduce the wind noise coming into the built-in microphone while maintaining sound quality. You can choose either High, Standard or Off. This function works only with the built-in microphone.

    Mic Socket

    Selects which input is used for the mic socket.

    Special Mic.

    Only available only when you use an external stereo shotgun microphone like the Panasonic DMW-MS2. You have a few options on how to use a microphone like this:

    • Stereo: Allows stereo recording of sound over a wide area.
    • Lens Auto: Allows recording within the range that is set automatically according to the angle of view of the lens.
    • Shotgun: Allows recording from one direction by shutting out background and surrounding noise.
    • S.Shotgun: Allows recording within the range even narrower than that of SHOTGUN.
    • Manual: Allows recording within the range you set manually.
    XLR mic adapter setting

    For use withe the Panasonic DMW-XLR1 XLR Microphone Adapter.

    Panasonic Lumix S1 portrait

    Sound Output

    You can record motion pictures while hearing the sounds that are being recorded by connecting a commercially available headphones to this unit.

    You can switch the sound output:

    • Realtime: Actual sound without time lag. It can be different to the audio recorded in the movie.
    • Rec Sound: Sound that is being recorded in motion pictures. The audio may be output slower than the actual audio. If you use the HDMI output during recording, the setting is fixed to this.

    MENU – Video Menu – page 6 of 7 (Monitor and display settings)

    Panasonic S1, video menu, page 6

    HDMI Rec Output

    Sets the picture quality for the HDMI output. Bit Mode, Info Display and 4K down convert are available.

    MENU – Video Menu – page 7 of 7 (other video settings)

    Panasonic S1, video menu, page 7

    Image stabiliser

    Image sensor stabilisation can permanently on or off for video, as well as a type of electronic stabilisation. Boost IS will give you the maximum stabilisation and the cost of some image quality.

    Image Area of Video

    You can choose between the full sensor surface, an APS-C size sensor space when using an APS-C sensor. It’s also possible to close a pixel by pixel surface.

    MENU – Custom Menu – Page 1 of 9 (image quality settings)

    Panasonic S1, custom menu, page 1

    Photo style settings

    It’s now possible to show or hide certain photo styles according to your own preferences.  There are now also up to ten custom photo styles that you can tweak according to your own preferences or even start from scratch.

    You can now also and ISO sensitivity and white balance into a custom profile in the “My Photo Style Settings” tab. So you can build a custom look that includes these settings.

    ISO Increments

    Choose the increments of exposure changes between 1/3 EV or 1 EV.

    Extended ISO

    ISO sensitivity can be set up to minimum of ISO 100. Base ISO of the sensor is 200, so this extended ISO basically halves this in software, with a slight decrease in quality.

    Exposure Offset Adjust.

    Adjust what the Panasonic S1 determines to be a good exposure by plus or minus 1 EV. This can be changed for all the metering modes being Multi Metering, Center Weighted, Spot and Highlight Weighted.

    Panasonic Lumix S1 travel photography

    Color Space

    Select either sRGB or Adobe RGB here. Adobe RGB has a greater range of reproducible colors than sRGB, so it might be worth looking into this color space if you print to paper a lot. But remember that you’ll also need a monitor capable of reproducing the larger color range too. And this can often lead to problems when converting to sRGB or editing your images in external applications. Because of all this, I have it set to sRGB.

    Exposure Comp. Reset

    An exposure value can be reset when the Recording Mode is changed or the camera is turned off.

    MENU – Custom Menu – Page 2 of 9 (focus and shutter settings page 2)

    Panasonic S1, custom menu, page 2

    Focus/Shutter priority

    Set whether to give priority to focus or shutter release during Auto Focus. Setting it to Focus priority means you won’t be able to take an image if focus is not acquired. Release will.

    Focus Switching for Vert / Hor

    Memorises separate positions for horizontal and vertical orientations (two vertical orientations, left and right, are available).

    AF/AE Lock Hold

    When ON is selected, focus and exposure stays locked even if you press and release AF/AE LOCK. To clear the lock, press AF/AE LOCK again.

    AF+MF

    When AF Lock is ON (press the shutter button halfway with the focus mode set to AFS or set AF Lock using AF/AE LOCK), you can make fine adjustments to the focus manually.

    MF Assist

    Sets the display method of MF Assist (enlarged screen) on the Panasonic S1.

    MF assist settings

    MF Guide

    Sets whether MF Assist (enlarged screen) will appear in a windowed screen display or in a full screen display. And also your focus distance in feet or meter.

    Focus ring Lock

    Locks the focus ring so you won’t accidentally change focus during shooting.

    Show/Hide AF mode

    Allows you to select whether you’ll see the AF mode selected on your screen or EVF. If you don’t use certain focus modes, you can disable them her so they won’t show up in the navigation window.

    MENU – Custom Menu – Page 3 of 9 (focus and shutter settings page 2)

    Panasonic S1, custom menu, page 3

    Pinpoint AF Setting

    The screen will be zoomed in when the shutter is pressed halfway, selectable in full screen or in a window.

    AF-point Scope Setting

    The methods for displaying the magnification window. View magnification full screen or picture in picture.

    Shutter AF

    Set whether or not the focus is adjusted automatically when the shutter button is pressed halfway.

    Half Press Release

    The shutter will immediately fire when the shutter button is pressed halfway when this is ON.

    Quick AF

    As long as the camera is held steady, the Panasonic S1 will automatically adjust the focus and focus adjustment will then be quicker when the shutter is pressed. You’ll get better AF performance at the expense of battery life.

    Panasonic Lumix S1 street photography

    Eye Sensor AF

    The Panasonic S1 wil automatically start autofocus when the eye sensor is activated.

    Loop Movement Focus Frame

    When setting the AF area position or the MF Assist display position, you can now loop the position from one edge to the other edge of the screen.

    AFC start point

    Selects whether you want to see a visual representation of you selected AF area on screen.

    MENU – Custom Menu – Page 4 of 9 (operation settings page 1)

    Panasonic S1, custom menu, page 4

    Q.MENU

    In Custom operations, you can customise the Q Menu according to your liking.

    You can add a maximum of 15 preferred settings to the Quick Menu.

    1. Press Q.MENU to display the Quick Menu.
    2. Press down to select the custom tool and then press MENU/SET.
    3. Press left/right arrow to select the menu item in the top row and then press MENU/SET.
    4. Press left/right to select the empty space in the bottom row and then press MENU/SET. (You can also set the menu item by dragging it from the top row to the bottom row)
    5. Press return to switch to the recording screen.
    Touch Settings

    Enables/disables the Touch operation.

    • Touch Screen: All touch operations are turned on.
    • Touch Tab: Operations of tabs are enabled.
    • Touch AF: Operation to bring the subject you touch into focus AF or adjust the focus and brightness AF+AE are enabled.
    • Touch Pad AF: Operation to move the AF area by touching the monitor when the viewfinder is in use.
    Lock lever Setting

    You can control which functionality will be locked when you use the lock lever on the back of the camera body. Cursor, Joystick, touch screen, dial and DISP button are selectable.

    Fn Button Set

    You can assign various features, such as recording functions, to specific buttons and icons as well as the function lever.

    1. Press up/down to select the function button you want to assign a function to and then press MENU/SET.
    2. Press up/down to select the function you want to assign and then press [MENU/SET].
    FN Lever Setting

    You are also free to assign any function to the FN lever using the same method as Fn Button set.

    Panasonic Lumix S1 manual

    WB/ISO/Expo button

    Select the functionality of these buttons.

    Iso Displayed settings

    Customise the Iso settings on the display.

    Exposure comp Display. setting

    An exposure value can be reset when the Recording Mode is changed or the Panasonic S1 is turned off.

    MENU – Custom Menu – Page 5 of 9 (operation settings page 2)

    Panasonic S1, custom menu, page 5

    Dial Set.

    Assign Dial (F/SS): Assigns the operations of the aperture value and shutter speed in Manual Exposure Mode.

    Rotation (F/SS): Changes the rotation direction of the dials for adjusting the aperture value and shutter speed.

    Control Dial Assignment: It sets the item to be assigned to the control dial while the recording screen is displayed.

    Exposure Comp.: Assigns the Exposure Compensation to the front dial or rear dial so that you can directly adjust it.

    Dial Operation Switch Setup: Sets the items to be assigned temporarily to the front/rear dials when you press the function button to which Dial Operation Switch is assigned.

    Joystick Setting

    The joystick provides the same functions as the cursor buttons MENU/SET button.

    Illuminate button

    Sets the functionality of the illuminated button.

    ON1: activate illuminated buttons constantly.

    ON2: button is illuminated only when the backlight button of the Status-LCD is pressed.

    OFF: the illuminated buttons are turned off permanently.

    Video Rec. Button

    Enables/disables the motion picture button.

    MENU – Custom Menu – Page 6 of 9 (monitor and display settings page 2)

    Panasonic S1, custom menu, page 6

    Auto Review

    Displays a picture immediately after it is taken.

    Constant Preview

    You can check the effects of the chosen aperture and shutter speed on the recording screen in Manual Exposure Mode. Some camera makers call this Live View.

    Level gauge

    Enable the level gauge functionality.

    Photo grid line

    Enables a grid as a composition guide for your photography.

    Framing outline

    Sets a frame for videography.

    Center marker

    The center of the recording screen will be displayed as [+].

    AF Area Display

    Selects whether you want to see a visual representation of you selected AF area on screen.

    MENU – Custom Menu – Page 7 of 9 (monitor and display settings page 2)

    Panasonic S1, custom menu, page 7

    Live View Boost

    Boosts the performance of the Live View Display.

    Monochrome Live View

    You can display the recording screen in black and white. Recorded images will not be affected.

    Night Mode

    This displays the monitor and viewfinder screens in red. It reduces the difficulty in seeing the surroundings caused by brightly-lit screens at night or in any low-light environment.

    LVF/Monitor Disp. Set

    You can select separate screen display styles for the viewfinder and the monitor.

    Expo.Meter

    Display the exposure meter.

    • Set to ON to display the Exposure meter when performing Program Shift, setting aperture, and setting shutter speed.
    • Unsuitable areas of the range are displayed in red.
    • When the Exposure meter is not displayed, switch the display information for screen by pressing DISP.
    • If no operations are performed for approximately 4 seconds, the Exposure meter disappears.
    Panasonic Lumix S1 depth of field
    Focal Length

    select whether or not to display focal length information.

    Photo/video Preview

    Selects the functionality of the Photo/Video Preview.

    Photos/Videos remaining

    Show how many photos or how many minutes of video remain on your SD card.

    MENU – Custom Menu – Page 8 of 9 (monitor and display settings page 3)

    Panasonic S1, custom menu, page 8

    Show/Hide monitor layout

    Show the monitor layout or not.

    Blinking Highlights

    When the Auto Review function is activated or when playing back, white saturated areas appear blinking in black and white.

    Zebra Pattern

    Indicates parts that may become white saturated through overexposure in a zebra pattern. You can select a brightness value between 50% and 105%. In Zebra 2, you can select OFF. If you select 100% or 105%, only the areas that are already white saturated are displayed in a zebra pattern. The smaller the value is, the wider the brightness range to be processed as a zebra pattern will be.

    HLG view assist.

    Assist with the exposure of HLG images.

    Sheer Overlay

    Allows you to display a previously taken image with opacity so that you can line-up another shot.

    I.S. status scope

    You can activate a type of scope with a level meter and a green indicator that shows you how stable you are. This can be useful even on a tripod to see how stable your rig is for long exposures.

    MENU – Custom Menu – Page 9 of 9 (lens and other settings)

    Panasonic S1, custom menu, page 9

    Lens Focus resume

    Resume the focus point of the lens when the Panasonic S1 is switched off or recording is resumed.

    Focus Ring Control

    Determines the speed of the focus ring between linear and non-linear. You can basically setup the focus ring in any way you wish according to your video style.

    MENU – Setup Menu – page 1 of 6 (Card/File settings)

    Panasonic S1, setup menu, page 1

    Card Format

    Format the card before recording a picture with this unit.

    Since data cannot be recovered after formatting, make sure to back up necessary data in advance.

    Double Slot Function

    Set the way recording to the card slots 1 and 2 is performed.

    • Relay Rec: Relays recording to the other card slot even after the first card runs out of free space during recording. Records same images to the two cards.
    • Backup Rec: Records same images to the two cards.
    • Allocation Rec: Allows you to specify the card slot to be used for recording for different image formats like Jpeg on one and RAW on the other.
    Folder/File Settings

    Set the folder and file name patterns in which images are to be saved.

    File Number Reset

    Reset the file number of the next recording to 0001.

    Copyright Information

    Add copyright information to the EXIF data of each photo. This can include copyright as well as photographer information.

    MENU – Setup Menu – page 2 of 6 (Monitor/Display settings page 1)

    Panasonic S1, setup menu, page 2

    Power Save Mode

    These settings will determine the way the camera handles inactivity on your part to save battery life.

    • Sleep Mode: The Panasonic S1 is automatically turned off if the camera has not been used for the time selected on the setting.
    • Sleep Mode(Wi-Fi): The camera is automatically turned off if it is not connected to a Wi-Fi network and has not been used for 15 minutes.
    • Auto LVF/ Monitor Off: The monitor/viewfinder is automatically turned off if the Panasonic S1 has not been used for the time selected on the setting.
    • Power Save LVF Shooting: If you display the monitor using the viewfinder/monitor automatic switching function, the camera will turn off automatically after being left idle.
    Monitor Frame Rate

    This sets the monitor frame rate to either 120fps or 60fps. 120fps will run smoother at the cost of battery life.

    LVF Frame Rate

    This sets the viewfinder frame rate, to either 60 or 120fps. Again, at 120 fps you’ll see movement smoother at the cost of battery life.

    Monitor Settings

    Brightness, color, or red or blue tint of the Monitor/viewfinder can be adjusted.

    Monitor Backlight

    These settings will affect how and when brightness of the monitor is adjusted.

    Auto: The brightness is adjusted automatically depending on how bright it is around the Lumix S1.

    • Mode 1: Makes the monitor brighter than normal.
    • Mode 2: Set the monitor to the standard brightness.
    • Mode 3: Makes the monitor brighter than standard.
    Remaining Battery Level

    This setting enables  either a percentage display or a battery with bar display to show remaining power in your battery.

    Status LCD

    You can set the LCD Backlight to High, Low or Off.

    Eye Sensor

    Sensitivity will This will set the sensitivity of the eye sensor.

    LVF/Monitor Switch will This will set the method for switching between the monitor and viewfinder.

    MENU – Setup Menu – page 3 of 6 (Monitor/Display settings page 2)

    Panasonic S1, setup menu, page 3

    Level Gauge Assist

    Adjust: Hold the Panasonic S1 in a horizontal position, and press MENU/SET. The level gauge will be adjusted.

    Level Gauge Value Reset: Restores the default level gauge setting.

    MENU – Setup Menu – page 4 of 6 (input and output settings)

    MENU → Setup Menu → page 4 of 6

    Beep

    This allows you to set the electronic sound and the electronic shutter sound. Remember this will be off if you’re in Silent Mode!

    Headphone volume

    If you’re using a headphone, you can adjust the volume here.

    Wi-Fi

    It’s possible to control your Panasonic S1 with a smartphone or a tablet, display pictures on TV, print Wirelessly, Send images to a PC or use Web Services from Panasonic all via WiFi.

    To use the Wi-Fi function on the Panasonic S1, a wireless access point is needed off course.

    By default, Wi-Fi is assigned to the Fn6 button when the camera is in Recording Mode, while it is assigned to Fn1 when the Lumix is in Playback Mode. You can assign it to any button you want.

    When you want to connect to WiFi, simply press this button.

    Wi-Fi Setup

    Priority of Remote Device: Sets either the S1 or the smartphone as the priority control device to be used during remote recording.

    Wi-Fi Password: You can improve security by enabling password entry for a direct connection to a smartphone.

    LUMIX CLUB: Acquires or changes the “LUMIX CLUB” login ID.

    PC Connection: You can set the workgroup. To send images to a PC, a connection to the same workgroup as the destination PC is required.

    Device Name: You can change the name (SSID) of this unit.

    Wi-Fi Function Lock: To prevent incorrect operation and use of the Wi-Fi function by a third party and to protect saved personal information, protect the Wi-Fi function with a password.

    Network Address: Displays the MAC address and IP address of this unit.

    Approved Regulations: Displays the certification number for radio regulations.

    Bluetooth

    You can also connect to your Smartphone, Tablet or TV if your device has the Bluetooth functionality. A function called pairing is needed in order to establish a connection. You’ll find it in this menu, remember to also turn Bluetooth on if you want to do so.

    USB

    Sets the communication method when connecting using the USB connection cable.

    • Select on Connection: Select this setting to select the USB communication system when connecting to another device.
    • PC Storage: Select this setting to export images to a connected PC.
    • PC Tether: Select this setting to control the Panasonic S1 from a PC installed with supported software.
    • Pictbridge PTP: Select this setting when connecting to a printer supporting PictBridge.
    Battery information

    This menu item will tell you how much juice and lifespan is left in your battery is.

    Battery Use Priority

    Sets which battery should be used first, either grip or camera.

    TV Connection

    Set the format for the HDMI output when playing back on the HDMI compatible TV and monitor connected with this unit using the HDMI cable. It’s possible to set it to Auto or 4K, 1080p, 1080i, etc…

    MENU – Setup Menu – page 5 of 6 (General settings)

    Panasonic S1, setup menu, page 5

    Save to Custom mode

    Save a range of settings to a custom mode.

    Load Custom Mode

    load one of the custom modes previously saved.

    Custom Mode Settings

    A full overview of the Panasonic S1 custom operations modes.

    Save/Restore Camera Setting

    Save the camera’s setup information to the card. Since saved setup information can be imported to thePanasonic S1, you can apply the same setup to more than one camera.

    Reset

    The following settings are reset to the default:

    • Recording settings.
    • Setup settings Wi-Fi Setup and Bluetooth settings.
    • Custom settings (Face Recog. and[Profile Setup settings.
    • Setup/custom settings (except for Wi-Fi Setup, Bluetooth, Face Recog. and Profile Setup).

    MENU – Setup Menu – page 6 of 6 (General Camera Setup)

    Panasonic S1, setup menu, page 6

    Clock Set

    You have already probably set time and date when you first turned on the Panasonic S1, but you can also change this here.

    Time Zone

    Sets the times for the region where you live (HOME) and your travel destination (DESTINATION). Time and date will be altered to reflect the local time and date at your travel destination.

    Pixel Refresh

    This setting will perform optimisation of the imaging device (sensor) as well as the processor. Use this function when you start seeing hot or dead pixels in your images.

    Sensor Cleaning

    Dust reduction to blow off the debris and dust that have affixed to the front of the imaging device is performed.

    Language

    Set the language displayed on the screen.

    Firmware Version

    This enables the firmware versions of the S1 and lens to be checked before an upgrade for instance.

    Online Manual

    Provides a link to the online manual of the Panasonic Lumix S1.

    Approved Regulations

    It’s mandatory for any electronics company to supply a list of approved regulations which it adheres too. These might be different per region.

    MENU – My Menu (that little man)

    Panasonic S1, my menu

    My Menu Setting

    You can register frequently-used menus and display them in My Menu. You can register up to 23 menus for quick access.

    • Add: Specifies the menu to be displayed in My Menu to register it.
    • Sorting: Rearranges the menus displayed in My Menu. Select the menu you want to move and set the destination.
    • Delete: Deletes registered menus from the displayed menu list.
    • Display from my menu: Sets the type of the menu screen to be displayed.

    Quick access with the Q Menu (Fn 2)

    The most commonly used settings can be accessed through what is called the Q Menu. This is the FN2 button that you’ll find right next to the screen, above the trash bucket button.

    The features that can be adjusted using Quick Menu are determined by the mode or a display style thePanasonic S1 is in.

    Panasonic S1, Q menu

    Photo Style

    This applies only to Jpeg images, and the RAW preview when you load them into an app like Lightroom.. You can select a colour effect here.

    • Standard: standard Panasonic colour and contrast rendering.
    • Vivid: Brilliant effect with high saturation and contrast.
    • Natural: Soft effect with low contrast.
    • Monochrome: Monochrome  (black and white)effect with no color shades.
    • L.Monochrome: Black-and-white effect with rich gradation and crisp black accents.
    • Scenery: An effect appropriate for sceneries with vivid blue skies and greens.
    • Portrait: An effect appropriate for portraits with a healthy and beautiful skin tone.
    • Custom 1-4: Make your own presets for easy recall when needed.
    • Cinelike D: Gives priority to the dynamic range by using a gamma curve designed to create film-like images. Suited for editing.
    • Cinelike V: Gives priority to the contrast by using a gamma curve designed to create film-like images.

    As mentioned earlier, it’s possible to create your own Photo Style or customise the preset styles. This is basically a way of hacking into the Jpeg engine and adjusting it to your own style and preferences. There are 6 areas that you can alter.

    • Contrast: add or decrease the difference between the brightness and the darkness in the picture.
    • Sharpness: add a degree of sharpness or make your images softer.
    • Noise Reduction: add noise reduction for high ISO shooting.
    • Saturation: add more vividness to the colours. Or remove some.
    • Color Tone: add a blue, orange, red or green filter to your image.

    Motion Pic. Set

    You can change bitrate and frame-rate for video here, as well as select the appropriate movie container.

    Picture Setting

    You can quickly change picture size and picture quality here for your Jpeg’s.

    These are the aspect ratios available:

    • 3:2: native sensor ratio
    • 4:3: the ratio used in the Panasonic micro-four-thirds cameras.
    • 16:9: for a wider looking view
    • 1:1: Square aspect ratio, mostly used for social sharing
    • 65:42: super wide crop for a panorama effect
    • 2:1

    Quality wise, you can choose between Small (S), Medium (M) and Large (L) files sizes. Obviously, Large will have the best quality Jpeg’s, at the expense of larger files. If you only shoot Jpeg (and not RAW) set it to Large. If you shoot both (Jpeg+RAW, see next screen), you could set it to small or medium since you’ll always work with the RAW in post processing. This way, you’ll still have a Jpeg for sharing quickly online or as a reference whilst still saving some space.

    Quality

    Probably the most important setting is Quality. You can select either Jpeg, where the RAW data from the sensor is processed by an in-camera algorithm to produce a viewable image, or save your images in this RAW format. RAW retains all the data of the sensor, and is meant to be edited afterwards in a desktop application like Lightroom or Luminar. Saving as RAW means that you have much more creative freedom afterwards to push shadows or pull highlights, sharpen and enhance your image in any way you please. A Jpeg retains only a fraction of this information, according to the algorithm inside the Panasonic S1 which might or might not suit your style and/or needs.

    Hence, my recommendation is always to shoot RAW or RAW Jpeg. This does mean larger files, but SD cards are inexpensive compared to your beautiful new Lumix. But some photographers prefer to shoot in Jpeg only because they are for instance not interested in post-processing images. In this case, I would set the Jpeg to the highest quality setting.

    AFS/AFC

    AFS is an abbreviation of Auto Focus Single and AFF is an abbreviation of Auto Focus Single. In AFS, the focus stays locked while the shutter button is pressed halfway and in AFS focus is adjusted only when you press the shutter.

    Some more info on these modes for clarification:

    • AFS will find focus and stay focused at that distance until you take a photo or release the shutter button. This is handy if you want to focus and then recompose your shot for instance.
    • AFF will do the same unless it detects subject movement, at which time it will temporarily switch to AFC operation in order to re-focus.
    • AFC won’t start to seek focus until you half-press the shutter, and will continually evaluate subject movement and change focus as needed.
    • With AFS you can can lock focus on a particular point, then swing the camera to get the right framing; with AFC, it will not lock focus, but will keep re-focusing. That’s why Pinpoint focusing can’t be used with AFC.

    Panasonic Lumix S1 landscape

    AF Mode

    This allows the focusing method that suits the positions and number of the subjects to be selected. There are 6 different methods available, each suited for different scenarios.

    Face/Eye Detection

    A person’s face, eyes, and body (the entire body or the upper half of the body) are automatically detected.

    When the Panasonic S1 detects a person’s face or body, an AF area is displayed over the detected person.

    • Yellow: This is the AF area for the person to be brought into focus. The camera automatically selects the person.
    • White: These are the AF areas for people other than the person to be brought into focus. This type of AF area is displayed when more than one person is detected.

    When a person’s face or eyes are detected, the eye closer to the camera will be brought into focus, if the eyes are inside the yellow frame.

    The camera can detect the faces of up to 15 people. To specify the person or eye to be brought into focus, align an AF area with the desired person or eye. You can do so easily by touching a person indicated with an AF area.

    Tracking

    The Panasonic S1 keeps adjusting the focus and exposure automatically to the specified moving object. Perform either of the following operations to lock the subject to be tracked:

    • Use a button: aim the AF tracking frame D over the subject, and press the shutter button halfway.
    • Use the touch screen: touch the subject on the screen.

    If it fails to lock, AF area will flash in red, and disappear.

    The AF area turns yellow while the subject is locked and green while the shutter button is pressed halfway. Press the Menu button to cancel the lock.

    225 Area

    Widest setting with all AF points used.  Up to 225 AF areas can be focused. This is effective when your subject is not in the center of the screen.

    Custom Multi

    From among 225 AF areas, you can freely set the optimum shape of the AF area for the subject.

    1-Area

    The camera focuses on the subject in the AF area on the screen.

    Pinpoint

    You can achieve a more precise focus on a point that is smaller than 1-Area. If you press the shutter button halfway, the screen that lets you check the focus by enlarging it.

    Burst Shot Setting

    You can choose your bust shot setting here for continuous drive mode.

    Burst shooting means that you’ll shoot continuously when you press the shutter button. You can apply different Burst Mode settings to Burst Shot 1 and and Burst Shot 2 Setting in these menus.

    You’ll see SH (for super high burst rates), SH pre (which actually goes back a few seconds in time and saves these images too). These SH modes are only available with the electronic shutter. Version 2 is always faster that version 1.

    Then we have High, Medium and Low which work with the Mechanical shutter too. The actual burst rate will be higher if you shoot Jpeg only.

    Metering Mode

    You can change how the light is metered here, and hence how a correct exposure is calculated by the Panasonic S1. If you feel that the camera takes over- or underexposed images according to your personal preferences, it might be worth changing the metering mode.

    Implementation of this is quite basic in this camera, you have a total of only 3 methods to choose from:

    • Multiple: This is the method in which the camera measures the most suitable exposure by judging the allocation of brightness on the whole screen automatically.
    • Center weighted: This is the method used to focus on the subject on the center of the screen and measure the whole screen evenly.
    • Spot: This is the method to measure the subject in the spot metering target.
    • Highlight weighted: priority is given to highlights in faces.

    Exposure Comp

    If you feel like your Lumix S1 is over- or underexposing your images (or you want to purposely underexpose), you can dial in what is called exposure compensation here. A range of plus minus 5 is available here to correct the auto exposure of the camera.

    ISO sensitivity

    Sets the upper and lower limits of the ISO sensitivity when you use Auto ISO or i ISO. Lower Limit should be set to 200 and upper limit to 3200, this is the range where you’ll get usable images without too much noise.

    Conclusion

    I hope you find my run-through of the Panasonic S1 Menu with pointers, tips and tricks along the way helpful in your quest to master this interesting mirrorless camera. If you have any more questions, please feel free to comment below and I will do my best to help you out.

  • Canon EOS R advanced manual with tips and tricks

    Canon EOS R advanced manual with tips and tricks

    Introduction

    The Canon EOS R has a 30,3-megapixel Full Frame CMOS sensor with a fast DIGIC 8 image processor.  This is Canon’s first full frame mirrorless camera, but they’ve managed to produce a sensor with no less than 5655 manually selectable autofocus points. The electronic viewfinder also has a generous 3,69 million dots and the EOS R features a vari-angle touchscreen on the back. When it comes to video, the Canon EOS R is no slouch either, with 4K capabilities at max 30P and 10 bit 4: 2: 2 HDMI output.

    Canon EOS R Wide Angle

    If you’re new to digital photography or Canon mirrorless cameras, I’m sure this guide full of tips and trips will make you more familiar with the various settings, features and functionalities of the Canon R. Now it’s time to turn your camera on and press the Menu button. You’ll be able to follow along page by page with this guide. Please note that in order to see all the pages, set the camera’s mode to Av, Tv or M as some other modes provide only a small subset of available menu options.

    Firstly, you might have landed here for another Canon mirrorless camera. Even though the menus are similar, it’s best to use my specific guide per camera. 

    You can find other manuals here:

    Also, if you want to see this more soothing black camera interface instead of the bright white, change the colour of the Menu in: Disp Level settings – Menu Display – Standard.

    Canon EOS R Menu system

    The Shoot Menu (Red Camera Icon)

    Page Shoot 1 (SHOOT1) 

    Canon EOS M50 red camera icon page shoot 1

    Image quality: you primarily need to decide whether to shoot RAW or JPEG. Raw records all the data from the sensor, Jpeg is basically a much smaller file that has all kinds of information already baked in. Most serious photographers shoot RAW, as this gives you the most flexible file to work with in an application like Adobe Lightroom.

    You’ll be able to recover more colour in the highlights of your image for instance, and pull more detail out of the shadows with a Raw file than with a Jpeg. The only downside are the larger files and the fact that of course you’ll need to develop them later on. RAW file average size of 20.8 MB an JPEG file average size of 10 MB with the EOS R.

    You’ll see that the is also a cRAW option, this is a format that uses lossy compression to reduce file sizes by roughly 40%. This is absolutely fine to use, the deterioration is negligible.

    If you decide to shoot Jpeg, you can choose between Large, Medium or Small, each with a Fine or Normal setting. Check the table above for the relative pixel sizes for each setting. I would advise Large and Fine of course.


    Dual Pixel RAW: You’ll need to set the previous image quality to RAW or cRAW in order use Dual Pixel RAW. This setting produces images containing dual pixel information from the image sensor. Don’t confuse this setting the type of pixel shift technology like Pentax uses. 

    Dual Pixel RAW uses the unique dual photodiode per pixel design of the 30.4 Megapixel sensor. A photodiode converts light into electrical current, and it the case of the Canon EOS R, each of these more than 30 million pixels actually registered light twice. Because these 2 photodiodes occupy actual physical space, you can imagine that the two register your point of autofocus slightly differently.

    Now the camera itself is constantly calculating what the best fine focus point is between these two, and this is called A+B. When Dual Pixel AF is set to on, not only this A+B signal is recorded, but also the A signal (from one of the two diodes) separately. This means that Canon’s proprietary RAW developer now has access to the normal camera output (A+B), as well as the A signal and the B signal (A+B-A=B).

    What this means for you in a practical sense is that you’ll be able to slightly shift, or a better word is fine-tune your point of autofocus. This is not a miracle worker, as remember the light is registered twice per pixel, and there are 30 million pixels on a 36 x 24mm surface. But it can help you if the focus is just slightly off, like for instance you barely missed focus on the eye at f/1.4. 

    Another caveat is that it only really works at focal lengths between 50 and 200mm, and at large apertures.


    Still img aspect ratio: this describes how square (1:1) or wide (16:9) your image is. It’s expressed as a figure, like this: width:height (width always comes first). The aspect ratio of a Full Frame sensor is 3:2, and you should use this if you want to use the full surface of the sensor. Cropping can also be done later.  

    • 3:2: the native sensor dimension of the Canon EOS R.
    • 1.6x: this is wat is called crop mode, and is used when you use EF-S lenses from the APS-C cameras.
    • 4:3: native resolution of a micro-four-thirds camera .
    • 16:9: for a wider perspective.
    • 1:1: a basic square setting.

    Image review: You can modify the amount of time the image displays on the LCD monitor after your EOS R writes it to the memory card. You can set the preview time from 2 to 8 seconds or display the image until you turn off the camera. Or you can turn it OFF if you don’t want this.

    I turn it off as I can always press the play button if I decide to review a shot I’ve just taken..

    • Off
    • 2 sec
    • 4 sec
    • 8 sec
    • Hold

    Release shutter without card

    If this is set to ON, you want be able to use the shutter button if there is no SD card inserted in the camera. This is a security feature, so that you won’t start shooting images without actually recording them on an SD card. On the other hand, if you’re just testing the features of the camera, you probably won’t wan’t to store these files, and then you can leave it ON.


    Page Shoot 2 (SHOOT2)

    Canon EOS M50 red camera icon page shoot2

    Lens aberration correction: digital technology provides the ability to adjust images in-camera. One area this can be useful is in correcting for optical performance. By mapping the performance of each camera and lens at a variety of focal lengths, focus distances and apertures, it is possible to correct for these irregularities and bring the lens performance closer to ‘perfection’. These corrections are only available for photos captured in the JPEG file format. There is no reason to turn this off, except if you’re noticing a slow down when shooting in burst mode. Then this might be the reason

    • Peripheral illumination correction: This is called lens light fall-off or drop in the corners or vignetting.
    • Distortion correction: If you’re shooting with a wide-angle lens you may have noticed that at the wide end you will most likely find some distortion. This corrects distortion for any lens in the lens database.
    • Digital Lens Optimizer: Performs high- level correction for lens aberration in-camera
    • Chromatic aberr corr: Automatically remove color fringing due to Chromatic aberration.
    • Diffraction correction: a camera and lens specific correction that uses a profile of the lens used to ameliorate the effects of diffraction caused by small apertures (usually f/11 and beyond where there will be decrease in sharpness).


    External speedlite control: Using this menu item, you can adjust flash power. The Flash Control option also enables you to customizeas well as control an external flash head.

    • Flash firing: Normally, this option is set to Enable. If you want to disable the flash, you can choose Disable instead. However, you don’t have to take this step in most cases.(just close the pop-up flash head on top of the camera if you don’t want to use flash).
    • E-TTL II meter: This option enables you to switch from the default flash metering approach, called Evaluative. In this mode, the camera exposes the background using ambient light when possible and then sets the flash power to serve as fill light on the subject. If you instead select the Average option, the flash is used as the primary light source, meaning that the flash power is set to expose the entire scene without relying on ambient light. Typically, this results in a more powerful (and possibly harsh) flash lighting and dark backgrounds.

    • Slow synchro: Slow Sync Flash is a function found on many cameras that tells your camera to shoot with both a longer shutter speed as well as firing the flash. This means you get the best of both worlds above and can both get a relatively sharp shot of your main subject as well as get some ambient light from the background and foreground.
    • Safety FE: The camera automatically changes the shutter speed or aperture value when the flash fires to avoid overexposing and blowing out the highlights in the scene.

    • Flash func. Setting and External flash C.Fn setting: these last 2 options on the Flash Control list relate to how to control external flashes from the EOS R itself. This depends very much on what flash you’re using, and you should consult the flash manual in order to set this up.


    Page Shoot 3 (SHOOT3)

    Canon EOS R red camera icon page shoot3

    Expo.comp./AEB: Exposure Compensation and Auto Exposure Bracketing.

    Exposure compensation: If you believe that your camera is over- or underexposing your images, or you want to do this for creative reasons, you can change the level of exposure by a scale of plus or minus 3 EV.

    Auto Exposure Bracketing.: Using the exposure compensation setting, you can capture images at different exposure levels, and then select the optimal image later with a +/- 5 EV scale. These two functions can the be used in combination.


    ISO speed settings for photos

    ISO speed: can either be set to Automatic or determine an appropriate value for yourself. Say for landscapes when using a tripod this is generally set to what is called base ISO 100. ISO 100 would give you the optimal quality for this sensor, but for many other types of photography you’ll need a higher ISO in order to have a fast enough shutter speed and hence no movement in your images. Leave this on auto for most uses.

    ISO Auto: This is used to set the max for Auto, from 400 to the top value of 40000. When raising the ISO value, you are effectively raising the sensitivity of the sensor by boosting the output. This leads to more and more noise with every doubling of power. A Maximum of 12800 is as far as I would go with the Canon EOS R.


    Auto Lighting Optimizer

    Auto-corrects image brightness and contrast. This only affects Jpeg and not your Raw files, but it can be handy for the Jpeg shooters out there. Have a go and see if you like the effect set to low or standard.


    Canon EOS R travel photography

    Highlight tone priority

    Improves gradation in highlights to avoid over exposure in bright subjects. What the camera does in highlight tone priority is underexpose the image to avoid clipping highlights, then boost the shadows up to give the appearance of a wider dynamic range in the jpegs. It does the same thing you might do when processing raw files, except it just applies it to jpegs. Another great feature to experiment with. Either Off or enabled.


    Metering timer

    When you half press the shutter (or use back button focus) in one of the creative zone modes and then release it, the camera’s meter takes a reading and sets the exposure values. These values time out and disappear after the amount of time set by this option. You have to half press again to take a new reading at that point. From 4, 8, 16, 30 sec too 1, 10, 30 min.


    Expo. Simulation

    When ‘Exp.SIM’ (which stands for Exposure Simulation) is on, indicates the image you are seeing on the rear screen and EVF is what the final image will look like. You can leave this on except when using flash in the studio as you’ll only see a dark frame in that case.


    Page Shoot 4 (SHOOT4)

    Canon EOS R red camera icon page shoot4

    White balance

    Normally AWB (auto white balance) will do just fine but you also have the option to change this to AWB W (auto white balance with white priority This setting is amazing for indoor lighting), Daylight, Shade, Cloudy, Tungsten, White fluorescent, Flash, Custom and Colour Temperature adjustable.


    Custom white balance

    This setting brings up compatible images to use. Set the white balance under the same light source thatwill illuminate your shot.


    WB Shift/Bkt.

    White balance shift is a setting on the EOS R camera that allows a photographer to bias the colours in images in either blue, amber, magenta or green directions. This colour shift can be used to add or remove colour shifts that may occur when shooting in mixed lighting conditions. Typically think flash and daylight, flash and indoor lights, street lights and daylight and so on. White balance can be shifted from -9 to +9 in both blue / amber and green / magenta directions, or combinations of blue/amber and green/magenta shifts. The blue/amber shift is equal to five mired for each step.


    Color space

    sRGB is what is used online, and Adobe RGB has a more extended colour profile that mimics the human eye. You might think that the latter is preferable, but unless you print a lot of photos with professional equipment, Adobe RGB is more hassle than its worth since you’ll need to proof every picture you want to use online and convert it to sRGB.


    Picture Style

    Picture style allows you to take photos in the color tones that Canon deems most suitable to each subject . These include normal presets like Standard, Portrait and Landscape but also advanced scenarios like Monochrome, Fine Detail, Neutral and Faithful.

    All these picture styles can be individually adjusted to taste with adjustments like Sharpness, Fine detail, Threshold, Contrast, Saturation, Hue. These adjustments can be saved in 3 user defined slots and even transferred to other EOS cameras.

    Auto, Standard, Portait, Landscape, Fine Detail, Neutral, Faithful, Monochrome, User Def. 1, 2 and 3]


    Page Shoot 5 (SHOOT5)

    Canon EOS R red camera icon page shoot5

    Long exp. noise reduction

    Turn On noise reduction for exposures of 1 second or longer with the Canon EOS R. This function takes a second black or dark frame (with the shutter closed) with the identical shutter time of your first photo. The noise in this frame is then subtracted from the original photo. This method is the most reliable type of noise reduction, as the noise is measured specifically at that place and time with the same level of humidity and temperature. All factors that can contribute to noisy images especially in long exposures.

    Some photographers however find it annoying to have to wait for this to finish as it doubles the time. You can turn it off and experiment with other types of noise reduction in Lightroom or any other photo editor if you shoot RAW.


    High ISO speed NR

    You can choose from 3 levels of noise reduction: Standard, High or Low. This function is especially effective when shooting at high ISO speeds.

    Multishot: This technique automatically combines four images captured at once to reduce noise. Compared to setting High ISO speed NR to [High], this feature minimises loss of image quality while reducing noise. Best technique for Jpeg shooters.


    Dust Delete Data

    This function allows you to download your shots to your computer using the canon software. The software will analyse the images and any dust spots that show up on multiple images will be registered. This database is then relayed back to the Canon R that will ignore the pixels with dust on.

    I don’t think this is necessary, as periodically wet cleaning yourself or by a professional should be part of your camera cleaning routine anyway.


    Touch Shutter

    If the Touch Shutter function is set to On, you can take shots easily by having the camera focus on your subject and adjust the brightness simply by touching. I don’t use this function, but if you’re coming from a smartphone, you could find it very useful.


    Canon EOS R Wedding settings

    Multiple Exposure

    As you shoot multiple exposures (2–9), you can select how the images will be merged into a single image.

    • On: Func/Ctrl (Function and control priority) Convenient when shooting multiple exposures gradually as you check the results. During continuous shooting, the continuous shooting speed will decrease greatly.
    • On: ContShtng (Continuous shooting priority) Used for continuous multiple exposures of moving subjects.Continuous shooting is possible without the following operations: menu viewing, image review after capture, image playback, and undo last image.

    Multi-expos ctrl setting:

    • Additive: The exposure of each single image captured is added cumulatively. Based on the number of exposures setting, set a negative exposure compensation. Follow the basic guide below to set the exposure compensation amount. (Two exposures: -1 stop, three exposures: -1.5 stop, four exposures: -2 stops)
    • Average: Based on the number of exposures setting, negative exposure compensation is set automatically as you shoot multiple exposures. If you shoot multiple exposures of the same scene, the exposure of the subject’s background will be automatically controlled to obtain the standard exposure.

    • Bright/Dark: Brightness (or darkness) of the base image and added images is compared at the same position, and bright (or dark) portions are retained. Some overlapping colors may be mixed, depending on the relative brightness (or darkness) of the image.

    HDR Mode: 

    You can shoot still photos with clipped highlights and shadows reducedfor a high dynamic range of tones even in high-contrast scenes. HDR shooting is effective for landscape and still-life shots.
    With HDR shooting, three images of different exposures(standard exposure, underexposure, and overexposure) are captured consecutively for each shot and then merged together automatically. The HDR image is recorded as a JPEG image.

    You can select the dynamic range of the HDR images and an effect like Natural, Art standard, Vivid, Bold or Embossed.

    HDR images will always be saved as Jpeg!


    Page Shoot 6 (SHOOT6)

    Canon EOS R red camera icon page shoot6

    Bulb Timer

    This is used for long exposures. Turn this, on, set the exposure timer to your desired setting and then shoot a Bulb exposure.  If you want to end the exposure early, just tap the shutter.


    Anti Flicker Shoot.

    With anti-flicker shooting, the camera detects the frequency of the light source’s blinking and takes the picture when the flicker’s effect on the exposure or color is detectable.

    If you shoot an image with a fast shutter speed under a light source such as fluorescent light, the blinking of the light source causes flicker and the image may be vertically unevenly exposed. If continuous shooting is used under these conditions, uneven exposures or colors across the images may result.
    With anti-flicker shooting, the camera detects the frequency of the light source’s blinking and takes the picture when the flicker’s effect on the exposure or color is minimal.

    Silent Shutter

    You can adjust the camera’s drive and shutter operating characteristics to suit shooting conditions or the lens used.


    Silent LV. Shoot

    In this mode, your camera’s operational sounds are silenced, allowing you to shoot pictures of sleeping subjects without worrying about getting noticed.

    • Mode 1: Enables quieter shooting, Continuous shooting is available in this mode.
    • Mode 2: When the shutter button is pressed completely, only one shot will be taken. While you keep holding down the shutter button, the camera operation will be suspended. This enables quieter shooting, and operation will resume once you return the shutter button to the halfway position. Even if continuous shooting is set, only a single shot will be taken.
    • Disable: be sure to set it to Disable if you use a TS-E lens for shifting or tilting the lens or if you use an extension tube. If Mode 1 or Mode 2 is set, the standard exposure may not be obtained, or an irregular exposure may result.

    High Speed Display

    The  Canon EOS R must be set to high speed frame rate to enable this option. This setting lets the EVF update faster than the 5 FPS rate at which the EOS R shoots in Continuous Hi mode. Doesn’t work with adapted lenses…


    Page Autofocus 1 (AF1)

    autofocus Menu Page 1 (AF1) Purple

    AF operation

    One Shot: for Still Subjects. When you press the shutter button halfway, the camera will focus only once.

    • When focus is achieved, the dot inside the AF point achieving focus lights up briefly in red, and the focus confirmation light <> in the viewfinder will also light up.
    • With evaluative metering, the exposure setting will be set at the same time focus is achieved.
    • While you hold down the shutter button halfway, the focus will be locked. You can then recompose the shot if desired.

    Servo: This AF operation is for moving subjects when the focusing distance keeps changing. While you hold down the shutter button halfway, the subject will be focused continuously.

    • The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken.
    • When the AF point selection is automatic, the camera first uses the center AF point to focus. During autofocusing, if the subject moves away from the center AF point, focus tracking continues as long as the subject is covered by another AF point.

    AF method

    Face + Tracking:

    • the Canon R searches for faces in the frame. If it finds one, it displays a white focus frame over the face.
    • In a group shot where more than one face is recognized by the camera, you see arrows on either side of the focus frame. To choose a different face as the focusing target, tap the face or use the Multi-controller to move the target frame over the face.
    • To lock focus on the face, press and hold the shutter button halfway down or press and hold the AF-ON button. When focus is locked, the focus frame turns green, as shown on the right above, and the camera emits a beep. (Disable the sound effect via the Beep option on Shooting Menu 1.) If focus isn’t successful, the focus frame turns red.

    1 point AF: only one AF point is used for extremely precise autofocus.

    Expand AF area: Focusing uses one AF point and points above, below, and to the left and right. Effective for moving subjects, which are difficult to track with 1-point AF. Although Servo AF requires you to focus on a subject initially with an AF point, focusing is easier with this AF method than with Zone AF.

    Expand AF area: Around: Focusing uses one AF point and surrounding points. Enables focusing over a wider area than F point expansion. Effective for moving subjects, which are difficult to track with 1-point AF. Servo AF operation is the same as for AF point expansion.

    Zone AF: Uses auto selection AF in Zone AF frames to cover a larger area than AF point expansion, which makes focusing easier than with 1-point AF/AF point expansion and also effective for moving subjects. Generally focuses on the nearest subject. Note the camera attempts to focus on faces of any people in the Zone AF frame.

    Large Zone AF: Vertical: Uses auto selection AF in a vertical Large Zone AF frame to cover a larger area than Zone AF, which makes focusing easier than with 1-point AF/AFpoint expansion and also effective formoving subjects. Generally focuses on the nearest subject. Note the camera attempts to focus on faces of any people in the Zone AF frame.

    Large Zone AF: Horizontal: Uses auto selection AF in a horizontal Large Zone AF frame to cover a larger area than Zone AF, which makes focusing easier than with 1-point AF/AF point expansion and also effective for moving subjects. Generally focuses on the nearest subject. Note the camera attempts to focus on faces of any people in the Zone AF frame.


    Canon EOS R Landscape

    When set to Movie mode, you now how the new Eye detection AF which can only be enabled in face tracking autofocus mode.

    Canon EOS R firmware 1.2 Eye detect AF  Also, AF frame size can now be set to small with the Canon EOS firmware version 1.2.

    AF frame size

    Select either Normal or Small frame size for the 1 point AF operation.


    Eye Detection AF

    This is an exciting new feature, introduced with the EOS M APS-C cameras.  When its AF Method is set to Face Detect + Tracking, the entire active AF area (see the colored outlines in the graphics above) is used for focusing.  And, if a human face is detected, the Face Detect technology has been enhanced — the camera doesn’t simply focus on the most prominent face in the scene.  Instead, it now is able to detect the nearest eye on that face, and puts a smaller focus box on that eye.  If that person moves around the picture area, the Eye Detection AF continues to track that eye, as long as it remains visible.

    When Eye Detection AF is active, you’ll see a large, outer box indicating that Face Detection has recognized a human face.  And within it, a smaller box will surround the actual eye that is being concentrated upon for Eye Detection AF.

    This means that sharp focus will more than ever be placed on the “leading” eye of your subjects, whether you’re shooting portraits or candid pictures.  Where many experienced photographers might have previously made the effort to change to a single AF point, and move it manually to cover the face of a human subject, the new Eye Detection AF technology means that the process can be left to the EOS R in many cases.

    All that has to be done to activate Eye Detection AF is to Enable Eye Detection AF in the 3rd Shooting Menu screen, and be sure that Face Detect + Tracking is the active AF Method.  It will function in most shooting modes.

    While Eye Detect AF will normally focus upon the eye nearest to the camera, if you want to concentrate on the subject’s other eye, that’s easy to do — just press the AF Point Select button, on the back of the camera, twice.  You’ll see the smaller “box” surrounding the detected eye jump to the subject’s other eye.

    For Face Detection AF, and the more advanced Eye Detection AF to function, the camera basically has to be able to identify typical human facial features two eyes, a nose, and a mouth.  Accordingly, there can be some limits to the EOS R’s Eye Detection AF:

    • It will not function with Servo AF, so it’s unable to work with moving subjects (therefore, Eye Detection AF is not possible in Sports Mode or Panning Mode).  
    • It’s disabled if you’re using the Miniature effect or Fish-eye effect settings, within the Creative Filters modes.
    • Eye Detection AF cannot be used when recording video (overall Face Detection is possible during video recording, including when continuous Movie Servo AF is active).
    • The primary face in the scene needs to be sufficiently close to take up a certain amount of space in the picture — if a detected face is too distant or small in the frame, the EOS R will revert to conventional Face Detection, and you won’t see the smaller “box” displayed over a subject’s eye before you take the picture.  
    • Eye Detect AF may have problems if the subject’s eyes are partially or fully closed.
    • The primary face needs to be turned so it’s essentially facing toward the camera, and the eyes need to be somewhat in the camera’s direction as well.  While direct eye contact with the camera isn’t required, if the subject’s eyes are angled significantly to one side or the other, the EOS R’s Eye Detection AF may not be able to detect the eye nearest the camera (again, it will usually revert to ordinary Face Detection, or conventional Automatic AF point selection).
    • If one or both of the subject’s eyes are in deep shadow, Eye Detection AF (and sometimes overall Face Detection AF) may have difficulty functioning.
    • Sunglasses, excessive make-up around the eyes, masks, and so on will usually prevent the Eye Detection AF from being able to detect and focus upon the nearest eye.  And, like Face Detection, it’s designed to detect human eyes… it normally will not work with animals or other non-human subjects.

    Continuous AF

    Enable or disable continuous AF where the camera constantly tries to acquire focus, even without pressing the shutter. Turn this Off.


    Touch & drag AF settings

    Touch & Drag AF basically means that you can drag the desired autofocus point to anywhere on the screen. This is much faster than any other method to do this.

    You can select the active touch area: Whole panel, Right, Left, Top Right, Btm Right, Top Left, Btm Left. I have it set to the Bottom Left since this allows you to look through the EVF and change the focus point easily at the same time.


    Page Autofocus 2 (AF2)

    autofocus Menu Page 2 (AF2) Purple

    MF peaking settings

    Peaking is a focussing aide when the camera is set to manual focus. The in-focus area will have a type of coloured noise superimposed onto scene in the EVF or on the screen. This is of course not stored, it’s merely an aide that helps you determine where your focus lies and if your subject will be in focus. Very handy feature, I have it set to the Color red and Level High.


    Focus Guide

    Setting Focus guide to On provides a visual guide that shows which direction to adjust focus and the extent of adjustment needed. The guide frame is displayed near any eyes that are detected for the main subject when for instance Face +Tracking is used. 


    Page Autofocus 3 (AF3)

    autofocus Menu Page 3 (AF3) Purple

    Tracking Sensitivity

    You can adjust the tracking sensitivity to one of seven levels, which affects responsiveness if the subject strays from the AF point during Movie Servo AF, as when interfering objects move across AF points or when you pan.

    • Locked on: -3/-2/-1: With this setting, the camera is less likely to track a different subject if the main subject strays from the AF point. The closer the setting is to the minus (-) symbol, the less the camera is inclined to track a different subject. It is effective when you want to prevent the AF points from rapidly tracking something that is not the intended subject during panning or when an obstacle cuts across the AF points.
    • Responsive: +1/+2/+3: This makes the camera more responsive when tracking a subject that covers the AF point. The closer the setting is to the plus symbol, the more responsive the camera is. It is effective when you want to keep tracking a moving subject as its distance from the camera changes or to rapidly focus on another subject.

    Accel./decel. tracking

    This sets the tracking sensitivity for moving subjects whose speed can suddenly change dramatically by starting or stopping suddenly for instance.

    • [0] : Suited for subjects that move at a fixed speed.
    • [+2 / +1] : Effective for subjects having sudden movements, sudden acceleration/deceleration, or sudden stops. Even if the moving subject’s speed suddenly changes dramatically, the camera continues to focus the target subject. For example, for an approaching subject, the camera becomes less prone to focus behind it, which would result in a blurred subject. For a subject stopping suddenly, the camera becomes less prone to focus in front of it. Setting +2 can track dramatic changes in the moving subject’s speed better than with +1.

    Canon EOS R safari

    AF pt auto switching

    The AF pt auto switching parameter is used for setting characteristics of AF point switching when the subject has a lot of movements. This parameter is only for switching between multiple AF points, so it is unavailable when using AF area selection modes Single-point Spot AF and Single-point AF. The zero setting is a standard setting for moderate switching of AF points. The +1/+2 settings are used when shooting subjects with erratic movement which could happen in any direction.

    When a manually selected AF point (AF point being focused during Zone AF) leaves the subject, it will rapidly switch to surrounding AF points to capture the subject. Use the plus setting when you want the camera to automatically decide to use a new AF point, and the zero setting is used when you want to place emphasis on manually selected AF points to track the subject.


    Page Autofocus 4 (AF4)

    autofocus Menu Page 4 (AF4) Purple

    Lens electronic MF

    Disable after One-Shot AF/Enable after One-Shot AF:  The latter allows you to fine-tune focus manually in AF mode whilst half-pressing the shutter button.


    AF-assist beam firing

    This is a read beam that some flashes have which helps to acquire focus in situations with low light.


    One-Shot AF release prior.

    Effective when you want to achieve focus before capturing the shot. You can set the AF operation characteristics and shutter-release timing during continuous shooting after the first shot with AI Servo AF. Equal priority is given to focusing and continuous shooting speed.


    Page Autofocus 5 (AF5)

    autofocus Menu Page 5 (AF5) Purple

    Lens Drive when AF impossible

    This setting can effectively speed up your action photography, especially with tele lenses. Super telephoto lenses can become grossly out of focus during continuous focus search, taking more time to achieve focus the next time. 


    Limit AF Methods

    You’ll find a list of all AF methods here, you can select and deselect which ones you use or don’t use, so that there’s less clutter in the AF Method Menu.


    Orientation linked AF Point

    You can select different AF configurations based on the orientation of the camera. 

    You can select up to three different AF point selection methods corresponding to whether you hold the camera in a landscape orientation, portrait with the grip up or portrait with the grip down orientation. Simply rotating the camera will choose whichever AF point or AF point selection method you have set for that orientation.

    This is very useful for many situations. At a wedding for example you may choose to use the central point when shooting in a landscape format but the middle top AF point for focusing on a face when shooting in a portrait mode.

    It is also possible to select an alternate, or favourite, AF point that you can switch to immediately by using one of the customisable buttons on the EOS R. This customisation can also be used to select an alternate set of AF settings that can be recalled using a single button press. You may find this useful when photographing a running race for example. You may wish to use two different AF point selection methods, one for the start of the race and one for the end as the runners dip for the line.


    Initial Servo AF pt for face + tracking

    This setting is allows you to select a specific point for the AF system to start tracking things when AF is set face detect plus tracking. 

    Playback Menu (blue playback icon)

    Page Play 1 settings (PLAY1)

    Canon EOS R playback Menu page 1

    Protect images

    You can select how to protect and unprotect an image from deletion on the EOS 50D. Once an image is protected, it cannot be erased by the camera’s erase function. To erase a protected image, you must first cancel the protection. If you erase all the images, only the protected images will remain. This is convenient when you want to erase unnecessary images all at once.

    You can choose to Select images, Select range, All images in folder, unprotect all images in folder, All images on card or unprotect all images on card.


    Rotate image

    Vertical images are rotated automatically so they are displayed vertically on the camera’s LCD monitor and personal computer instead of horizontally. The setting of this feature can be changed.

    • Immediately after image capture, the vertical image will not be automatically rotated for the image review.
    • If the vertical image is taken while the camera is pointed up or down, the image might not rotate automatically for playback.
    • If the vertical image is not automatically rotated on the personal computer screen, it means the software you are using is unable to rotate the image.

    Erase images

    Select and erase images by selecting a range or All images in folder orAll images on card.


    Canon EOS R underwater

    Print order

    You can connect the camera to a printer via Wi-Fi to print your images directly. This setting takes you to the selection screen where you can select a single image, multiple images for printing and the general set up. See the tutorial below on how to connect to a smartphone, it is the same procedure to connect to a printer


    Photobook Set-up

    This function is useful for ordering photobooks online and for printing photobooks on a printer. 

    When you select images to use in photobooks (up to 998 images) and use EOS Utility (provided software) to transfer them to a computer, the selected images will be copied into a dedicated folder. This function is useful for ordering photobooks online and for printing photobooks on a printer.


    Image transfer

    With the dedicated software Image Transfer Utility 2, you can send images on the camera to a computer automatically. You’ll need to setup the Wifi connection first. 


    RAW image processing

    Being able to perform RAW image post-processing right after shooting on a camera is a function that comes in very handy.

    These settings are available on the Canon R:

    • Brightness adjustment: EV-1, EV-2/3, EV-1/3, EV±0, EV+1/3, EV+2/3, EV+1
    • White balance: WB: Shot settings, Auto, Day Light, Shade, Cloudy, Tungsten light, White fluorescent light, Flash, Colour temperature
    • Picture Style: Picture Style: Shot settings, Auto, Standard, Portrait, Landscape, Fine Detail, Neutral, Faithful, Monochrome, User Def. 1, User Def. 2, User Def. 3
    • Auto Lighting Optimizer: Disable, Low, Standard, High
    • High ISO speed Noise Reduction: Disable, Low, Standard, High
    • Image quality: write small, medium and large jpeg files in fine or standard resolution.
    • Peripheral illumination correction: Enable/Disable
    • Chromatic aberration: Enable/Disable
    • Diffraction correction: Enable/Disable

    Page Play 2 settings (PLAY2)

    Canon EOS R playback Menu page 2

    Cropping

    Complementary to the other in-camera RAW processing feature, you can crop your image or multiple images here freely or according to preset dimensions.


    Resize

    It’s also possible to resize your RAW images and save them in-camera for posting on social media for instance.


    Rating

    You can add a star rating to your images here. This rating will show up later when you transfer the images to your computer if you use Canon’s Digital Photo Professional.

    You can:

    • Select images
    • Select range
    • All images in folder
    • All images on card


    Slide show

    You can setup and start an in-camera slideshow here.


    Set image search conditions

    You’ll find lots of factors to choose here, I honestly don’t know why this was implemented and never use it.


    Image jump w/dial

    This setting selects how much of the jump your image library will tale when you turn the dial.

    You can select one by one, jump 10, jump by specified number, by date, by folder, display movies only, stills only, protected only or display by image rating.


    Page Play 3 settings (PLAY3)

    Canon EOS R playback Menu page 3

    Playback information display

    You can enable up to 9 individual screens – all except the first, which is the basic shooting info overlay, allow the histogram to be specified as brightness or RGB, and in some cases, both.


    Highlight alert

    The Highlight Alert setting will show you where the overexposed areas in your images are located.  The image preview will blink in areas that are completely white and have no detail.


    AF point disp.

    This setting either shows or hides the number of AF points on screen and in your EVF.


    Playback Grid

    Sets the number of images or previews in the grid when you select Playback.


    Movie Play Count

    The two options within this setting are Play Time and Time Code and they determine what is displayed while the movie is played back on the camera. In Play Time, the elapsed time after the start of shooting will be shown on the rear LCD panel during playback. With the Time Code setting, the associated timecode will be shown during playback.


    Canon EOS R portrait

    View from last seen

    Either enable or disable the view from previous images in order to compare them.


    Magnificatn (apx)

    you can set the starting magnification and initial position for the magnified view.

    • 1x (no magnification): The image will not be magnified. The magnified view will start with the single-image display.

    • 2x, 4x, 8x, 10x (magnify from center): he magnified view will start at the image center at the selected magnification.
    • Actual size (from selected point): The recorded image’s pixels will be displayed at approx. 100%. The magnified view will start at the AF point that achieved focus. If the photo was taken with manual focus, the magnified view will start at the image center.

    • Same as last magnification (from center): The magnification will be the same as the last time you exited the magnified view. The magnified view starts from the image center.


    Set Up Menu (Spanner, yellow gear icon)

    Set Up Menu Page 1 (SET UP1)

    Canon EOS R Setup Menu page 1

    Select folder

    You can select and/or create the folder on your SD card where files will be stored here.


    File numbering

    You can set the file numbering for each new shot to Continuous or Auto Reset/Manual Reset. Continuous will consecutively number your photos. Auto reset will reset the numbering every time an SD card is inserted, and Manual reset will reset the numbering once.


    Auto rotate

    Auto rotate automatically rotates your images that are shot in portrait mode to fit the screen size. You can turn this on or off and decide whether this will behaviour will also apply to images imported to your PC using the canon software .


    Format card

    You should format your SD card in-camera every time you insert an SD card when starting a new session. This to make sure that there won’t be any writing errors. Remember that formatting will erase all the images on the card, and won’t even be recoverable if you choose the low level format option.


    Set Up Menu Page 2 (SET UP2)

    Canon EOS R Setup Menu page 2

    Eco mode

    This function allows you to conserve battery power.When the camera is not in use, the screen quickly darkens to reduce battery consumption


    Power saving

    The power will shut off in the following circumstances. Press the power button again to restore power.

    Shooting Mode Powers down approximately 3 minutes after the last control is accessed on the camera. The LCD monitor automatically turns off 1 minute* after the last control is accessed even if [Auto Power Down] is set to [Off]. Press any button other than the power button to turn the LCD monitor back on.
    Playback Mode or connected to a Printer. Powers down approximately 5 minutes after the last control is accessed on the camera.

    Display brightness

    Adjust the brightness of the display in 7 steps.


    Display color tone

    Adjust the color tone of the display.


    Date/Time/Zone

    Select your local time zone, a date and time for your camera. This information will be written in the EXIF data of your photos.


    Language

    Select your preferred language for the camera Menus. I choose English, as it is easiest to find information online in English.


    Set Up Menu Page 3 (SET UP3)

    Canon EOS R Setup Menu page 3

    Video system

    Select either NTSC or PAL depending on the region where you live.


    Touch control

    You can turn on or off the touch sensitive screen on the back of your Canon EOS R. Standard/Sensitive/Disable.


    Beep

    You can either enable or disable the beep when you engage the shutter as well as when you touch the screen.


    Battery info.

    Display the battery charge in the upper right corner.


    Sensor cleaning

    You should set this to Auto cleaning. This will send a charge through your sensor every time you turn it off, dislodging any dust particles that might be on the sensor. You should also make a habit of regularly cleaning the señor cage with a simple air blower.

    If you prefer to only periodically clean the sensor, you can use the ‘clean now’ function to immediately do this procedure.


    HDMI resolution

    You can choose either Auto where the camera will decide automatically what type of device it’s connected too, 1080p or 4K.


    HDMI HDR output

    HDR output to compatible TV supported with a Micro – Type-D connector. If you won’t be using this function, turn It off.


    Set Up Menu Page 4 (SET UP4)

    Canon EOS R Setup Menu page 4

    Shooting info. Disp.

    There are a few sub menus here, let’s see what they do.

    Screen info. settings: these settings give 5 different screen options. The first 3 allow you to configure the data overlaid on live view and save them as 3 separate screen types. You can turn on or off the basic shooting info (the data at top and bottom of screen), the detailed shooting info (the icons running down the left and right sides), whether the data acts as a touch button or not – if not, it loses the white frame and grey background – this applies to the Q menu button, the touch shoot button, the magnify button, the shutter speed, aperture, EV compensation scale and ISO value and “buttonizes” or “debuttonizes” them all at once; the histogram; the level gauge.

    The fourth screen style is just the AF targets and the exposure info when it is active, and the last screen type is the black, non-live view DSLR-style info screen.  These options are the ones you cycle through with the Info button when shooting with the camera – effectively this section allows you to customise them to taste.

    Still within this submenu we haveL VF info/toggle settings (3 different EVF choices – one with basic shooting info under the screen, the other two configurable to individually add and combine as desired the vertical detailed shooting info icons, histogram, level gauge].  Like the previous item, it’s a way of customising what you get when you cycle through the styles of VF display whilst shooting when you use the Info button to do so.

    Then the submenu has Grid display [Off, 3×3, 6×4, 3×3+diag], Histogram disp [Brightness/RGB, Large/Small], Reset.  That’s the end of this submenu.


    Disp. Performance

    You can set this to Power-saving to conserve battery life, even though refresh rates will be a bit slower than with the Smooth setting.


    VF display format

    [Display 1] shows the Live View image across the entire viewfinder screen. This allows you to fully maximize use of the EVF display, but shooting icons such as those indicating white balance settings and the Auto Lighting Optimizer will be overlaid on the sides of the viewfinder image. If you do not fancy that, you may prefer [Display 2], which features a smaller Live View image, with the shooting icons in the borders surrounding the image.
    The icons displayed are customisable to some extent, and rotate accordingly when you switch to portrait orientation.


    Canon EOS R vibrant

    Display settings

    You can select whether to automatically switch from the back screen to the EVF if your eye is detected, or only use the back screen, or only use the EVF and turn the screen off.


    Help Text size

    Choose the size of the help text that appears in the menu system.


    Set Up Menu Page 5 (SET UP5)

    Canon EOS R Setup Menu page 5

    Wireless communication settings

    On the Wireless communication settings screen, you can change the wireless communication function settings.

    Wi-Fi settings: 

    • You can set whether to Enable or Disable the wireless communication function.
    • Password: Set to None to allow a Wi-Fi connection to be established without a password (except when connecting to an access point via Wi-Fi).
    • Connection history: You can set whether to Show or Hide the history of the Wi-Fi connected devices.
    • Auto send images to computer: With the dedicated software Image Transfer Utility 2, you can send images on the camera to a computer automatically.
    • Send to smartphone after shot: Your shots can be sent to a smartphone automatically.
    • MAC address: You can check the MAC address of the camera.

    Wi-Fi function:

    • Communicate with smartphones
    • Remote control (EOS Utility)
    • Print from Wi-Fi printer
    • Send images to Web service

    Bluetooth function:  Displays the screen on which you can set or check the Bluetooth functions.

    Send images to smartphone: While the camera is connected to a smartphone, use this function to send images stored in the camera to the smartphone.

    Nickname: You can change the nickname using the virtual keyboard.

    Clear settings: Clear all wireless communication settings.


    GPS Device settings

    When you’re shooting while connected to a compatible smart device via Bluetooth, EOS R can collect GPS data and automatically add it to your images using the Canon Camera Connect app. It makes identifying locations easy and provides a useful editing feature for when you’re back home.


    Set Up Menu Page 6 (SET UP6)

    Canon EOS R Setup Menu page 6


    Multi function lock

    If you find yourself regularly changing settings on the camera accidentally while moving around, then making use of the multi-function lock can avoid issues when you come to shoot in a fast-paced environment. The lock switch below the quick command dial can be used to lock the main dial, the multi-controller or the quick control dial – simply select which you would like to lock through the custom function in Group 2 Disp./Operation. When you come to change a setting, you may see L displayed in the viewfinder and on the top LCD panel. If this happens, you will be unable to change the setting because the multi-function lock is set. Simply flick the switch and the camera will return to normal.


    Custom Shooting Mode (CA-C3)

    You can register current camera settings, such as the shooting mode, menu functions, and Custom Function settings, as Custom shooting modes under the Mode Dial’s C1, C2, and C3 positions.

    Clear all camera settings

    This is used to restore your camera settings to the factory default.


    Copyright information

    Insert your own copyright information here. This will be written to every image you take.


    Manual/software URL 

    A direct URL to the Canon EOS R manual. 


    Certification Logo Display

    A bunch of certification logos. You officially have my permission to ignore this :).


    Firmware

    You can check the firmware revision number here. 


    Custom Function Menu 

    C. Fn1: Exposure Settings

    C. Fn1: Exposure Settings

    Exposure level increments

    Sets 1/2-stop increments for the shutter speed, aperture, exposure compensation, AEB, flash exposure compensation, etc. This is effective when you prefer to control the exposure in less fine increments than 1/3-stop.

    ISO speed setting increments
    You can change the manual ISO speed setting increments to 1-stop or 1/3 stop.

    Bracketing auto cancel
    ON: Enable
    When you set the power switch to 2, the AEB and white balance bracketing settings will be canceled. AEB will also be canceled when the flash is ready to fire or if you switch to movie shooting.
    OFF: Disable
    The AEB and white balance bracketing settings will not be canceled even if you set the power switch to <2>. (If the flash is ready to fire or if you switch to movie shooting, AEB will be canceled temporarily, but the AEB range will be retained.

    Bracketing sequence
    The AEB shooting sequence and white balance bracketing sequence can be changed from the starting point zero plus/minus 1.

    Number of bracketed shots
    The number of shots taken with AEB and white balance bracketing can be changed from the default, 3 shots, to 2, 5, or 7 shots.

    Safety shift
    OFF: Disable
    Tv/Av: Shutter speed/Aperture. This takes effect in the shutter-priority AE (s) and aperture priority AE (f) modes. If the subject brightness changes and the standard exposure cannot be obtained within the autoexposure range, the camera will automatically change the manually-selected setting to obtain a standard exposure.
    ISO: ISO speed. This works in the Program AE (d), shutter-priority AE (s), and aperture-priority AE (f) modes. If the subject brightness changes and the standard exposure cannot be obtained within the autoexposure range, the camera will automatically change the manually set ISO speed to obtain a standard exposure.

    Same exposure for new aperture
    If the <a> mode (manual exposure shooting) is set and the ISO speed is set manually (other than Auto ISO or H (12800) is set), the maximum aperture’s f/number may change to a higher number (smaller aperture) if you do any of the following: 1. Change the lens, 2.
    Attach or detach an Extender, or 3. Use a zoom lens whose maximum aperture f/number changes. If you then shoot at the exposure setting as is, the image will be underexposed by the amount the maximum aperture f/number changes to a higher number. However, by changing the ISO speed or shutter speed (Tv) automatically, you can obtain the same exposure that would be obtained before you did 1, 2, or 3.
    OFF: Disable
    Automatic changes in settings to maintain the specified exposure will not be applied. The ISO speed, shutter speed, and aperture already set will be used for shooting. If you do 1, 2, or 3 and the maximum aperture f/number increases, adjust the ISO speed and shutter speed before you shoot.
    ISO: ISO speed
    If you do 1, 2, or 3, the ISO speed will automatically increase to compensate for the amount that the maximum aperture f/number increases by. The same exposure that would be obtained before you did 1, 2, or 3 is thereby obtained.
    Tv: Shutter speed
    If you do 1, 2, or 3, a slower shutter speed will automatically be set to compensate for the amount that the maximum aperture f/number increases by. The same exposure that would be obtained before you did 1, 2, or 3 is thereby obtained.

    C. Fn2: Exposure Settings

    C. Fn2: Exposure Settings

    Set shutter speed range
    You can set the shutter speed range. In the <s> <a> modes, you can set the shutter speed manually within the shutter speed range that you have set. In the <d> <f> modes, the shutter speed will be set automatically within the shutter speed range that you have set.
    • Highest speed: You can set it from 1/8000 sec. to 15 sec.
    • Lowest speed: You can set it from 30 sec. to 1/4000 sec

    Set aperture range

    You can set the aperture range. In the <f> <a> <F> modes, you can set the aperture manually within the aperture range that you have set. In the <d> <s> modes, the aperture will be set automatically within the aperture range that you have set.
    • Min. aperture (Max. f/): You can set it from f/91 to f/1.4.
    • Max. aperture (Min. f/): You can set it from f/1.0 to f/64.

    AE lock meter. mode after focus

    If you check “spot” metering for AE locked after focus, then I can lock the exposure when the shutter button is pressed halfway to focus.  Then you can recompose the image using AE (perhaps evaluative) and Auto ISO.  The new compostion will now register new AE and Auto ISO.


    C. Fn3:  Operation Settings

    C. Fn3:  Operation Settings

    Dial direction during Tv/Av

    Dial turning direction when setting the shutter speed and aperture can be reversed.

    Control ring rotation
    The control ring rotation function can also be reversed here.  

    Focus ring rotation 
    Yes, the same goes for the lens focus ring, this can be reversed. 

    RF lens MF focus ring sensitivity 
    When using Canon RF lenses, you can control the sensitivity of the focus ring. 

    C. Fn4: Operation Settings

    C. Fn4: Operation Settings
     
    Customize buttons
    Canon EOS R customisable buttons
    Within the Customize buttons category, the EOS R lets users change the function of 14 different camera controls for still-image shooting; if the camera is set to a video recording mode, that drops to 12 different buttons.
    Canon EOS R customisable buttons back

    A few general points here, before we dive into the details. First, while the number of potential changes users can apply to most of the buttons are much more extensive than we’ve seen on previous Canon EOS DSLRs, each control has a specific, factory-set list of possible functions you can apply. And, these do vary in some cases, from one control to another. For instance, there are 25 possible choices to modify the rear AF point select button when you shoot still images, but 41 for the adjacent AE Lock button.

    Furthermore, it’s not possible (as of late 2018) to add or delete items from the factory-set customization list for each control — if a feature isn’t listed on the menu for customizing a particular button, it can’t be added to that button’s capabilities.

    Even with this, the list of possible changes is far more extensive than we’ve seen in previous Canon EOS DSLRs. To take just one example, the AF-ON button on the top-of-the-line EOS-1D X Mark II digital SLR camera gives the user 9 possible ways to customize it; the same AF-ON button on the EOS R provides 41 possible choices.

    And, the EOS R’s customization changes, depending on if the camera is in a still-image shooting mode, or switched over to a video shooting mode. Set to video, you lose the ability to customize the function of the Movie Start button (on top of the camera, with the red dot icon), and the shutter button, via the Customize buttons menu. (However, in a video shooting mode, there are settings in the 4th Set-up Menu screen for Shutter Button function, allowing users to modify how it operates for a half-press and full press during video shooting.)

    And, in a video shooting mode, the possible functions you can apply to a particular button sometimes change from what’s available in a still-image shooting mode. This is absolutely normal, and not a sign of any malfunction.


    Canon EOS R Eye AF
    Customize dials
    Change the operation of the Main Dial, Quick Control Dial, and Control Ring on Canon’s RF lenses (and on the optional Control Ring Lens Mount Adapter EF-EOS R)

    Customize M-Fn Bar
    Here is where you determine functionality for the touch-sensitive Multi-function bar

    Clear customized settings
    Clear all customised settings and reset them to factory settings 

    C. Fn5: Other Settings

    C. Fn5: Other Settings
     
    Add cropping information
    It is possible to capture a full frame but add in crop marks for various aspect ratios such as 6:6 or 4:5. In the DPP software this makes it very much quicker to achieve an image in the aspect ratio you require for your end usage. If you plan to make use of the cropping information setting in the Custom Functions, first ensure that the crop/aspect ratio setting in the red ‘Shoot4’ is set to FULL. If it is set to anything else, you will be unable to add cropping information through the custom function menu.

    Default erase option
    You can specify which options will be your default when erasing images. This way, you don’t have to go through the default process when selecting images for erasing. 

     Release shutter w/o lens
    You’ll be able to engage the shutter without the Canon EOS R detecting a lens. This is a handy option if you’re using third party manual lenses without electronic contacts. When using these lenses, the camera is unaware of the fact that a lens is connected, and the shutter would otherwise not work.

     Retract lens on power off
    If a powered zoom lens is attached to the EOS R, setting this function to ON would cause the lens to retract when the camera is powered off.

    Add IPTC information
    If this function for adding IPTC (International Press Telecommunications Council) information is equipped with the camera, you can edit and register IPTC information. IPTC information registered on the camera can be added to shot images. IPTC information is comment information, such as captions, credits, and shooting location.

    C. Fn6: Clear

    C. Fn6: Clear

    Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)

    Clears all the user custom functions saved in the Custom functions Menu and resets them to the factory defaults. 


    Star icon (green)

    MY MENU1

    Canon EOS R My Menu

    My Menu allows you to build your own menus. You can add all your most used Menu functions to this page like Format for instance. Adding favourite functions to this menu means that you’ll be able to access them quicker than having to browse through the entire Menu system.

    Conclusion

    The EOS R is a fantastic mirrorless camera, and as you might have noticed there are many features hidden inside the Menu system. Even when coming from another Canon full frame camera the Canon EOS R is somewhat different because this is a mirrorless system with it’s own strengths and weaknesses. An EVF like this might take some time to get used too for instance, but the addition of features like Eye AF should make your job as a photographer easier on the other. A great way to get to know the Canon EOS R is to read this thorough menu run-through alongside your camera, set it up and do some testing of your own.

    If you have any questions, feel free to ask them in the comment section below. Happy shooting!

     

     

  • Canon EOS M100 setup guide with tips and tricks

    Canon EOS M100 setup guide with tips and tricks

    [smartpay_product id=”11″]

    Introduction

    The Canon EOS M100 utilizes a 24.2-megapixel APS-C CMOS sensor. The sensor has a native ISO range of 100 to 25,600 and is the same sensor Canon EOS M50 .This small camera is definitely a great option both for beginners and more advanced photographers who do not want a viewfinder.

    If you’re new to digital photography or Canon cameras, I’m sure this guide full of tips and trips will make you more familiar with the various settings, features and functionalities of the Canon M100. Now it’s time to turn your camera on and press the Menu button. You’ll be able to follow along page by page with this guide.

    manual, aperture, shutter or program AE

    Compared to the more expensive EOS M50, the M100 has a more simplified user interface and you can only choose between Manual Exposure (M), Aperture Priority AE (AV), Shutter Priority AE (Tv) and Program AE (P) Set your camera to M mode if you want to see all the menus.  

    Canon EOS M100 Menu system

    The Shoot Menu (Red Camera Icon)


    Page Shoot 1 (SHOOT1) 

    Canon EOS M100 Setup Menu page 1


    Image quality: you primarily need to decide whether to shoot RAW or JPEG. Raw records all the data from the sensor, Jpeg is basically a much smaller file that has all kinds of information already baked in. Most serious photographers shoot RAW, as this gives you the most flexible file to work with in an application like Adobe Lightroom.

    You’ll be able to recover more colour in the highlights of your image for instance, and pull more detail out of the shadows with a Raw file than with a Jpeg. The only downside are the larger files and the fact that of course you’ll need to develop them later on. RAW file average size of 15.5 MB an JPEG file average size of 7.4 MB with the M100.

    Image quality Image size (3:2 aspect ratio) Shots / 32GB UHS-1 card
    Large Fine 6000 x 4000 pixels 3651
    Large Normal 6000 x 4000 pixels 6782
       
    Medium Fine 3984 x 2656 pixels 6645
    Medium Normal 3984 x 2656 pixels 11741
       
    Small Fine 2976 x 1984 pixels 9948
    Small Normal 2976 x 1984 pixels 16455
       
    Small 2 2400 x 1600 pixels 16874
    RAW 6000 x 4000 pixels 1084
    RAW+Large Fine 6000 x 4000 pixels 835

    If you decide to shoot Jpeg, you can choose between Large, Medium or Small, each with a Fine or Normal setting. Check the table above for the relative pixel sizes for each setting. I would advise Large and Fine of course.


    Still img aspect ratio

    this describes how square (1:1) or wide (16:9) your image is. It’s expressed as a figure, like this: width:height (width always comes first). The aspect ratio of the APS-C sensor is 3:2, and you should use this if you want to use the full surface of the sensor. Cropping can also be done later.  

    • 3:2: the native sensor dimension of the M100.
    • 4:3: native resolution of a micro-four-thirds camera .
    • 16:9: for a wider perspective.
    • 1:1: a basic square setting.

    Shooting info. Disp.

    This  submenu has Grid display [Off, 3×3, 6×4, 3×3+diag], Histogram disp [Brightness/RGB, Large/Small], Reset.  


    Reverse display

    Even though the display looks the same when this function is turned on, it is symmetrically opposite along the vertical axis. Quite a neat feature for the swivel screen when it comes to taking a self portrait or on a self-timer mode.


    Page Shoot 2 (SHOOT2)

    Canon EOS M100 Setup Menu page 2


    Image review: You can modify the amount of time the image displays on the LCD monitor after your EOS M100 writes it to the memory card. You can set the preview time from 2 to 8 seconds or display the image until you turn off the camera. Or you can turn it OFF if you don’t want this. I turn it off as I can always press the play button if I decide to review a shot I’ve just taken..

    • Off
    • 2 sec
    • 4 sec
    • 8 sec
    • Hold


    Touch Shutter

    If the Touch Shutter function is set to On, you can take shots easily by having the camera focus on your subject and adjust the brightness simply by touching. I don’t use this function, but if you’re coming from a smartphone, you could find it very useful.


    Quick Setting Menu Layout

    Choose what is included in the Quick setting Menu Layout and what is not.


    Page Shoot 3 (SHOOT3)

    Canon EOS M100 Setup Menu page 3

    Continuous AF

    Enable or disable continuous AF where the camera constantly tries to acquire focus, even without pressing the shutter. Turn this Off.


    AF-assist beam firing

    This is a read beam that flash has which helps to acquire focus in situations with low light.


    Page Shoot 4 (SHOOT4)

    Canon EOS M100 Setup Menu page 4


    IS settings

    Some lenses have optical image stabilisation built in. This helps with getting sharp pictures even with low shutter speeds; There are really no negative sides to using this, except that it’s not necessary to use when shooting landscapes.

    There is also an electronic image stabilisation system for use with video, that might be beneficial to some, although the effect is minimal.


    Lens aberration correction: digital technology provides the ability to adjust images in-camera. One area this can be useful is in correcting for optical performance. By mapping the performance of each camera and lens at a variety of focal lengths, focus distances and apertures, it is possible to correct for these irregularities and bring the lens performance closer to ‘perfection’. These corrections are only available for photos captured in the JPEG file format. There is no reason to turn this off, except if you’re noticing a slow down when shooting in burst mode. Then this might be the reason

    • Peripheral illumination correction: This is called lens light fall-off or drop in the corners or vignetting.
    • Distortion correction: If you’re shooting with a wide-angle lens you may have noticed that at the wide end you will most likely find some distortion. This corrects distortion for any lens in the lens database.
    • Digital Lens Optimizer: Performs high- level correction for lens aberration in-camera
    • Chromatic aberr corr: Automatically remove color fringing due to Chromatic aberration.
    • Diffraction correction: a camera and lens specific correction that uses a profile of the lens used to ameliorate the effects of diffraction caused by small apertures (usually f/11 and beyond where there will be decrease in sharpness).


    Page Shoot 5 (SHOOT5)

    Canon EOS M100 Setup Menu page 5


    Flash control: Using this menu item, you can adjust flash power. The Flash Control option also enables you to customize a few other aspects of the built-in flash.

    • Flash firing: Normally, this option is set to Enable. If you want to disable the flash, you can choose Disable instead. However, you don’t have to take this step in most cases.(just close the pop-up flash head on top of the camera if you don’t want to use flash).
    • E-TTL II meter: This option enables you to switch from the default flash metering approach, called Evaluative. In this mode, the camera exposes the background using ambient light when possible and then sets the flash power to serve as fill light on the subject. If you instead select the Average option, the flash is used as the primary light source, meaning that the flash power is set to expose the entire scene without relying on ambient light. Typically, this results in a more powerful (and possibly harsh) flash lighting and dark backgrounds.
    • Red-eye reduc.: When flash is used in a low-light environment, the subject’s eyes may come out red in the image. Red eye happens when the light from the flash reflects off the retina of the eyes. The camera’s red-eye reduction feature turns on the red-eye reduction lamp to shine a gentle light into the subject’s eyes to narrow the pupil diameter or iris. A smaller pupil reduces the chances of red eye from occurring.
    • Slow synchro: Slow Sync Flash is a function found on many cameras that tells your camera to shoot with both a longer shutter speed as well as firing the flash. This means you get the best of both worlds above and can both get a relatively sharp shot of your main subject as well as get some ambient light from the background and foreground.
    • Safety FE: The camera automatically changes the shutter speed or aperture value when the flash fires to avoid overexposing and blowing out the highlights in the scene.

    Page Shoot 6 (SHOOT6)

    Canon EOS M100 Setup Menu page 6

     

    Drive Mode: Extremely high speeds continuous shooting up to 10 fps is possible using One Shot AF (first AF position is fixed), and up to 7,4 fps using servo AF (where the camera continuously focuses even with moving subjects).

    • Single: the camera fires one shot each time the shutter button is fully depressed.
    • continuous high: the shutter keeps firing for as long as you depress the shutter button at maximum burst rate.
    • continuous: the shutter keeps firing for as long as you depress the shutter button at a slower burst rate. Great idea if you need to be able to shoot and write longer to the SD card without flooding the buffer.

    AF auto switch

    Sets whether to use autofocus or not.


    Self Timer/Remote Control

    • self timer 10: the camera takes a picture after 10 seconds.
    • self timer 2: the camera takes a picture after 2 seconds.
    • self timer continuous: the camera take pictures continuously after a small delay.

    A remote controller can also be used.


    Page Shoot 8 (SHOOT8)

    Canon EOS M100 Setup Menu page 7


    Movie Rec Size

    Videos are recorded as .MP4 files (MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 encoding with AAC-LC stereo audio) with a maximum duration of 29 minutes and 59 seconds, and a maximum file size of 4GB.

    Resolution and framerate options are: Full HD (1920 x 1080) at 60 (59.94), 50, 30 (29.97), 25, or 24 (23.98) fps; HD (1280 x 720) at 60 or 50 fps; and VGA (640 x 480) at 30 or 25 fps.


    Sound recording:

    Sound rec. Auto/Manual/Disable;

    Manual gives access to a Rec. Level 5-point scale, and a Wind filter/Attenuator screen with Enable/disable for the Wind Filter and Auto/Enable/Disable for the Attenuator.

    All these screens have a full-width live horizontal scale showing the current sound levels on the L and R channels.


    Movie Servo AF:

    When shooting video, a Movie Servo AF mode offers smooth and natural focusing when changing from different subjects or different distances within the scene, as well as the ability to specify tracking sensitivity, AF speed, and Face Tracking priority.


    AF with Shutter Button 

    When you press the shutter button while shooting a movie, you can shoot a still photo. The default setting is ‘ONE SHOT’.
    When ‘ONE SHOT’ is set:
    • You can refocus and shoot a still photo by pressing the shutter button halfway while shooting a movie.
    • When shooting a static subject (not moving), you can take a picture with precise focus.
    When ‘Disable’ is set you can immediately start shooting a still photo by pressing the shutter button, even though focus is not achieved. It is effective when you want to give priority to the shutter chance rather than to focus.

    Auto Slow Shutter 

    The Canon EOS M100 automatically uses slow shutter speeds to obtain brighter recordings in places with insufficient lighting. Ituses shutter speeds down to 1/30 second.


    Playback Menu (blue playback icon)

    Page Play 1 settings (PLAY1)

    Canon EOS M100 playback menu page 1


    Protect images

    You can select how to protect and unprotect an image from deletion on the EOS 50D. Once an image is protected, it cannot be erased by the camera’s erase function. To erase a protected image, you must first cancel the protection. If you erase all the images, only the protected images will remain. This is convenient when you want to erase unnecessary images all at once.

    You can choose to Select images, Select range, All images in folder, unprotect all images in folder, All images on card or unprotect all images on card.


    Rotate image

    Vertical images are rotated automatically so they are displayed vertically on the camera’s LCD monitor and personal computer instead of horizontally. The setting of this feature can be changed.

    • Immediately after image capture, the vertical image will not be automatically rotated for the image review.
    • If the vertical image is taken while the camera is pointed up or down, the image might not rotate automatically for playback.
    • If the vertical image is not automatically rotated on the personal computer screen, it means the software you are using is unable to rotate the image.


    Erase images

    Select and erase images by selecting a range or All images in folder or All images on card.

     

    Rating

    You can add a star rating to your images here. This rating will show up later when you transfer the images to your computer if you use Canon’s Digital Photo Professional.

    You can:

    • Select images
    • Select range
    • All images in folder
    • All images on card


    Slide show

    You can setup and start an in-camera slideshow here.


    Page Play 2 settings (PLAY2)

    Canon EOS M100 playback Menu page 2


    List/Play Digest Movies

    Display a still image shot in auto movie mode to play a digest movie, or specify the date of the digest movie to play.


    Image search

    You’ll find lots of factors to choose here, I honestly don’t know why this was implemented and never use it.


    Creative Filters

    Creative filters offer a way to add special effects to your images. You have a wide range of filters available: Grainy B/W, Soft Focus, Fish-eye Effect, Water painting effect, Toy camera effect, Miniature effect , HDR Art standard, vivid, bold and embossed.


    Page Play 3 settings (PLAY3)


    Canon EOS M100 playback Menu page 3


    Resize

    It’s also possible to resize your RAW images and save them in-camera for posting on social media for instance.


    Cropping

    Complementary to the other in-camera RAW processing feature, you can crop your image or multiple images here freely or according to preset dimensions.


    Red-eye correction

    You can automatically correct red eye in images taken with the flash. You can also correct red eyes in recorded images. However, red eyes may not be automatically detected in some images or the results may not turn out as you intended.


    Canon EOS M100 tips and tricks

    RAW image processing

    Being able to perform RAW image post-processing right after shooting on a camera is a function that comes in very handy.

    These settings are available on the Canon M100:

    • Brightness adjustment: EV-1, EV-2/3, EV-1/3, EV±0, EV+1/3, EV+2/3, EV+1
    • White balance: WB: Shot settings, Auto, Day Light, Shade, Cloudy, Tungsten light, White fluorescent light, Flash, Colour temperature
    • Picture Style: Picture Style: Shot settings, Auto, Standard, Portrait, Landscape, Fine Detail, Neutral, Faithful, Monochrome, User Def. 1, User Def. 2, User Def. 3
    • Auto Lighting Optimizer: Disable, Low, Standard, High
    • High ISO speed Noise Reduction: Disable, Low, Standard, High
    • Image quality: write small, medium and large jpeg files in fine or standard resolution.
    • Peripheral illumination correction: Enable/Disable
    • Chromatic aberration: Enable/Disable
    • Diffraction correction: Enable/Disable


    Print Settings

    You can connect to a a Printer and Print Via a Wireless LAN. You’ll need to set up the connection here. 


    Photobook Set-up

    This function is useful for ordering photobooks online and for printing photobooks on a printer. 

    When you select images to use in photobooks (up to 998 images) and use EOS Utility (provided software) to transfer them to a computer, the selected images will be copied into a dedicated folder. This function is useful for ordering photobooks online and for printing photobooks on a printer.


    Page Play 4 settings (PLAY4)

    Canon EOS M100 playback Menu page 4


    Transition Effect

    Turn on or off the smooth transition effect for in-camera slideshows. 


    Index Effect

    Turn on or off the smooth transition effect for your SD card browsing. 


    Scroll Display

    Scroll Display allows you to browse through your images when you press and hold the left and right arrows after pressing the play button. You can either turn this trick on or off. 


    Auto rotate

    Auto rotate automatically rotates your images that are shot in portrait mode to fit the screen size. You can turn this on or off and decide whether this will behaviour will also apply to images imported to your PC using the canon software .


    Page Play 5 settings (PLAY5)

    Canon EOS M100 playback Menu page 5


    Resume

    Either resume playback of your last picture when re-entering playback mode with the playback button, or start from the beginning of your images. 


    Playback information display

    You can enable up to 9 individual screens – all except the first, which is the basic shooting info overlay, allow the histogram to be specified as brightness or RGB, and in some cases, both.

    Set Up Menu (Spanner, yellow gear icon)

    Set Up Menu Page 1 (SET UP1)

    Canon EOS M100 Setup Menu page 1


    Create Folder

    You can create the folder on your SD card where files will be stored here.


    File Numbering

    You can set the file numbering for each new shot to Continuous or Auto Reset/Manual Reset. Continuous will consecutively number your photos. Auto reset will reset the numbering every time an SD card is inserted, and Manual reset will reset the numbering once.


    Format 

    You should format your SD card in-camera every time you insert an SD card when starting a new session. This to make sure that there won’t be any writing errors. Remember that formatting will erase all the images on the card, and won’t even be recoverable if you choose the low level format option.


    Video System

    Select either NTSC or PAL depending on the region where you live.


    Set Up Menu Page 2 (SET UP2)

    Canon EOS M100 Setup Menu page 2


    Eco Mode

    This function allows you to conserve battery power.When the camera is not in use, the screen quickly darkens to reduce battery consumption.


    Power Saving

    The power will shut off in the following circumstances. Press the power button again to restore power.

    Shooting Mode Powers down approximately 3 minutes after the last control is accessed on the camera. The LCD monitor automatically turns off 1 minute* after the last control is accessed even if [Auto Power Down] is set to [Off]. Press any button other than the power button to turn the LCD monitor back on.
    Playback Mode or connected to a Printer. Powers down approximately 5 minutes after the last control is accessed on the camera.

    Display brightness

    Adjust the brightness of the display in 7 steps.


    Date/Time/Zone

    Select your local time zone, a date and time for your camera. This information will be written in the EXIF data of your photos.


    Language

    Select your preferred language for the camera Menus. I choose English, as it is easiest to find information online in English.


    Set Up Menu Page 3 (SET UP3)

    Canon EOS M100 Setup Menu page 3


    Beep

    You can either enable or disable the beep when you engage the shutter as well as when you touch the screen.


    Operation Vol.

    Adjust the volume of individual camera sounds


    Hints & Tips

    Hints and tips are normally shown when you choose Quick Set menu


    Mode Icon Size/Info

    Change the size of the Icons on the home and info screen. 


    Touch Operation

    Sensitivity of the touch-screen panel can be increased, so that the camera responds to a lighter touch.


    Screen auto-lock settings

    To prevent unintended operations, you can set up automatic locking of the touch-screen panel.


    Set Up Menu Page 3 (SET UP4)

    Canon EOS M100 Setup Menu page 1


    Wi-Fi connect’n

    You can send and receive images and control the camera remotely by connecting it to these devices and services via Wi-Fi.

    Smartphones and Tablets: Send images to smartphones and tablet computers that have Wi-Fi functions. You can also shoot as you view a shooting screen on your smartphone or tablet. For convenience in this guide, smartphones, tablets, and other compatible devices are collectively referred to as “smartphones”.

    Computer: Use software to save camera images to a computer connected via Wi-Fi.

    Web Services: Add your account information to the camera for CANON iMAGE GATEWAY online photography service or other Web services to send camera images to the services. Unsent images on the camera can also be sent to a computer or Web service via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.

    Printers: Send images wirelessly to a PictBridge-compatible printer (supporting DPS over IP) to print them.

    Another Camera: Send images wirelessly between Wi-Fi-compatible Canon cameras.


    Wireless Settings

    You can wirelessly send images to your computer, smartphone or printer. You’ll need to access your local wifi network for this in this menu. 


    GPS Settings

    Even though the Canon EOS M100 does not have a GPS module built-in, it is still possible to add location data to your images via the GPS data of your smartphone. You’ll need to install the Camera Connect app from Canon in order to do this.


    Certification logo display

    You have permission to ignore this screen, which simply displays logos for a couple electronics-industry certifications claimed by the Canon M100. You can find additional logos on the bottom of the camera.


    Copyright Info

    Using this option, you can embed copyright information in your files.


    Canon EOS M100 Advanced manual

    Reset camera

    Fully reset the camera to the factory settings. Warning, you’ll loose all your own settings if you do this.


    Conclusion

    I hope you found this run-through of the entire Canon EOS M100 Menu system useful.Despite the Low price point and lesser features in this camera, there are still lots of  features and functionality hidden inside the menu system, and this guide is a great start to discover them.

    Canon EOS M100 secrets

     If you have any questions, feel free to ask them in the comment section below. 

     

     

  • Sony A7s III setup guide with tips and tricks

    Sony A7s III setup guide with tips and tricks

    Introduction

    The Sony A7s III uses a 12MP BSI Multi-aspect Stacked CMOS Sensor, and a new Bionz X image processor. It can shoot 4K HDR video at 60p, 4:2:2 10bit and 3840 x 1080 mode at 480fps/ Photographers now also get a 10fps burst mode, improved AF with eye tracking dual SD card slots and of Cours the latest NP-FZ100 batteries.  There are a few changes in the menu system when compared to previous Sony models, especially If you upgraded from an A7sm2. We’ll have a page-by-page look at the menus in this post. If you’re looking for a particular feature, I would suggest that you use the search function in your preferred browser, as this post is quite long.

    Sony A7s III Menu overview

    The Sony A7s %Mark 3 has a totally new menu structure. It’s easier to use, but you might need some time to familiarise yourself with this new Menu. Let’s start with the My menu settings.

    My Menu – page 1 of 51

    Sony A7s Iii My Menu

    Perhaps the biggest change, the my menu page has been moved to page 1. The idea is that you add your most used functions to your own menu. This way, all you need is easily accessible. You can add any of the menu functions you wish to this Menu.

    Shooting Menu – Image Quality – page 2 of 51

    Sony A7s Iii Shooting Menu 2

    JPEG/HEIF Switch:

    Switches the file format (JPEG / HEIF) of the still image to be recorded.

    The JPEG format has general compatibility. You can view and edit JPEG files in various environments. The HEIF format has high compression efficiency. The Sony A7s Mark 3can record with high image quality and small file sizes in the HEIF format. Depending on the computer or software, you may not view or edit HEIF files. In addition, a HEIF-compatible environment is required to play back still images in the HEIF format. You can enjoy high-quality still images by connecting the Sony A7s Mark 3and the TV via HDMI.

    • JPEG: Performs digital processing on the RAW file and records it in the JPEG format. This setting gives priority to compatibility.
    • HEIF(4:2:0):Performs digital processing on the RAW file and records it in the HEIF (4:2:0) format. This setting gives priority to image quality and compression efficiency.
    • HEIF(4:2:2):Performs digital processing on the RAW file and records it in the HEIF (4:2:2) format. This setting gives priority to image quality.
    File Format (stills):

    Do you edit your pictures on your desktop? If so, set to RAW or RAW jpeg. A RAW file saves all information the Sony A7s Mark 3pixels register during shooting and will make for better quality images if you want to edit in something like Adobe Lightroom. A jpeg is a compressed image (available in FINE (larger) and STANDARD (smaller, less quality) which takes up less space on your SD card but is less suited for editing afterward. Jpeg images will also have in-Sony A7s Mark 3noise reduction applied, something you might or might not want to take care of yourself later, depending on your style and preference.

    • RAW: Digital processing is not performed on this file format. Select this format to process images on a computer for professional purposes.
    • RAW & JPEG/RAW & HEIF:A RAW image and a JPEG or HEIF image are created at the same time. This is suitable when you need two image files, a JPEG or HEIF for viewing, and a RAW for editing.
    • JPEG/HEIF: The image is recorded in the JPEG or HEIF format.
    RAW file type:

    You can choose between either compressed or uncompressed RAW. Compressed files are smaller, but there is also a small degradation of quality, especially noticeable in long exposures and scenes with high contrast. If you notice haloing in the sky during post-processing for instance, then this is an artifact of that compression.

    JPEG/HEIF Quality:

    Standard, fine and extra fine are selectable. Extra fine will give you the best possible quality JPEG. This includes noise reduction and sharpening from the on-board JPEG engine.

    JPEG Image size:

    Large, medium or small is selectable.

    When Aspect Ratio is set to 3:2

    L: 12M 4240×2832 pixels
    M: 5.1M 2768×1848 pixels
    S: 3.0M 2128×1416 pixels

    When Aspect Ratio is set to 4:3

    L: 11M 3776×2832 pixels
    M: 4.6M 2464×1848 pixels
    S: 2.7M 1888×1416 pixels

    When Aspect Ratio is set to 16:9:

    L: 10M 4240×2384 pixels
    M: 4.3M 2768×1560 pixels
    S: 2.6M 2128×1200 pixels

    When Aspect Ratio is set to 1:1:

    L: 8.0M 2832×2832 pixels
    M: 3.4M 1840×1840 pixels
    S: 2.0M 1408×1408 pixels
    Aspect ratio:

    You can choose 3:2 (which uses the full sensor surface), 4:3; 1:1 or 16:9 (crop but a more broad view).

    Fike Format (movie):
    XAVC HS 4K Records 4K movies in the XAVC HS format.

    The XAVC HS format uses the HEVC codec, which has high compression efficiency. The Sony A7s Mark 3can record movies with higher image quality than XAVC S movies but the same data volume. Long GOP compression is used for movies.

    XAVC S 4K Records movies in 4K resolution (3840×2160). Long GOP compression is used for movies.
    XAVC S HD Records movies in HD resolution (1920×1080). Long GOP compression is used for movies.
    XAVC S-I 4K Records movies in the XAVC S-I format.

    The XAVC S-I format uses Intra compression for movies. This format is more suitable for editing than Long GOP compression.

    XAVC S-I HD Records movies in the XAVC S-I format.

    The XAVC S-I format uses Intra compression for movies. This format is more suitable for editing than Long GOP compression.

    Shooting Menu – Image Quality – page 3 of 51

    Sony A7s Iii Shooting Menu 3

    Movie settings:

    Sets the frame rate, bit rate, color information, and some other settings.

    Menu item details

    When File Format is set to XAVC HS 4K:

    Rec Frame Rate Record Setting Size Movie compression format
    60p/50p 200M 4:2:2 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
    60p/50p 150M 4:2:0 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
    60p/50p 100M 4:2:2 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
    60p/50p 75M 4:2:0 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
    60p/50p 45M 4:2:0 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
    24p* 100M 4:2:2 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
    24p* 100M 4:2:0 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
    24p* 50M 4:2:2 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
    24p* 50M 4:2:0 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
    24p* 30M 4:2:0 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
    120p/100p 280M 4:2:2 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
    120p/100p 200M 4:2:0 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP

    *Only when the NTSC/PAL Selector is set to NTSC.

    When File Format is set to XAVC S 4K:

    Rec Frame Rate Record Setting Size Movie compression format
    60p/50p 200M 4:2:2 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
    60p/50p 150M 4:2:0 8bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
    30p/25p 140M 4:2:2 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
    30p/25p 100M 4:2:0 8bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
    30p/25p 60M 4:2:0 8bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
    24p* 100M 4:2:2 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
    24p* 100M 4:2:0 8bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
    24p* 60M 4:2:0 8bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
    120p/100p 280M 4:2:2 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
    120p/100p 200M 4:2:0 8bit 3840×2160 Long GOP

    *Only when the NTSC/PAL Selector is set to NTSC.

    When File Format is set to XAVC S HD:

    Rec Frame Rate Record Setting Size Movie compression format
    60p/50p 50M 4:2:2 10bit 1920×1080 Long GOP
    60p/50p 50M 4:2:0 8bit 1920×1080 Long GOP
    60p/50p 25M 4:2:0 8bit 1920×1080 Long GOP
    30p/25p 50M 4:2:2 10bit 1920×1080 Long GOP
    30p/25p 50M 4:2:0 8bit 1920×1080 Long GOP
    30p/25p 16M 4:2:0 8bit 1920×1080 Long GOP
    24p* 50M 4:2:2 10bit 1920×1080 Long GOP
    24p* 50M 4:2:0 8bit 1920×1080 Long GOP
    120p/100p 100M 4:2:0 8bit 1920×1080 Long GOP
    120p/100p 60M 4:2:0 8bit 1920×1080 Long GOP

    *Only when the NTSC/PAL Selector is set to NTSC.

    When File Format is set to XAVC S-I 4K:

    Rec Frame Rate Record Setting Size Movie compression format
    60p/50p 600M 4:2:2 10bit/500M 4:2:2 10bit 3840×2160 Intra
    30p/25p 300M 4:2:2 10bit/250M 4:2:2 10bit 3840×2160 Intra
    24p* 240M 4:2:2 10bit 3840×2160 Intra

    *Only when the NTSC/PAL Selector is set to NTSC.

    When File Format is set to XAVC S-I HD:

    Rec Frame Rate Record Setting Size Movie compression format
    60p/50p 222M 4:2:2 10bit/185M 4:2:2 10bit 1920×1080 Intra
    30p/25p 111M 4:2:2 10bit/93M 4:2:2 10bit 1920×1080 Intra
    24p* 89M 4:2:2 10bit 1920×1080 Intra

    *Only when the NTSC/PAL Selector is set to NTSC.

    APS-C/Super 35mm shooting:

    This setting tells the Sony A7s Mark 3what to do when you’ve attached an APS-C lens to this full-frame camera. An APS-C lens won’t cover the full surface of the sensor, or you’ll notice heavy vignetting towards the edges of the frame. When recording movies, this crop is called Super 35mm. The principle here is that you use any a part of the surface of the sensor. If you want to do this, don’t worry too much about image quality as this is a high megapixel Sony A7s Mark 3leaving you with a usable 15MP in APS-C mode.

    • On: Records in either APS-C-equivalent size or Super 35mm-equivalent size.
    • Auto: Automatically sets the capture range depending on the lens.
    • Off: Always captures 35mm full-size image sensor pictures.
    Long Exposure NR:

    Set if you want the processing engine to apply noise reduction for images captured with a long exposure time. Leave it ON as there is no way of duplicating this process in post-Sony A7s IIIion, except to take a black frame of the same length in the same atmospheric conditions.

    High ISO NR:

    Here you can select the amount of noise reduction applied to images with high ISO settings (when quality is set to jpeg). As Sony has rather aggressive noise reduction, I would change it to Low. (if not, you run the risk of getting paint-like, smeared images at higher ISO values).

    HLG Still image:

    By using gamma characteristics equivalent to HLG (Hybrid Log-Gamma: standard for HDR images), you can shoot still images with a wide dynamic range and a wide color gamut compatible with BT.2020.

    Remember that HLG Still Image can only be set when shooting in the HEIF format.

    Color Space:

    You can choose between Standard and Adobe (extended color range) RGB. This is only important if you shoot JPEG and not RAW. Adobe RGB would be preferable if you print many images because of the extended color range.

    Lens Comp:

    The Sony A7s III allows you to select whether you would like to apply various lens compensations (shading, chromatic aberration, distortion) even when shooting in RAW. I leave this ON, but you might get a conflict with RAW files and using a lens profile in programs like Lightroom where you’ll see a reverse vignette for instance.

    Shooting Menu – Media – page 4 of 51

    Sony A7s Iii Shooting Menu 4

    Format:

    When you use a memory card with this Sony A7s Mark 3for the first time, we recommend that you format the card using the Sony A7s Mark 3for stable performance of the memory card. Note that formatting permanently erases all data on the memory card, and is unrecoverable. Save valuable data on a computer, etc.

    Rec. Media Settings:

    Selects the memory card slot on which to record. Slot 1 is the default setting. If you do not intend to change the settings and will only use one memory card, use the slot 1.

    You can select the method for recording an image, such as recording the same image simultaneously to two memory cards or recording different types of images to two memory cards.

    List of storage locations by recording mode:

    Recording Mode Memory card slot selected in Prioritize Rec. Media Another memory card slot
    Standard still image/movie Not available
    Simult. () still image/movie still image
    Simult. () still image/movie movie
    Simult. (/) still image/movie still image/movie
    Sort(RAW/JPEG) still image (RAW)/movie still image (JPEG)
    Sort (RAW/HEIF) still image (RAW)/movie still image (HEIF)
    Sort(JPEG/RAW) still image (JPEG)/movie still image (RAW)
    Sort (HEIF/RAW) still image (HEIF)/movie still image (RAW)
    Sort(/) still image movie

    If a memory card in use becomes full or you have forgotten to insert a memory card into a slot, you can record images to the other memory card.

    • On: The Sony A7s Mark 3automatically starts recording on the other memory card when a memory card in use becomes full or if you have forgotten to insert a memory card.
    • Off: The Sony A7s Mark 3does not perform Auto Switch Media.
    Recover Image DB:

    If image files were processed on a computer, problems may occur in the image database file. In such cases, it will not play the images on the memory card back on the A7s III. If these problems happen, repair the file using Recover Image DB. By the way, Images recorded on the memory card are not deleted by Recover Image DB.

    Display media info:

    Displays the recordable number of still images and the remaining recording time for movies on the memory card.

    Shooting Menu – File – page 5 of 51

    Sony A7s Iii Shooting Menu 5

    File/Folder Settings:
    • Configure settings related to the folder and filename of the still image to be shot.
    • File Number: You can set how to assign file numbers to still images.Series: Does not reset file numbers for each folder.Reset: Resets file numbers for each folder.
    • Set File Name: You can specify the first three characters of the file name.
    • Folder Name: You can set how folder names are assigned.

    File Settings:

    • File Number: You can set how to assign file numbers to movies. Series: Does not reset file numbers even if the memory card is changed.Reset: Resets the file number when the memory card is changed.
    • Series Counter Reset: Resets the series counter used when File Number is set to Series.
    • File Name Format: You can set the format for movie file names.
    • Title Name Settings: You can set the title when File Name Format is set to Title, Date + Title, or Title + Date.
    Select REC Folder:

    If Folder Name under File/Folder Settings is set to Standard Form and there are 2 folders or more, you can select the folder on the memory card to which images are to be recorded.

    Create New Folder:

    Creates a new folder on the memory card for recording still images. A new folder is created with a folder number one greater than the largest folder number currently used. Images are recorded in the newly created folder.

    Up to 4,000 images in total can be stored in one folder. When the folder capacity is exceeded, a new folder may be automatically created.

    IPTC information:

    You can write IPTC information when recording still images. Create and edit IPTC information using the IPTC Metadata Preset and write the information to a memory card beforehand.

    • Write IPTC Info: Sets whether to write IPTC information to still images.
    • Register IPTC Info :Registers IPTC information from a memory card to the camera. Select Slot 1 or Slot 2 as the memory card from which to read out IPTC information.
    Copyright info:
    • Write Copyright Info: Sets whether to write copyright information. If you select On, a Copyright icon will appear on the shooting screen.
    • Set Photographer: Sets the photographer’s name.
    • Set Copyright: Sets the copyright holder name.
    • Disp. Copyright Info: Displays the current copyright information.
    Write Serial Number:

    Writes the camera’s serial number to the Exif data when shooting still images.

    Shooting Menu – Shooting Mode – page 6 of 51

    Sony A7s Iii Shooting Menu 6

    Recall Sony A7s Mark 3Setting:

    Allows you to shoot an image after recalling your preferred shooting settings registered with MR settings on the Mode dial or select them here.

    In order to save a Sony A7s Mark 3Setting:

    1. Set the mode dial to 1, 2, or 3 (Recall Sony A7s Mark 3Setting).
    2. Press the center of the control wheel to confirm.
    Sony A7s Mark 3Set. Memory:

    Allows you to register up to 3 often-used modes or Sony A7s III settings to the Sony A7s III and up to 4 (M1 through M4) to the memory card. You can recall the settings using just the mode dial.

    1. Set the Sony A7s III to the setting you want to register.
    2. MENU – Shooting – Shooting Mode – Sony A7s Mark 3Set. Memory – desired number.
    3. Press the center of the control wheel to confirm.
    Memory/Recall Media:

    Selects the memory card slot from which settings are recalled or to which settings are registered for M1 through M4.

    Reg. Custom Shoot Set:

    You can register shooting settings (such as exposure, focus setting, drive mode, etc.) to a custom key in advance and temporarily recall them while holding down the key. Simply press the custom key to switch the settings quickly and release the key to go back to the original settings. This function is useful when recording active scenes such as sports.

    1. MENU – Shooting – Shooting Mode – Reg. Custom Shoot Set – Select a registration number from Recall Custom hold 1 to Recall Custom hold 3.
      The setting screen for the selected number will be displayed.
    2. Using the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel, select the check boxes for the functions that you want to recall with one of the registration numbers and press the center to check each box.

      A check mark will be displayed in the boxes for the functions.

      • To cancel a selection, press the center again.
    3. Select the function that you want to adjust using the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel, and press the center to adjust the function to the desired setting.
      • Select Import Current Setting to register the current settings of the Sony A7s Mark 3to the registration number that you chose.
    4. Select Register.

    Shooting Menu – Drive Mode – page 7 of 51

    Sony A7s Iii Shooting Menu 7

    Drive Mode:

    As usual, Single and Continuous shooting modes are available. Single will take one exposure when you press the shutter, continuous will continue taking exposures until the buffer fills up. If you want to take advantage of the buffer, you should set your A7sm3 to continuous. If not, the Sony A7s Mark 3will write every exposure separately to your SD card.

    Bracket Settings:

    You can set the self-timer in bracket shooting mode, and the shooting order for exposure bracketing and white balance bracketing.

    • Self-timer during Brkt: Sets whether to use the self-timer during bracket shooting. Also, sets the number of seconds until the shutter is released if using the self-timer. (OFF/2 Sec/5 Sec/10 Sec)
    • Bracket order: Sets the order of exposure bracketing and white balance bracketing.
    Interval Shoot Func.:

    You can automatically shoot a series of still images with the shooting interval and number of shots that you set in advance (Interval shooting). On this camera, you cannot create a movie from still images produced by interval shooting.

    1. MENU –  Shooting  – Drive Mode – Interval Shoot Func. – interval Shooting – On.
    2. MENU – Shooting Drive Mode – Interval Shoot Func. – Select an item to set, and then select the desired setting.
    3. Press the shutter button.

      When the time set for Shooting Start Time has elapsed, shooting will start.

      • When the number of shots set for Number of Shots is completed, the Sony A7s Mark 3will return to the standby screen for interval shooting.
    Menu item details:
    • Interval Shooting: Sets whether to perform interval shooting.
    • Shooting Start Time: Sets the time from when you press the shutter button to when interval shooting starts. (1 second to 99 minutes 59 seconds)
    • Shooting Interval: Sets the shooting interval (time from when one exposure starts to when the exposure for the next shot starts). (1 second to 60 seconds)
    • Number of Shots: Sets the number of shots for interval shooting. (1 shot to 9999 shots)
    • AE Tracking Sensitivity: Sets the tracking sensitivity of the auto exposure against the change in luminance during interval shooting. If you select Low, exposure changes during interval shooting will be smoother. (High, Mid or Low)
    • Shutter Type in Interval: Sets the shutter type during interval shooting. (Mechanical Shutter/Electronic Shutter)
    • Shoot Interval Priority: Sets whether to prioritize the shooting interval when the exposure mode is Program Auto or Aperture Priority and the shutter speed becomes longer than the time set for .Shooting Interval.

    Shooting Menu – Shutter/Silent – page 8 of 51

    Sony A7s Iii Shooting Menu 9

    Silent Mode Settings:

    You can configure settings related to the silent mode, which allows you to shoot without shutter sounds or electronic sounds. You can also set whether to change the settings for other functions that emit sounds from the Sony A7s Mark 3when the Sony A7s Mark 3is set to the silent mode.

    • Silent Mode: Sets whether to shoot without shutter sounds or electronic sounds.  When set to On, Shutter Type and Shutter Type in Interval become locked to Electronic Shutter, and Audio signals become locked to Off.
    • Target Function Settings: Sets whether to simultaneously change the settings for other functions that emit sounds from the Sony A7s Mark 3when the Sony A7s Mark 3is set to the silent mode.
    Shutter Type:

    You can set whether to shoot with a mechanical shutter or an electronic shutter. Always selec mechanical shutter when using flash.

    e-front Curtain Shut.:

    he electronic front curtain shutter function shortens the time lag between when the shutter button is pressed and the shutter is released.

    Release w/o Lens:

    Sets whether the shutter can be released when no lens is attached.

    Release w/o Card:

    Sets whether the shutter can be released when no memory card has been inserted.

    Anti-flicker Shoot:

    Detects flickering/blinking from artificial light sources such as fluorescent lighting and times the shooting of images to moments when flickering will have less of an impact.

    This function reduces differences in the exposure and color tone caused by flickering between the upper area and the lower area of an image shot with fast shutter speed and during continuous shooting.

    Shooting Menu – Image Stabilization – page 9 of 51

    Sony A7s Iii Shooting Menu 8

    Steadyshot:

    Sets whether to use the SteadyShot function.

    For Movies, there is an extra setting:

    • Active: Provides a more powerful SteadyShot effect.
    • Standard: Reduces Sony A7s Mark 3shake under stable movie shooting conditions.
    • Off: Does not use SteadyShot.
    Steadyshot Adjust:

    You can shoot with an appropriate SteadyShot setting for the attached lens.

    • Auto: Performs the SteadyShot function automatically according to the information obtained from the attached lens.
    • Manual: Performs the SteadyShot function according to the focal-length set using the next item in the menu, Focal Length.
    Focal Length:

    Sets the focal length information to be used for the built-in SteadyShot function when SteadyShot Adjust is set to Manual. Range between 8 and 1000 mm.

    Shooting Menu – Zoom – page 10 of 51

    Sony A7s Iii Shooting Menu 10

    Zoom:

    The zoom feature of the A7s III provides a higher magnification zoom by combining various zoom features. The icon displayed on the screen changes, according to the selected zoom feature.

    Optical zoom range: Zoom images in the zoom range of a lens. When a power zoom lens is mounted, the zoom bar of the optical zoom range is displayed. When a lens other than a power zoom lens is mounted, the zoom slider becomes locked at the left end of the zoom bar while the zoom position is in the optical zoom range. The magnification is displayed as “×1.0.” If Zoom Range is set to Optical zoom only the zoom slider will not be displayed.

    • Smart Zoom range: Zoom images without causing the original quality to deteriorate by partially cropping an image (only when JPEG Image Size or HEIF Image Size is set to M or S).
    • Clear Image Zoom range: Zoom images using an image process with less deterioration. When you set Zoom Range to Clear Image Zoom or Digital Zoom, you can use this zoom function.
    • Digital Zoom range.You can magnify images using an image process. When you set Zoom Range to Digital Zoom, you can use this zoom function.
    Zoom Range:
    • Optical zoom only: Limits the zoom range to the optical zoom. You can use the Smart Zoom function if you set JPEG Image Size or HEIF mage Size to M or S.
    • Clear Image Zoom : Select this setting to use Clear Image Zoom. Even if the zoom range exceeds the optical zoom, the Sony A7s III magnifies images using an image process with less deterioration.
    • Digital Zoom : When the zoom range of the Clear Image Zoom is exceeded, the Sony A7s III magnifies images to the largest scale. However, the image quality will deteriorate.
    Zoom Speed:

    Sets the zoom speed when using the custom key to which Zoom Operation (T) / Zoom Operation (W) is assigned. This can be set separately for shooting standby and movie recording.

    • Fixed Speed STBY: Sets the zoom speed during shooting standby. (1 (Slow) to 8 (Fast))
    • Fixed Speed: REC Sets the zoom speed during movie recording. (1 (Slow) to 8 (Fast))
    Remote Zoom Speed:

    Sets the zoom speed when performing zoom operations using the remote commander or Ctrl w/ Smartphone. This can be set separately for shooting standby and movie recording.

    • Remote speed Type: Sets whether to lock the zoom speed.
    • Remote Fixed Speed STBY: Sets the zoom speed during shooting standby when remote Speed Type is set to Fix.
    • Remote Fixed Speed REC: Sets the zoom speed during movie recording when remote Speed Type is set to Fix.

    Shooting Menu – Shooting Display – page 11 of 51

    Sony A7s Iii Shooting Menu 11

    Grid Line Display:

    Sets whether the grid line is displayed or not during shooting. The grid line will help you to adjust the composition of images.

    Grid Line Type:

    Sets the displayed type of grid line. The grid line will help you to adjust the composition of images.

    • Rule of 3rds Grid: Place principal subjects close to one of the grid lines that divide the image into thirds for a well-balanced composition.
    • Square Grid: Square grids make it easier to confirm the horizontal level of your composition. This is useful for assessing the composition when shooting landscapes, closeups, or when performing Sony A7s Mark 3scanning.
    • Diag. + Square Grid: Place a subject on the diagonal line to express an uplifting and powerful feeling.
    Live View Display Set:

    Sets whether to show images altered with effects of the exposure compensation, white balance, Creative Look, etc. on the screen.

    • Live View Display: Sets whether to reflect all the shooting settings on the monitor and display the Live View in conditions close to what your picture will look like once the settings are applied, or to display the Live View without reflecting the settings.
    • Exposure Effect: Sets whether to display the Live View with automatic correction by reflecting the exposure from the flash when Live View Display is set to Setting Effect ON.
    • Frame Rate Low Limit: Sets whether to keep the frame rate of the Live View from becoming too slow.

    Exposure/Color Menu  – Exposure page 12 of 51

    Sony A7s Iii Shooting Menu 12

    ISO:

    Sensitivity to light is expressed by the ISO number (recommended exposure index). The larger the number, the higher the sensitivity. You can change the range of ISO sensitivity that is set automatically in ISO AUTO mode. Select ISO AUTO and press the right side of the control wheel and set the desired values for ISO AUTO Maximum and ISO AUTO Minimum.

    ISO AUTO: Sets the ISO sensitivity automatically.

    ISO 40 – ISO 409600: Sets the ISO sensitivity manually. Selecting a larger number increases the ISO sensitivity.

    ISO Range limit:

    ou can limit the range of ISO sensitivity when the ISO sensitivity is set manually.

    ISO Auto Min. SS:

    If you select ISO AUTO when the shooting mode is P (Program Auto) or A (Aperture Priority), you can set the shutter speed at which the ISO sensitivity changes.
    This function is effective for shooting moving subjects. You can minimize subject blurring while also preventing Sony A7s Mark 3shake.

    • SLOWER (Slower)/SLOW (Slow): The ISO sensitivity will change at shutter speeds slower than Standard, so you can shoot images with less noise.
    • STD (Standard): The Sony A7s Mark 3automatically sets the shutter speed based on the focal length of the lens.
    • FAST (Fast)/FASTER (Faster):The ISO sensitivity will change at shutter speeds faster than Standard, so you can prevent Sony A7s Mark 3shake and subject blurring.
    • 1/8000 ― 30″: The ISO sensitivity changes at the shutter speed you have set.

    Exposure/Color Menu – Exposure Comp. – page 13 of 51

    Sony A7s Iii Shooting Menu 13

    Exposure Comp.:

    Normally, exposure is set automatically (auto exposure). Based on the exposure value set by auto exposure, you can make the entire image brighter or darker if you adjust Exposure Comp. to the plus side or minus side, respectively (exposure compensation).

    Reset EV Comp.:

    Sets whether to maintain the exposure value set using Exposure Comp. When you turn off the power when the exposure compensation dial position is set to “0.”

    Exposure Step:

    You can adjust the setting increment for the shutter speed, aperture, and exposure compensation values.

    Exposure Std. Adjust:

    Adjusts this camera’s standard for the correct exposure value for each metering mode. You can set a value from -1 EV to +1 EV in 1/6 EV increments.

    Exposure/Color Menu – Metering – page 14 of 51

    Sony A7s Iii Shooting Menu 14

    Metering Mode:

    Selects the metering mode that sets which part of the screen to measure for determining the exposure.

    • Multi: Measures light on each area after dividing the total area into multiple areas and determines the proper exposure of the entire screen (Multi-pattern metering).
    • Center: Measures the average brightness of the entire screen, while emphasizing the central area of the screen (Center-weighted metering).
    • Spot: Measures only inside the metering circle. This mode is suitable for measuring light on a specified part of the entire screen. The size of the metering circle can be selected from Spot: Standard and Spot: Large. The position of the metering circle depends the setting for Spot Metering Point.
    • Entire Screen Avg.: Measures the average brightness of the entire screen. The exposure will be stable, even if the composition or the position of the subject changes.
    • Highlight: Measures the brightness while emphasizing the highlighted area on the screen. This mode is suitable for shooting the subject while avoiding overexposure.
    Face Priority in Mul…:

    Sets whether the Sony A7s Mark 3measures brightness based on detected faces when Metering Mode is set to Multi.

    Spot Metering Point:

    Sets whether to coordinate the spot metering position with the focus area when Focus Area is set to the following parameters:

    • Spot: S/Spot: M/Spot: L
    • Expand Spot
    • Tracking: Spot S/Tracking: Spot M/Tracking: Spot L
    • Tracking: Expand Spot

    Menu items:

    • Center: The spot metering position does not coordinate with the focus area, but always meters brightness at the center.
    • Focus Point Link: The spot metering position coordinates with the focus area.
    AEL w/ Shutter:

    Sets whether to fix the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down.  Select Off to adjust the focus and the exposure separately.

    • Auto: Fixes the exposure after adjusting the focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down when Focus Mode is set to Single-shot AF. When Focus Mode is set to Automatic AF, and the Sony A7s III determines that the subject is moving, or you shoot burst images, the fixed exposure is cancelled.
    • On: Fixes the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down.
    • Off: Does not fix the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down. Use this mode when you want to adjust focus and exposure separately. The A7s III keeps adjusting the exposure while shooting in Cont. Shooting mode.

    Exposure/Color Menu – Flash – page 15 of 51

    Sony A7s Iii Shooting Menu 15

    Flash Mode:

    You can choose between five flash modes:

    1. Flash Off: The flash does not operate.
    2. Autoflash: The flash works in dark environments or when shooting towards bright light.
    3. Fill-flash: The flash works every time you trigger the shutter.
    4. Slow Sync.:The flash works every time you trigger the shutter. Slow sync shooting allows you to shoot a clear image of both the subject and the background by slowing the shutter speed.
    5. Rear Sync.:The flash works right before the exposure is completed every time you trigger the shutter. Rear sync shooting allows you to shoot a natural image of the trail of a moving subject such as a moving car or a walking person.
    Flash Comp:

    Adjusts the amount of flash light in a range of –3.0 EV to +3.0 EV. Flash compensation changes the amount of flash light only. Exposure compensation changes the amount of flash light along with the change of the shutter speed and aperture.

    Exp. Comp. Set:

    Sets whether to apply the exposure compensation value to control both flash light and ambient light, or just ambient light.

    Hack: I like to control only exposure with the exposure compensation dial and Flash output on the flash remote or flash itself.

    Wireless Flash:

    For Sony branded wireless flashes: There are two methods for wireless flash shooting: light-signal flash shooting that uses the light of the flash attached to the Sony A7s Mark 3as a signal light, and radio-signal flash shooting that uses wireless communication. To perform radio-signal flash shooting, use a compatible flash or the Wireless Radio Commander. For details on how to set each method, refer to the instruction manual of the flash or the Wireless Radio Commander.

    Red Eye Reduction:

    When using the flash, it is fired two or more times before shooting to reduce the red-eye phenomenon.

    External Flash Set.:

    You can configure the settings of a Sony branded flash attached to the Sony A7s Mark 3using the monitor and control wheel of the camera.

    • Ext. Flash Firing Set.: Allows you to configure settings related to the firing of the flash, such as the flash mode, flash level, etc.
    • Ext. Flash Cust. Set.: Allows you to configure other flash settings, wireless settings, and flash unit settings.

    Exposure/Color Menu – White Balance – page 16 of 51

    Sony A7s Iii Shooting Menu 16

    White Balance:

    Corrects the tone effect of the ambient light condition to record a neutral white subject in white. Use this function when the color tones of the image did not come out as you expected, or when you want to change the color tones on purpose for photographic expression.

    Priority Set in AWB:

    Selects which tone to prioritize when shooting under lighting conditions such as incandescent light when White Balance is set to Auto.

    Standard: Shoots with standard auto white balance. The Sony A7s Mark 3automatically adjusts the color tones.

    Ambience: Prioritizes the color tone of the light source. This is suitable when you want to produce a warm atmosphere.

    White: Prioritizes a reSony A7s IIIion of white color when the color temperature of the light source is low.

    Shutter AWB Lock:

    You can set whether or not to lock the white balance while the shutter button is pressed when White Balance is set to Auto or Underwater Auto.

    This function prevents unintentional changes to the white balance during continuous shooting or when shooting with the shutter button pressed halfway down.

    • Shutter Half Press: Locks the white balance while the shutter button is pressed halfway down, even in the auto white balance mode. The white balance is also locked during continuous shooting.
    • Cont. Shooting: Locks the white balance to the setting in the first shot during continuous shooting, even in the auto white balance mode.
    • Off: Operates with the normal auto white balance.

    Exposure/Color Menu – Color/Tone – page 17 of 51

    Sony A7s Iii Shooting Menu 17

    D-Range Optimizer:

    By dividing the image into small areas, the Sony A7s III analyzes the contrast of light and shadow between the subject and the background, and creates an image with the optimal brightness and gradation

    If you select D-Range Optimizer: Auto, the Sony A7s Mark 3will automatically adjust the brightness and gradation. To optimize the gradation of a recorded image by individual areas, select an optimization level from D-Range Optimizer: Lv1 (weak) to D-Range Optimizer: Lv5 (strong).

    Creative Look:

    Creative Looks are presets for image creation pre-installed on the camera.

    With this function, you can choose the finish of the image by selecting a “Look.” In addition, you can fine-tune the contrast, highlights, shadows, fade, saturation, sharpness, sharpness range, and clarity for each Look.

    Menu items:

    •  ST: Standard finish for a wide range of subjects and scenes.
    •  PT: For capturing skin in a soft tone, ideally suited for shooting portraits.
    •  NT: The saturation and sharpness are lowered for shooting images in subdued tones. This is also suitable for capturing image material to be modified with a computer.
    •  VV: It heightens the saturation and contrast for shooting striking images of colorful scenes and subjects such as flowers, spring greenery, blue sky, or ocean views.
    •  VV2: Creates an image with bright and vivid colors with rich clarity.
    •  FL: Creates an image with moody finish by applying sharp contrast to the calm coloring as well as the impressive sky and colors of the greens.
    •  IN: Creates an image with matte textures by suppressing the contrast and saturation.
    •  SH: Creates an image with bright, transparent, soft, and vivid mood.
    •  BW: For shooting images in black and white monotone.
    •  SE: For shooting images in sepia monotone.
    • Registering preferred settings (Custom Look): Select the six custom look (the boxes with numbers on the left side) to register preferred settings. Then select the desired settings using the right button. You can recall the same “Look” presets with slightly different settings.

    Each look can also be further customised:

    • Contrast: The higher the value selected, the more the difference of light and shadow is accentuated, and the bigger the effect on the image. (-9 to +9)
    • Highlights: Adjusts the brightness of the bright areas. When a higher value is selected, the image becomes brighter. (-9 to +9)
    • Shadows: Adjusts the darkness of the dark areas. When a higher value is selected, the image becomes brighter. (-9 to +9)
    • Fade: Adjusts fade. A larger value makes the effect greater. (0 to 9)
    •  Saturation: The higher the value selected, the more vivid the color. When a lower value is selected, the color of the image is restrained and subdued. (-9 to +9)
    • Sharpness: Adjusts the sharpness. The higher the value selected, the more the contours are accentuated, and the lower the value selected, the more the contours are softened. (0 to 9)
    • Sharpness Range: Adjust the range where the sharpness effect is applied. A larger value makes the sharpness effect apply to finer outlines. (1 to 5)
    • Clarity: Adjusts clarity. A larger value makes the effect greater. (0 to 9)
    Picture Profile:

    You can customize the picture quality by adjusting picture profile items such as Gamma and Detail. When setting these parameters, connect the Sony A7s Mark 3to a TV or monitor, and adjust them while observing the picture on the screen.

    Available picture profiles:
    • PP1: Example setting using Movie gamma.
    • PP2: Example setting using Still gamma.
    • PP3: Example setting of natural color tone using the ITU709 gamma.
    • PP4: Example setting of a color tone faithful to the ITU709 standard.
    • PP5: Example setting using Cine1 gamma.
    • PP6: Example setting using Cine2 gamma.
    • PP7: Example setting using S-Log2 gamma.
    • PP8: Example setting using the S-Log3 gamma and the S-Gamut3.Cine under Color Mode.
    • PP9: Example setting using the S-Log3 gamma and the S-Gamut3under Color Mode.
    • PP10: Example setting for recording HDR movies using HLG2 gamma.
    HDR movie recording

    The Sony A7s Mark 3can record HDR movies when a gamma from HLG, HLG1 to HLG3 is selected in the picture profile. Picture profile preset PP10 provides an example setting for HDR recording. Movies recorded using PP10 can be viewed with a wider range of brightness than usual when played back on a TV supporting Hybrid Log-Gamma (HLG). This way, even scenes with a wide range of brightness can be recorded and displayed faithfully, without looking under or over-exposed. HLG is used in HDR TV program Sony A7s III on, as defined in the international standard Recommendation ITU-R BT.2100.

    The following settings are available:

    Black Level: Sets the black level. (–15 to +15)
    Gamma: Selects a gamma curve
    • Movie: Standard gamma curve for movies
    • Still: Standard gamma curve for still images
    • Cine1: Softens the contrast in dark parts and emphasizes gradation in bright parts to produce a relaxed color movie. (equivalent to HG4609G33)
    • Cine2: Similar to Cine1 but optimized for editing with up to 100% video signal. (equivalent to HG4600G30)
    • Cine3: Intensifies the contrast in light and shade more than Cine1 and strengthens gradation in black.
    • Cine4: Strengthens the contrast in dark parts more than Cine3.
    • ITU709: Gamma curve that corresponds to ITU709.
    • ITU709(800%): Gamma curve for confirming scenes on the assumption of shooting using S-Log2 or S-Log3.
    • S-Log2: Gamma curve for S-Log2. This setting is based on the assumption that the picture will be processed after shooting.
    • S-Log3: Gamma curve for S-Log3 with more similar features to film. This setting is based on the assumption that the picture will be processed after shooting.
    • HLG: Gamma curve for HDR recording. Equivalent to the HDR standard Hybrid Log-Gamma, ITU-R BT.2100.
    • HLG1: Gamma curve for HDR recording. Emphasizes noise reduction. However, shooting is restricted to a narrower dynamic range than with HLG2 or HLG3.
    • HLG2: Gamma curve for HDR recording. Provides a balance of dynamic range and noise reduction.
    • HLG3: Gamma curve for HDR recording. Wider dynamic range than HLG2. However, noise may increase.
    Black Gamma: Corrects gamma in low intensity areas.
    • Black Gamma is fixed at “0” and cannot be adjusted when Gamma is set to HLG, HLG1, HLG2, or HLG3.
    • Range: Selects the correcting range. (Wide / Middle / Narrow)
    • Level: Sets the correcting level. (-7 (maximum black compression) to +7 (maximum black stretch))

    Knee: Sets knee point and slope for video signal compression to prevent over-exposure by limiting signals in high-intensity areas of the subject to the dynamic range of your camera.
    Knee is disabled if Mode is set to Auto when Gamma is set to Still, Cine1, Cine2, Cine3, Cine4, ITU709(800%), S-Log2, S-Log3, HLG, HLG1, HLG2, or HLG3. To enable Knee, set Mode to Manual.

    Mode: Selects auto/manual settings.

    • Auto: The knee point and slope are set automatically.
    • Manual: The knee point and slope are set manually.

    Auto Set: Settings when Auto is selected for Mode.

    • Max Point: Sets the maximum point of the knee point. (90% to 100%)
    • Sensitivity: Sets the sensitivity. (High / Mid / Low)

    Manual Set: Settings when Manual is selected for Mode.

    • Point: Sets the knee point. (75% to 105%)
    • Slope: Sets the knee slope. (-5 (gentle) to +5 (ste
    Color Mode

    Sets type and level of colors.  In Color Mode, only BT.2020 and 709 are available when Gamma is set to HLG, HLG1, HLG2, or HLG3.

    • Movie: Suitable colors when Gamma is set to Movie.
    • Still: Suitable colors when Gamma is set to Still.
    • Cinema: Suitable colors when Gamma is set to Cine1 or Cine2.
    • Pro: Similar color tones to the standard image quality of Sony professional cameras (when combined with ITU709 gamma)
    • ITU709 Matrix: Colors corresponding to ITU709 standard (when combined with ITU709 gamma)
    • Black & White: Sets the saturation to zero for shooting in black and white.
    • S-Gamut: Setting based on the assumption that the pictures will be processed after shooting. Used when Gammais set to S-Log2.
    • S-Gamut3.Cine: Setting based on the assumption that the pictures will be processed after shooting. Used when Gamma is set to S-Log3. This setting allows you to shoot in a color space that can easily be converted for digital cinema.
    • S-Gamut3: Setting based on the assumption that the pictures will be processed after shooting. Used when Gamma is set to S-Log3. This setting allows you to shoot in a wide color space.
    • BT.2020: Standard color tone when Gamma is set to HLG, HLG1, HLG2, or HLG3.
    • 709: Color tone when Gamma is set to HLG, HLG1, HLG2, or HLG3 and movies are recorded with HDTV color (BT.709).
    Saturation
    Sets the color saturation. (-32 to +32)
    Color Phase: Sets the color phase. (-7 to +7)

    Color Depth: Sets the color depth for each color phase.

    This function is more effective for chromatic colors and less effective for achromatic colors. The color looks deeper as you increase the setting value towards the positive side, and lighter as you decrease the value towards the negative side. This function is effective even if you set Color Mode to Black & White.

    • R -7 (light red) to +7 (deep red)
    • G -7 (light green) to +7 (deep green)
    • B -7 (light blue) to +7 (deep blue)
    • C -7 (light cyan) to +7 (deep cyan)
    • M -7 (light magenta) to +7 (deep magenta)
    • Y -7 (light yellow) to +7 (deep yellow)
    Detail

    Sets items for Detail.

    • Level: Sets the Detail level. (-7 to +7)
    • Adjust: The following parameters can be selected manually.
    • Mode: Selects auto/manual setting. (Auto (automatic optimization) / Manual (The details are set manually.))
    • V/H Balance: Sets the vertical (V) and horizontal (H) balance of DETAIL. (-2 (off to the vertical (V) side) to +2 (off to the horizontal (H) side))
    • B/W Balance: Selects the balance of the lower DETAIL (B) and the upper DETAIL (W). (Type1 (off to the lower DETAIL (B) side) to Type5 (off to the upper DETAIL (W) side))
    • Limit: Sets the limit level of Detail. (0 (Low limit level: likely to be limited) to 7 (High limit level: unlikely to be limited))
    • Crispning: Sets the crispening level. (0 (shallow crispening level) to 7 (deep crispening level))
    • Hi-Light Detail: Sets the Detail level in the high intensity areas. (0 to 4)

    Exposure/Color Menu – Zebra Display – page 18 of 51

    Sony A7s Iii Shooting Menu 18

    Zebra Display:

    Sets a zebra pattern, which appears over part of an image if the brightness level of that part meets the IRE level that you have set. Use this zebra pattern as a guide to adjust the brightness.

    Zebra Level:

    You can adjust the brightness level of the zebra pattern.

    Focus Menu – AF/MF – page 19 of 51

    Sony A7s Iii Shooting Menu 19

    Focus Mode:

    Selects the focus method to suit the movement of the subject.

    • AF-S (Single-shot AF): The Sony A7s Mark 3locks the focus once focusing is complete. Use this when the subject is motionless.
    • AF-C (Continuous AF): The Sony A7s Mark 3continues to focus while the shutter button is pressed and held halfway down. Use this when the subject is in motion. In Continuous AF mode, there is no beep when the Sony A7s Mark 3focuses.
    • DMF (DMF): You can make fine adjustments manually after performing autofocusing, letting you focus on a subject more quickly than when using the manual focus from the beginning. This is convenient in situations such as macro shooting.
    • MF (Manual Focus): Adjusts the focus manually. If you cannot focus on the intended subject using autofocus, use manual focus.
    Priority Set in AF-S:

    Sets whether to release the shutter even if the subject is not in focus when Focus Mode is set to Single-shot AF, DMF or Automatic AF and the subject is still.

    Options are:

    • AF: Prioritizes focusing. The shutter will not be released until the subject is in focus.
    • Release: Prioritizes the shutter’s release. The shutter will be released even if the subject is out of focus.
    Priority Set in AF-C:

    Sets whether to release the shutter even if the subject is not in focus when the continuous AF is activated and the subject is in motion. Balanced works great for any type of photography.

    Choose between:

    • AF: Prioritizes focusing. The shutter will not be released until the subject is in focus.
    • Release: Prioritizes the shutter’s release. The shutter will be released even if the subject is out of focus.
    • Balanced Emphasis: Shoots with a balanced emphasis on both focusing and shutter release.
    AF Tracking Sensitivity:

    You can select the AF track sensitivity when the subject goes out of focus in still image mode. Choose between responsive, standard or Locked-On.

    Hack: Locked-ON helps to keep the focus on a specific subject when other things are crossing in front of the subject.

    AF Illuminator:

    The AF illuminator supplies fill light to focus more easily on a subject in dark surroundings. In the time between pressing the shutter button halfway down and locking the focus, the AF illuminator lights up to allow the Sony A7s Mark 3to focus easily.

    If a flash with an AF illuminator function is attached to the Multi Interface Shoe, when the flash is turned on, the AF illuminator of the flash will turn on as well.

    Aperture Drive in AF:

    Changes the aperture drive system to prioritize the auto-focusing tracking performance or to prioritize silence.

    • Focus Priority: Changes the aperture drive system to prioritize auto-focusing performance.
    • Standard: Uses the standard aperture drive system.
    • Silent Priority: Changes the aperture drive system to prioritize silence so that the sound from the aperture drive is quieter than in Standard.
    AF w/ Shutter:

    Sets whether to fix the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down.  Select Off to adjust the focus and the exposure separately.

    Auto: Fixes the exposure after adjusting the focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down when Focus Mode is set to Single-shot AF. When Focus Mode is set to Automatic AF, and the Sony A7s III determines that the subject is moving, or you shoot burst images, the fixed exposure is cancelled.

    • On: Fixes the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down.
    • Off: Does not fix the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down. Use this mode when you want to adjust focus and exposure separately.
    • The Sony A7s III keeps adjusting the exposure while shooting in Cont. Shooting mode.

    Focus Menu – AF/MF – page 20 of 51

    Sony A7s Iii Shooting Menu 20

    Pre-AF:

    The Sony A7s III automatically adjusts focus before you press the shutter button halfway down.

    Focus Menu – Focus Area – page 21 of 51

    Sony A7s Iii Shooting Menu 21

    Focus Area:

    Set the type of focusing frame when shooting with the auto focus. Select the mode according to the subject.

    • Wide: Focuses on a subject covering the whole range of the screen automatically. When you press the shutter button halfway down in the still image shooting mode, a green frame is displayed around the area that is in focus.
    • Zone: Select a zone on the monitor on which to focus, and the Sony A7s III will automatically select a focus area.Center Fix:Focuses automatically on a subject in the center of the image. Use together with the focus-lock function to create the composition you want.
    • Spot: S/Spot: M/Spot: L:Allows you to move the focusing frame to a desired point on the screen and focus on an extremely small subject in a narrow area.
    •  Expand Spot: If the Sony A7s III cannot focus on a single selected point, it uses focus points around the Spot as a secondary priority area for focusing.
    • Tracking: This setting is available only when the Focus Mode is set to Continuous AF. When the shutter button is pressed and held halfway down, the Sony A7s III tracks the subject within the selected autofocus area. Point the cursor at Tracking on the Focus Area setting screen, and then select the desired area to start tracking using the left/right sides of the control wheel. You can also move the tracking start area to the desired point by designating the area as a Tracking: ZoneTracking: Spot S/Tracking: Spot M/Tracking: Spot L or Tracking: Expand Spot.

    Hack: In the default settings, Focus Area is assigned to the C2 button.

    Focus Area Limit:

    By limiting the types of available focus area settings in advance, you can more quickly select settings for Focus Area.

    Switch V/H AF Area:

    You can set whether to switch the Focus Area and the position of the focusing frame according to the orientation of the Sony A7s Mark 3(horizontal/vertical). This function is useful when shooting scenes for which you have to change the Sony A7s Mark 3position frequently, such as portraits or sports scenes.

    • Off: Does not switch the Focus Area and the position of the focusing frame according to the orientation of the Sony A7s Mark 3(horizontal/vertical).
    • AF Point Only: Switches the position of the focusing frame according to the orientation of the Sony A7s Mark 3(horizontal/vertical). The Focus Area is fixed.
    • AF Point + AF Area: Switches both the Focus Area and the position of the focusing frame according to the orientation of the Sony A7s Mark 3(horizontal/vertical).
    Focus Area Color:

    You can specify the color of the frame indicating the focusing area. If the frame is difficult to see because of the subject, make it more visible by changing its color.

    Hack: Set it to Red instead of white, it’s easier to see where the focus is.

    Del. Regist. AF Area:

    Deletes the focusing frame position that was registered using AF Area Registration.

    AF Area Auto Clear:

    Sets whether the focus area should be displayed all the time or should disappear automatically shortly after focus is achieved.

    Focus Menu – Focus Area – page 22 of 51

    Sony A7s Iii Shooting Menu 22

    AF-C Area Display:

    ou can set whether to display the area that is in focus when Focus Area is set to Wide or Zone, in Continuous AF mode.

    Phase Detect Area:

    Sets whether to display the Phase Detection AF area.

    Circ. of Focus Point:

    Sets whether to allow the focusing frame to jump from one end to the other when you move the focusing frame. This function is useful when you want to move the focusing frame from one end to the other quickly.

    The function can be used when the following settings are selected for Focus Area:$

    • Zone
    • Spot: S/Spot: M/Spot: L
    • Expand Spot
    • Tracking: Zone
    • Tracking: Spot S/Tracking: Spot M/Tracking: Spot L
    • Tracking: Expand Spot

    AF Frame Move Amt:

    Sets the distance by which the focusing frame is moved when Focus Area is set to Spot, etc. You can quickly move the focusing frame by increasing the distance, such as in situations where the subject is moving a lot.

    • Standard: The focusing frame moves by the standard distance.
    • Large: The focusing frame moves over a greater distance at a time than with Standard.

    Focus Menu – Face/Eye AF – page 23 of 51

    Sony A7s Iii Shooting Menu 23

    Face/Eye Prior. in AF:

    Sets whether the Sony A7s Mark 3detects faces or eyes inside the focus area while performing autofocus and then focuses on the eyes automatically (Eye AF).

    • On: Focuses on the faces or eyes with priority if there are faces or eyes inside or around the designated focus area.
    • Off: Does not prioritize faces or eyes when performing auto-focusing.
    Face/Eye Subject:

    Selects the target to be detected with the Face/Eye AF function.

    • Human: Detects human faces/eyes.
    • Animal: Detects animal eyes.
    Right/Left Eye Select:

    Sets whether to focus on the left eye or right eye when Face/Eye Subject is set to Human. Either auto; left or right.

    Face/Eye Frame Disp.:

    Sets whether or not to display the face/eye detection frame when a face or eyes are detected.

    Face Memory:

    Sets personal face data. If you register faces in advance, the Sony A7s III can focus on the registered face as a priority.

    Up to eight faces can be registered.

    Options:

    • New Registration: Shoots and registers faces.
    • Order Exchanging: When multiple faces are registered, the order of priority for the registered face data can be changed.
    • Delete: Deletes registered faces one by one.Delete
    • All: Deletes all registered faces at once.
    Regist. Faces Priority:

    Sets whether to focus with higher priority on faces registered using Face Memory.

    Focus Menu – Focus Assistant – page 24 of 51

    Sony A7s Iii Shooting Menu 24

    Auto Magnifier in MF:

    Enlarges the image on the screen automatically to make manual focusing easier. This works in Manual Focus or Direct Manual Focus shooting.

    Focus Magnifier:

    You can check the focus by enlarging the image before shooting.

    Unlike with Auto Magnifier in MF, you can magnify the image without operating the focus ring.

    Focus Magnif. Time:

    Set the duration for which an image is to be magnified using the Auto Magnifier in MF or Focus Magnifier function.

    • 2 Sec: Magnifies the images for 2 seconds.
    • 5 Sec: Magnifies the images for 5 seconds.
    • No Limit: Magnifies the images until you press the shutter button.
    Initial Focus Mag.:

    Sets the initial magnification scale when using Focus Magnifier. Select a setting that will help you frame your shot.

    • x1.0: Displays the image with the same magnification as the shooting screen.
    • x2.1: Displays a 2.1-times enlarged image.

    APS-C/Super 35mm size shooting:

      x1.0: Displays the image with the same magnification as the shooting screen.
      x1.5: Displays a 1.5-times enlarged image.
    AF in Focus Mag.:

    You can focus on the subject more accurately using auto-focus by magnifying the area where you want to focus. … While the magnified image is displayed, you can focus on a smaller area than the flexible spot.

    Focus Menu – Peaking Display – page 25 of 51

    Sony A7s Iii Shooting Menu 25

    Peaking Display:

    Sets the peaking function, which enhances the outline of in-focus areas during shooting with Manual Focus or Direct Manual Focus.

    Peaking level:

    Sets the level of enhancement of in-focus areas. Either High, Mid or Low.

    Peaking Color:

    Sets the color used to enhance in-focus areas. Choose between Red, Yellow, Blue or White.

    Playback Menu – Playback Target – page 26 of 51

    Sony A7s Iii Shooting Menu 26

    Select Playback Media:

    Selects a slot that contains a memory card.

    View Mode:

    Select how the Sony A7s Mark 3will arrange captured pictures in the viewing browser.

    Playback Menu – Magnification – page 27 of 51

    Sony A7s Iii Shooting Menu 27

    Enlarge Image:

    Select an image and expand a portion of that picture. Useful for checking details and focus.

    Enlarge Init. Mag.:

    Sets the initial magnification scale when playing back enlarged images.

    Enlarge Initial Pos.:

    Sets the initial position when enlarging an image in playback. You can select either image center or the focus position.

    Playback Menu – Selection/Memo – page 28 of 51

    Sony A7s Iii Shooting Menu 28

    Protect:

    Set your Sony A7s Mark 3to not shoot images without inserting an SD card.

    Rating:

    Rate your images in-Sony A7s Mark 3for easy culling in Lightroom afterward.

    Rating Set (Cust Key):

    Set a custom key for easy rating.

    Playback Menu – Delete – page 29 of 51

    Sony A7s Iii Shooting Menu 29

    Delete

    Select images you want to delete.

    Delete confirm.:

    You can set whether Delete or Cancel is selected as the default setting on the delete confirmation screen.

    Playback Menu – Edit – page 30 of 51

    Sony A7s Iii Shooting Menu 30

    Rotate:

    Change the orientation of images in-camera.

    Copy:

    You can copy images from a memory card in a slot that is selected using Select PB Media to a memory card in another slot.

    Photo Capture:

    Captures a chosen scene in a movie to save as a still image. First shoot a movie, then pause the movie during playback to capture decisive moments that tend to be missed when shooting still images, and save them as still images.

    JPEG/HEIF Switch:

    Switches the file format (JPEG / HEIF) for still images captured with Photo Capture.

    You can view and edit JPEG files in various environments. The HEIF format has high compression efficiency. The Sony A7s Mark 3can record with high image quality and small file sizes in the HEIF format. Depending on the computer or software, you may not be able to view or edit HEIF files. In addition, a HEIF-compatible environment is required to play back still images in the HEIF format. You can enjoy high-quality still images by connecting the Sony A7s Mark 3and the TV via HDMI.

    Playback Menu – Viewing – page 31 of 51

    Sony A7s Iii Shooting Menu 31

    Cont. Play For Interval:

    Continuously plays back images shot using interval shooting.

    Play Speed For Interval:

    Sets the playback speed for still images during Cont. Play for interval.

    Slide Show:

    Select whether you want the Sony A7s Mark 3to repeat slideshows when all pictures are viewed or not, and choose the interval between slides.

    Playback Menu – Playback Option – page 32 of 51

    Sony A7s Iii Shooting Menu 32

    Image Index:

    Choose whether you want the image browser to display 12 (larger) or 30 (smaller) images per page.

    Display As Group:

    You can select to display burst images in groups or display all images during playback.

    Display Rotation:

    Selects the orientation when playing back recorded images.

    Focus Frame Display:

    Sets whether to display a focus frame around the area where the Sony A7s Mark 3focused when you play back a still image.

    Select Image Jump Dial:

    You can jump between images during playback. This function is useful when you want to find one of many recorded images. You can also quickly find protected images or images set with a particular rating. Assign this function to either the front dial or rear dial.

    Select Image Jump Method:

    Sets the method for jumping between images during playback by operating a dial.

    • One by one: Plays back images one by one.
    • By 10 images: Jumps in units of 10 images.
    • By 100 images: Jumps in units of 100 images.
    • Protect Only: Plays back only protected images.
    • Rating Only: Plays back all rated images.
    • W/O Rating Only: Plays back only images that are not rated.

    Network Menu – Transfer/Remote – page 33 of 51

    Sony A7s Iii Shooting Menu 33

    Ctrl w/ smartphone:

    By connecting the Sony A7s Mark 3to a smartphone using Wi-Fi, you can control the Sony A7s Mark 3and shoot images using the smartphone, and you can transfer images shot with the Sony A7s Mark 3to the smartphone.

    Send To Smartphone:

    You can send one or several images directly to your wireless Sony A7s Mark 3(phone or tablet) by pressing this button.

    You can either decide to choose which images you want to transfer on the Sony A7s Mark 3or the wireless Sony A7s Mark 3(via the Sony PlayMemories app, available for free in the apple or android store).

    You’ll have to connect the-the Sony A7s Mark 3via Wifi first (it makes a Wifi access point), using the instruction on the A7s III screen.

    It works just like connecting to any other access point with your phone or tablet.

    You should do this as quickly as possible, just to get it out of the way.

    When your phone has wirelessly connected to the Sony A7s Mark 3once, and you’ve entered the password, it will remember this, and make it a lot faster to connect later.

    Sending Target:

    When transferring a movie to a smartphone with Send to Smartphone you can set whether to transfer the low-bit-rate proxy movie or the high-bit-rate original movie.

    Cnct. During Power Off:

    Sets whether to accept Bluetooth connections from a smartphone while the Sony A7s Mark 3is turned off. When Cnct. during Power OFF is set to On, you can browse images on the camera’s memory card and transfer images from the Sony A7s Mark 3to a smartphone by operating the smartphone.

    FTP Transfer Funct.:

    You can set up image transferring using an FTP server or transfer images to the FTP server. It requires basic knowledge of FTP servers.

    PC Remote Function:

    Sets whether to save still images stored in both the Sony A7s Mark 3and the computer during PC Remote shooting (Tethering). This setting is useful when you want to check recorded images on the Sony A7s Mark 3without leaving the camera.

    Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl:

    You can operate the Sony A7s Mark 3using a Bluetooth remote commander (sold separately). For details on compatible remote commander, visit the Sony web site in your area, or consult your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility.

    Network Menu – Location Information – page 34 of 51

    Sony A7s Iii Shooting Menu 34

    Location Info Link:

    You can use the application Imaging Edge Mobile to obtain location information from a smartphone that is connected with your Sony A7s Mark 3using Bluetooth communication. You can record the obtained location information when shooting images.

    Auto Time Correction:

    Sets whether to automatically correct the date and time setting of the Sony A7s Mark 3using information from a linked smartphone.

    Auto Area Adjustment:

    Sets whether to automatically correct the area setting of the Sony A7s Mark 3using information from a linked smartphone.

    Playback Menu – Wi-Fi – page 35 of 51

    Sony A7s Iii Shooting Menu 35

    WPS Push:

    If your access point has the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button, you can register the access point to this Sony A7s III easily by pushing the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button.

    Access Point Set.:

    You can register your access point manually. Before starting the procedure, check the SSID name of the access point, security system, and password. The password may be preset in some devices. For details, see the access point operating instructions, or consult the access point administrator.

    Wi-Fi Frequency Band:

    Sets the frequency band for Wi-Fi communications. 5GHz has faster communication speeds and more stable data transfers than 2.4GHz. The Wi-Fi Frequency Band setting applies to smartphone transfers, remote operations using a smartphone, and the PC remote function via Wi-Fi Direct connection.

    Display Wi-Fi Info:

    Displays Wi-Fi information for the Sony A7s Mark 3such as the MAC address, IP address, etc.

    SSID/PW Reset:

    This Sony A7s III shares connection information with devices that have permission to connect when connecting to a smartphone or establishing a Wi-Fi Direct connection with a computer. If you want to change which devices have permission to connect, reset the connection information.

    Network Menu -Bluetooth – page 36 of 51

    Sony A7s Iii Shooting Menu 36

    Bluetooth function:

    Controls the settings for connecting the camera to a smartphone or Bluetooth remote commander via a Bluetooth connection.

    Pairing:

    Displays the screen for pairing the camera and smartphone or Bluetooth remote commander.

    Disp Sony A7s Mark 3Address:

    Displays the BD address of the camera.

    Network Menu – Wired Lan – page 37 of 51

    Sony A7s Iii Shooting Menu 37

    IP Address Setting:

    Sets whether to configure the IP address for the wired LAN automatically or manually.

    Display Wired LAN Info.:

    Displays wired LAN information for this product such as the MAC address or IP address.

    Network Menu – Network Option – page 38 of 51

    Sony A7s Iii Shooting Menu 38

    Airplane Mode:

    When you board an airplane, etc., you can temporarily disable all the wireless-related functions including Wi-Fi.

    Edit Sony A7s Mark 3Name:

    You can change the Sony A7s Mark 3name for Wi-Fi Direct, PC Remote or Bluetooth connections.

    Import Root Certificate:

    Imports a root certificate needed to verify a server from a memory card. Use this function for encrypted communications during FTP transfer.

    Security(IPsec):

    Encrypts data when the camera and a computer communicate via a wired LAN or Wi-Fi connection.

    • IPsec: Sets whether or not the Security(IPsec) function is used. (On/Off)
    • Dest. IP Address: Sets the IP address of the Sony A7s Mark 3to connect using the Security(IPsec) function.
    • Shared Key: Sets the shared key used by the Security(IPsec) function.
    Reset Network Set.:

    Resets all the network settings to default settings.

    Setup Menu – Area/Date – page 39 of 51

    Sony A7s Iii Shooting Menu 39

    Language:

    Selects the language to be used in the menu items, warnings, and messages.

    Area/Date/Time Setting:

    You can set the area (where you are using the camera), daylight savings (On/Off), the date display format, and the date and time.
    The Area/Date/Time Setting screen is displayed automatically when you turn on the product for the first time or when the internal rechargeable backup battery has fully discharged. Select this menu when setting the date and time after the first time.

    NTSC/PAL Selector:

    Plays back movies recorded with the product on a NTSC/PAL system TV.

    Setup Menu – Reset/Save Settings – page 40 of 51

    Sony A7s Iii Shooting Menu 40

    Setting Reset:

    Resets the product to the default settings. Even if you perform Setting Reset, the recorded images are retained.

    Save/Load Settings:

    You can save/load camera settings to/from a memory card. You can also load settings from another camera of the same model.

    Setup Menu – Operation Customize – page 41 of 51

    Sony A7s Iii Shooting Menu 41
    Custom Key Setting(Shoot.)/Custom Key Setting(PB)/Custom Key Setting(Movie):

    You can assign the desired function to the desired key. Some functions are available only when they are assigned to a custom key. For example, I assign Eye AF to AF-ON for Custom Key(Shoot.) because it’s more conveniently placed. You can easily recall Eye AF simply by pressing the AF-ON button. Learn how to do this here:

    The keys that can be assigned functions are different for Custom Key(Shoot.) and Custom Key(PB).

    You can assign the desired functions to the following keys. You can also assign a shooting function to the focus hold button on the lens. However, some lenses do not have a focus hold button.2 1.

    • Custom Button 1
    • Custom Button2
    • AF/MF Button/AEL Button
    • Fn/ Button
    • Control Wheel (Center Button/Down Button/Left Button/Right Button)
    • Custom Button 3
    Function Menu Settings:

    You can assign the functions to be called up when you press the Fn (Function) button.

    Different Set for Still/Mv:

    For each item in still image shooting and movie recording, you can select whether to use a common setting or separate settings.

    You can set the following items separately for still image shooting and movie recording.

    • Aperture
    • Shutter Speed
    • ISO
    • Exposure Comp.
    • Metering Mode
    • White Balance
    • Picture Profile
    • Focus Mode
    DISP (Screen DiSP) Set:

    Allows you to set the screen display modes that can be selected using DISP (Display Setting) in shooting mode.

    • Display All Info.: Shows recording information.
    • No Disp. Info.: Does not show recording information.
    • Histogram: Displays the luminance distribution graphically.
    • Level: Indicates whether the product is level in both the front-back (A) and horizontal (B) directions. When the product is level in either direction, the indicator turns to green.
    Setup Menu – Operation Customize – page 42 of 51
    Sony A7s Iii Shooting Menu 42
    Zoom Ring Rotate:

    Assigns zoom in (T) or zoom out (W) functions to the zoom ring rotation direction. Available only with power zoom lenses that support this function.

    Setup Menu – Dial Customize – page 43 of 51
    Sony A7s Iii Shooting Menu 43
    My Dial Settings:

    You can assign the desired functions to the front dial, rear dial, and control wheel, and register up to three combinations of settings as “My Dial” settings. You can quickly recall or switch registered “My Dial” settings by pressing the custom key you assigned in advance.

    Registering functions to “My Dial”

    Register the functions that you want to assign to the front dial, the rear dial, and the control wheel as My Dial 1through My Dial 3.

    1. MENU – (Setup) – Dial Customize – My Dial Settings.
    2. Select a dial or wheel for (My Dial 1), and press the center of the control wheel.
    3. Select the desired function to assign using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel, and then press the center of the control wheel.
      • Select “–” (Not set) for a dial or wheel to which you do not want to assign any function.
    4. After you select functions for all of the dials and the wheel in (My Dial 1) by repeating Steps 2 and 3, select OK.The settings for (My Dial 1) will be registered.
      • If you want to register (My Dial 2) and (My Dial 3), follow the same procedure as described above.
    Assigning a key to recall “My Dial”

    Assign a custom key to recall the registered “My Dial” settings.

    1. MENU –  (Setup) – Operation Customize – Custom Key Setting or Custom Key Setting – Select the key that you want to use to recall “My Dial.”
    2. Select the number of the “My Dial” setting that you want to recall or the pattern for switching “My Dial.”

    Menu options:

    • My Dial 1 during Hold /My Dial 2 during Hold/My Dial 3 during Hold: While you hold down the key, the functions that you registered in My Dial Settings are assigned to the dial/wheel.
    • My Dial 1-2-3 : Each time you press the key, the function changes in the following sequence: “Normal function – Function of My Dial 1 – Function of My Dial 2 – Function of My Dial 3 – Normal function.”
    • Toggle My Dial 1 /Toggle My Dial 2/Toggle My Dial 3: The function registered using My Dial Settings is maintained even if you do not hold down the key. Press the key again to return to the normal function.
    Shooting while switching “My Dial”

    During shooting, you can recall “My Dial” using the custom key, and shoot as you change the shooting setting by turning the front dial, the rear dial, and the control wheel.

    In the following example, the functions listed below are registered to “My Dial,” and My Dial 1-2-3 is assigned to the C1 (Custom 1) button.

    Operation part My Dial 1 My Dial 2 My Dial 3
    Control wheel ISO White Balance Not set
    Front dial Av Creative Look Move AF Frame : Std
    Rear dial Tv Exposure Comp. Move AF Frame : Std
      • The icons for the functions registered to My Dial 1 are displayed in the lower part of the screen.Press the C1 (Custom1) button.The functions registered to My Dial 1 will be assigned to the control wheel, the front dial, and the rear dial.
    1. Turn the control wheel to set the ISO value, turn the front dial to set the aperture value, and turn the rear dial to set the shutter speed.
    2. Press the C1 button again. The functions registered to My Dial 2 will be assigned to the control wheel, the front dial, and the rear dial.
    3. Turn the control wheel to set White Balance, turn the front dial to set Creative Look, and turn the rear dial to set Exposure Comp..
    4. Press the C1 button again, and change the setting values for the functions registered to My Dial 3.
    5. Press the shutter button to shoot.
    Dial Setup:

    You can switch the functions of the front/rear dial between shutter speed and aperture.

    AV/TV Rotate:

    Sets the direction of rotation for the front dial, rear dial, or control wheel when changing the aperture value or shutter speed.

    Dial EV Comp:

    You can compensate the exposure using the front or rear dial. You can adjust the exposure in a range of -5.0 EV to 5.0 EV.

    Function Ring (lens):

    You can choose which of the following functions to assign to the function ring on the lens: power-assisted focusing (power focus), or switching the angle of view between full frame and APS-C/Super 35 mm (available only with compatible lenses).

    Lock Operation Parts:

    You can set whether the dials will be locked by pressing and holding the Fn (Function) button. You can release the lock by holding the Fn (Function) button down again.

    Lock: Locks the front and rear dials when you press and hold the Fn button.

    Unlock: The front or rear dials are not locked, even if you press and hold the Fn (Function) button.

    Setup Menu – Touch Operation – page 44 of 51

    Sony A7s Iii Shooting Menu 44

    Touch operation:

    Sets whether or not to activate touch operations on the monitor. Touch operations when shooting with the monitor are referred to as “touch panel operations,” and touch operations when shooting with the viewfinder are referred to as “touchpad operations.”

    Touch Panel Pad: Activates both the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor and touchpad operations when shooting with the viewfinder.

    Touch Panel Only: Activates only the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor.

    Touch Pad Only: Activates only the touch pad operations when shooting with the viewfinder. Off: Deactivates all touch operations.

    Off: Deactivates all touch operations.

    Touch Sensitivity:

    Sets the touch operation sensitivity.

    • Sensitive: The touch responsivity is better than with Standard.
    • Standard: Sets the touch sensitivity to normal.
    Touch Panel/Pad:

    Touch operations when shooting with the monitor are referred to as “touch panel operations,” and touch operations when shooting with the viewfinder are referred to as “touch pad operations.” You can select whether to activate touch panel operations or touch pad operations.

    • Both Valid: Activates both the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor and touch pad operations when shooting with the viewfinder.
    • Touch panel Only: Activates only the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor.
    • Touch Pad Only: Activates only the touch pad operations when shooting with the viewfinder.
    Touch Pad Settings:

    You can adjust settings related to touch pad operations during viewfinder shooting.

    • Operation In Vertical Orientation: Sets whether to enable touch pad operations during vertically oriented viewfinder shooting. You can prevent erroneous operations during vertically oriented shooting caused by your nose, etc. touching the monitor.
    • Touch Position Mode: Sets whether to move the focusing frame to the position touched on the screen (Absolute Position), or move the focusing frame to the desired position based on the direction of dragging and the amount of movement (Relative Position).
    • Operation Area: Sets the area to be used for touch pad operations. Restricting the operational area can prevent erroneous operations caused by your nose, etc. touching the monitor.
    Touch Func. In Shooting:

    Touch Focus allows you to specify a position where you want to focus using touch operations.

    This function is available when Focus Area is set to one of following parameters:

    • Wide
    • Zone
    • Center Fix
    • Tracking: Wide
    • Tracking: Zone
    • Tracking: Center Fix

    When performing auto-focusing, you can specify the position where you want to focus using touch operations. After touching the monitor and specifying a position, press the shutter button halfway down to focus.

    1. Touch the monitor.
      • When shooting with the monitor, touch the position where you want to focus.
      • When shooting with the viewfinder, you can move the position of the focus by touching and dragging on the monitor while looking through the viewfinder.
      • To cancel focusing with touch operations, touch  (Touch focus release) icon or press the center of the control wheel if shooting with the monitor, and press the center of the control wheel if shooting with the viewfinder.
    2. Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.

    Press the shutter button all the way down to shoot images.

    Specifying the position where you want to focus in the movie recording mode

    The camera will focus on the touched subject. Touch the subject on which you want to focus before or during recording.

    When Focus Mode is set to Continuous AF, the focus mode temporarily switches to manual focus, and the focus can be adjusted using the focus ring (spot focus). Spot focus is not available when shooting with the viewfinder.

    To cancel spot focus, touch (Touch focus release) icon or press the center of the control wheel.

    When Focus Mode is set to Manual Focus, the focus mode temporarily switches to Continuous AF. When the touched area is in focus, the focus mode returns to manual focus.

    Setup Menu – Finder/Monitor – page 45 of 51

    Sony A7s Iii Shooting Menu 45

    Select Finder/Monitor:

    Sets the method for switching the display between the viewfinder and the monitor.

    • Auto: When you look into the viewfinder, the eye sensor reacts and the display is switched to the viewfinder automatically.
    • VF(Manual): The monitor is turned off and the image is displayed only in the viewfinder.
    • Monitor(Manual): The viewfinder is turned off and the image is always displayed on the monitor.
    Monitor Brightness:

    Adjust the brightness of the screen.

    • Manual: Adjusts the brightness within the range of –2 to +2.
    • Sunny Weather: Sets the brightness appropriately for shooting outdoors.
    Viewfinder Bright:

    When using the viewfinder, this product adjusts the brightness of the viewfinder according to the surrounding environment. Either auto or manual.

    Finder Color Temp:

    Adjusts the color temperature of the viewfinder.

    ViewFinder Magnifi.:

    Sets the display magnification of the viewfinder. If you select Zoom Out, the viewing angle will become narrower. You can easily check the overall composition even when wearing glasses.

    Display Quality:

    You can change the display quality.

    Hack: Set Display Quality to standard in order to save battery life.

    Finder Frame Rate:

    Display the subject’s movements more smoothly by adjusting the frame rate of the viewfinder during still image shooting. This function is convenient when shooting a fast-moving subject.

    Hack: Set Finder Frame Rate to standard in order to save battery life.

    Setup Menu – Display Option – page 46 of 51

    Sony A7s Iii Shooting Menu 46

    TC/UB Disp. Setting:

    Sets the display for the counter, time code, and user bit.

    • Counter: Displays the time counter of movie recording.
    • TC: Displays the time code.
    • U-Bit: Displays the user bit.
    Gamma Display Assist:

    Movies with S-Log gamma are assumed to be processed after shooting in order to make use of the wide dynamic range. Images with the HLG gamma are assumed to be displayed on HDR-compatible monitors. They are therefore displayed in low contrast during shooting, and may be difficult to monitor. However, you can use the Gamma Display Assist function to reproduce contrast equivalent to that of normal gamma. In addition, Gamma Display Assist can also be applied when playing back movies on the camera’s monitor/viewfinder.

    Gamma Disp. Assist Typ.:

    Selects the conversion type for Gamma Display Assist.

    Auto:
    • Displays images with effects as follows according to the gamma or color mode set in Picture Profile.
      • When the gamma is set to S-Log2: S-Log2→709(800%)
      • When the gamma is set to S-Log3: S-Log3→709(800%)
      • When the gamma is set to HLG, HLG1, HLG2, or HLG3, and the color mode is set to BT.2020: HLG(BT.2020)
      • When the gamma is set to HLG, HLG1, HLG2, or HLG3, and the color mode is set to 709: HLG(709)
    • Displays images with an HLG(BT.2020) effect when shooting HLG still images with HLG Still Image set to On.
    • Displays images with an S-Log3→709(800%) effect when outputting RAW movies to another Sony A7s Mark 3connected via HDMI during movie shooting.
    S-Log2→709(800%):
    Displays images with an S-Log2 gamma reproducing contrast equivalent to ITU709 (800%).
    S-Log3→709(800%):
    Displays images with an S-Log3 gamma reproducing contrast equivalent to ITU709 (800%).
     HLG(BT.2020):
    Displays images after adjusting the image quality of the monitor or viewfinder to a quality that is almost the same as when images are displayed on an HLG(BT.2020) compatible monitor. HLG(709):
    Displays images after adjusting the image quality of the monitor or viewfinder to a quality that is almost the same as when images are displayed on an HLG(709) compatible monitor.
    Remain Shoot Display:

    Sets whether or not to display an indicator of the remaining number of still images that can be continuously shot at the same shooting speed.

    • Always Display: Always displays the indicator when shooting still images.
    • Shoot-Only Fisplay: During shooting, the remaining number of images that can be shot is always displayed. When you press the shutter button halfway down, the remaining number of images is displayed.
    • Not Displayed: Does not display the indicator.
    Auto Review:

    You can check the recorded image on the screen right after the shooting. You can also set the display time for Auto Review. (10-5-2 seconds)

    Setup Menu – Power Setting option – page 47 of 51

    Sony A7s Iii Shooting Menu 47

    Power Save Start Time:

    Sets time intervals to automatically switch to power save mode when you are not performing operations to prevent wearing down the battery pack. To return to shooting mode, perform an operation such as pressing the shutter button halfway down. (30, 5, 2 or 1 minutes, 10 seconds)

    Auto Power OFF temp.:

    Sets the temperature of the camera at which the camera turns off automatically during shooting. When it is set to High, you can continue shooting even when the temperature of the camera gets hotter than normal.

    Setup Menu – Sound Option – page 48 of 51

    Sony A7s Iii Shooting Menu 48

    Volume Settings:

    Sets the sound volume for movie playback. During playback, press the bottom side of the control wheel while playing back movies to display the operation panel, then adjust the volume. You can adjust the volume while listening to the actual sound.

    4ch Audio monitoring:

    Sets the audio to be monitored by the Sony A7s Mark 3 connected to the (headphone) terminal of the camera when you record movie audio in 4 channels or when playing back a movie recorded in 4 channels.

    • CH1/CH2: Outputs audio from channel 1 to the L (left) side and from channel 2 to the R (right) side.
    • CH3/CH4: Outputs audio from channel 3 to the L (left) side and from channel 4 to the R (right) side.
    • VH1+3/CH2+4: Outputs the mixed audio of channel 1 and channel 3 to the L (left) side and the mixed audio of channel 2 and channel 4 to the R (right) side.
    • CH1/CH1: Outputs audio from channel 1 to the L (left) side and R (right) side.
    • CH2/CH2: Outputs audio from channel 2 to the L (left) side and R (right) side.
    Audio Signals:

    Selects whether the product produces a sound or not.

    Setup Menu – USB – page 49 of 51

    Sony A7s Iii Shooting Menu 49

    USB Connection:

    Selects the USB connection method when this product is connected to a computer, etc.

    • Auto: Establishes a Mass Storage or MTP connection automatically, depending on the computer or other USB devices to be connected.
    • Mass Storage: Establishes a Mass Storage connection between this product, a computer, and other USB devices.
    • MTP: Establishes an MTP connection between this product, a computer, and other USB devices.
    USB LUN Setting:

    Enhances compatibility by limiting of USB connection functions.

    USB Power Supply:

    Sets whether to supply power via the USB cable when the product is connected to a computer or an USB device.

    Setup Menu – External Output – page 50 of 51

    Sony A7s Iii Shooting Menu 50

    HDMI Resolution:

    When you connect the camera to a TV or monitor device using an HDMI cable (sold separately), you can select the resolution to be output from the HDMI terminal of the camera during still image shooting or playback.

    • Auto: The camera automatically recognizes the resolution of the connected TV or output device and sets the output resolution accordingly.
    • 2160p: Outputs signals in 2160p.
    • 1080p: Outputs signals in HD picture quality.
    • 1080i: Outputs signals in HD picture quality.
    HDMI Output Settings:

    Sets the video and audio to be output to an external recorder/player connected via HDMI when shooting a movie.
    Use a Premium High Speed HDMI Cable (sold separately) to output 4K movies or RAW movies.

    • Rec. Media dur HDMI Output: Sets whether or not to record movies on the memory card of the camera during HDMI output.
    • On: Records movies on the memory card of the camera, and outputs the movies to the HDMI-connected device at the same time. The color depth for the output movie is based on Record Setting under Movie Settings.
    • Off(HDMI Only): Does not record movies on the memory card of the camera, and outputs movies only to devices connected via HDMI.
    • Output Resolution: Sets the resolution of the image that will be output to another device connected via HDMI when Rec. Media dur HDMI Output is set to On and RAW Output is set to Off. (Auto / 2160p / 1080p / 1080i)
    • 4K Output Set.(HDMI Only): Sets the frame rate and color depth of 4K movie output to another device connected via HDMI when Rec. Media dur HDMI Output is set to Off(HDMI Only) and RAW Output is set to Off. (60p 10bit / 50p 10bit / 30p 10bit / 25p 10bit / 24p 10bit)
    • RAW Output: Sets whether to output RAW movies to another RAW-compatible device connected via HDMI. (On / Off)
    • RAW Output Setting: Sets the frame rate when outputting RAW movies to another RAW-compatible device connected via HDMI. (60p / 50p / 30p / 25p / 24p)Color Gamut for RAW Output:Sets the color gamut when outputting RAW movies to another RAW-compatible device connected via HDMI.
    • Time Code Output: Sets whether to output the time code and user bit to another device connected via HDMI. (On / Off)Time code information is transmitted as digital data, not as an image displayed on the screen. The connected device can then refer to the digital data in order to recognize the time data.
    • REC Control: Sets whether to start or stop recording on the external recorder/player remotely by operating the camera when the camera is connected to an external recorder/player. (On / Off)
    • 4ch Audio Output: When recording audio in 4 channels, set the combination of audio channels that will be output to other devices connected via HDMI.
    HDMI Info. Display:

    Selects whether to display shooting information on a TV or a monitor device when the camera and TV, etc. are connected via an HDMI cable.

    CTRL FOR HDMI:

    When connecting this product to a “BRAVIA” Sync-compatible TV using an HDMI cable, you can operate this product by aiming the TV remote control at the TV.

    Setup Menu – Setup Option – page 51 of 51

    Sony A7s Iii Shooting Menu 51

    Video Light Mode:

    Sets the illumination setting for the HVL-LBPC LED light

    • Power Link: The video light turns on/off in sync with the ON/OFF operation of this camera.
    • REC Link: The video light turns on/off in sync with movie recording start/stop.
    • REC Link&STBY: The video light turns on when movie recording starts and dims when not recording (STBY).
    • Auto: The video light automatically turns on when it is dark.
    IR Remote Ctrl:

    You can operate the camera using a Sony Infrared Remote Commander.

    Sensor Cleaning:

    If dust or debris gets inside the camera and adheres to the surface of the image sensor (the part that converts the light to an electric signal), it may appear as dark spots on the image, depending on the shooting environment. If this happens, clean the image sensor quickly by following the steps below.

    Auto Pixel Mapping:

    Sets whether or not to automatically optimize the image sensor (pixel mapping). Normally, set this function to On.

    Pixel Mapping:

    You can manually optimize the image sensor pixel mapping. If Auto Pixel Mapping is set to Off, perform Pixel Mapping regularly according to the following procedure.

    Hack: Sony recommends that you perform the operation once every three days!

    Version:

    Displays the version of this camera’s software. Check the version when updates for this product’s software are released, etc.

    Also displays the version of the lens if a lens compatible with firmware updates is attached.

    They display the version of the Mount Adaptor in the lens area if a Mount Adaptor compatible with firmware updates is attached.

    Conclusion

    That’s a wrap, we’ve gone through the entire Sony A7s III menu system. If you find only 49 pages instead of 51, you are in video mode. This menu is largely the same, except some photography-only settings (like RAW file type) have been omitted. I thought it would be silly to list this shorter videography menu too, but if it would help you out, let me know in the comments.